2015 CALENDAR 2015 FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES

2015 CALENDAR 2015 FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES
CALENDAR 2015
FACULTY OF
HEALTH SCIENCES
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMMES
Potchefstroom Campus
2015
Address all correspondence to:
The Registrar
North-West University
Potchefstroom Campus
Private Bag X6001
Potchefstroom
2520
Tel: (018)299-1111/2222
Fax: (018)299-2799
Internet: http://www.nwu.ac.za
PLEASE MENTION YOUR UNIVERSITY NUMBER IN ALL CORRESPONDENCE.
The General Academic Rules of the University, to which all students have to subject
themselves and which apply to all the qualifications offered by the University, appear in a
separate
publication
and
are
available
on
the
web
page
at:
http://www.puk.ac.za/jaarboek/index_e.html.
Please note: Although the information in this Calendar has been compiled with the utmost
care and accuracy, the Council and the Senate of the University accept no responsibility
whatsoever for errors that may occur. Before students finally decide on the selection of
modules, they must consult the class timetable. If a clash occurs in the planned selection of a
student, the relevant module combination is not permitted.
i
Table of Contents
G.1
FACULTY RULES ......................................................... 1
G.1.1
AUTHORITY OF THE GENERAL RULES ...................................................... 1
G.1.2
G.1.2.1
FACULTY SPECIFIC RULES ......................................................................... 1
General rules: ................................................................................................. 1
G.1.3
WARNING AGAINST PLAGIARISM..............................................................11
G.1.4
CAPACITY STIPULATION ............................................................................11
G.1.5
STRUCTURES IN THE FACULTY .................................................................11
G.1.6
QUALIFICATIONS, PROGRAMMES AND CURRICULA ..............................13
G.1.7
G.1.7.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACHELOR OF ARTS ..................19
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................19
G.1.7.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme...............................19
G.1.7.3
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules ..........................................19
G.1.7.4
Programme: Recreational Science .................................................................19
G.1.7.5
Programme: Biokinetics .................................................................................20
G.1.7.6
Programme: Kinderkinetics ............................................................................21
G.1.7.7
Programme: Sport Science ............................................................................22
G.1.7.8
Programme: Psychology ................................................................................23
G.1.8
G.1.8.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACHELOR OF SCIENCE ............26
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................26
G.1.8.2
Admission requirements of the programme ....................................................26
G.1.8.3
Faculty specific admission requirements ........................................................26
G.1.8.4
Programme: Biokinetics .................................................................................26
G.1.8.5
Programme: Kinderkinetics ............................................................................27
G.1.8.6
Programme: Sport Science ............................................................................28
G.1.8.7
Programme: Physiology .................................................................................29
G.1.8.8
Programme: Nutrition .....................................................................................30
G.1.8.9
Programme: Psychology ...............................................................................32
G.1.9
G.1.9.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACCALAUREUS
SCIENTIAE PHARMACOLOGY ....................................................................35
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................35
G.1.9.2
General admission requirements ....................................................................35
G.1.9.3
Programme Pharmacology .............................................................................35
G.1.10
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACCALAUREUS
PHARMACIAE ...............................................................................................38
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................38
G.1.10.1
G.1.10.2
General admission requirements ....................................................................38
ii
G.1.10.3
Programme: Pharmacy ..................................................................................38
G.1.11
G.1.11.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACHELOR IN
CONSUMER SCIENCES ...............................................................................41
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................41
G.1.11.2
Admission requirements of the qualification....................................................41
G.1.11.3
Programme: Consumer Sciences ...................................................................41
G.1.12
G.1.12.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF ARTS ..........................................43
Duration (Minimum and maximum) .................................................................43
G.1.12.2
Admission requirements for the qualification ..................................................43
G.1.12.3
Programme: Recreational Science .................................................................43
G.1.12.4
Programme: Biokinetics .................................................................................44
G.1.12.5
Programme: Kinderkinetics ............................................................................45
G.1.12.6
Programme: Sport Science ............................................................................46
G.1.12.7
Programme: Psychology ................................................................................47
G.1.12.8
Programme: Positive Psychology ..................................................................49
G.1.12.9
Programme: Clinical Psychology ....................................................................51
G.1.12.10
Programme: Counselling Psychology .............................................................53
G.1.12.11
Programme: Research Psychology ...............................................................55
G.1.13
G.1.13.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF SCIENCE ....................................57
Duration (Minimum and maximum) .................................................................57
G.1.13.2
Admission requirements of the qualification....................................................57
G.1.13.3
Programme: Biokinetics .................................................................................57
G.1.13.4
Programme: Kinderkinetics ............................................................................58
G.1.13.5
Programme: Sport Science ............................................................................59
G.1.13.6
Programme: Pharmaceutical Chemistry .........................................................60
G.1.13.7
Programme: Pharmacology ............................................................................62
G.1.13.8
Programme: Pharmaceutics ...........................................................................63
G.1.13.9
Programme: Occupational Hygiene ................................................................65
G.1.13.10
Programme: Nutrition ....................................................................................66
G.1.13.11
Programme: Dietetics .....................................................................................68
G.1.13.12
Programme: Physiology .................................................................................70
G.1.13.13
Programme: Clinical Psychology ...................................................................71
G.1.13.14
Programme: Counselling Psychology ............................................................73
G.1.13.15
Programme: Research Psychology ................................................................75
G.1.14
G.1.14.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF PHARMACY................................77
Duration (Minimum and maximum) .................................................................77
G.1.14.2
Admission requirements of the qualification....................................................77
G.1.14.3
Programme: Pharmacy Practice .....................................................................77
iii
G.1.14.4
Programme: Advanced Clinical Pharmacy......................................................79
G.1.15
G.1.15.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF CONSUMER SCIENCES ............81
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................81
G.1.15.2
Admission requirements of the qualification....................................................81
G.1.15.3
Programme: Consumer Sciences ...................................................................82
G.1.16
G.1.16.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK ..........................84
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................84
G.1.16.2
Admission requirements of the qualification....................................................84
G.1.16.3
Social Work Curriculums ................................................................................84
G.1.16.4
Collective outcomes of the Social Work programmes .....................................84
G.1.16.5
Programme: Social Work ...............................................................................85
G.1.16.6
Programme: Child Protection .........................................................................86
G.1.16.7
Programme: Forensic Practice .......................................................................89
G.1.16.8
Programme: Play Therapy..............................................................................90
G.1.17
G.1.17.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF NURSING SCIENCE ...................92
Duration (minimum and maximum) .................................................................92
G.1.17.2
Admission requirements of the qualification....................................................92
G.1.17.3
Collective outcomes .......................................................................................92
G.1.17.4
Programme: Research Master‟s degree (Dissertation) ...................................93
G.1.17.5
Programme: Structured Master‟s Degree (Mini-dissertation) ..........................96
G.1.18
G.1.18.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF HEALTH SCIENCES IN
TRANSDISCIPLINARY HEALTH PROMOTION ..........................................101
Duration (minimum and maximum) ...............................................................101
G.1.18.2
Admission requirements of the qualification..................................................101
G.1.18.3
Programme: Transdisciplinary Health Promotion ..........................................102
G.1.19
G.1.19.1
RULES FOR THE DEGREE DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY (PHD) ................103
Duration (minimum and maximum) ...............................................................103
G.1.19.2
Admission requirements of the qualification..................................................103
G.1.19.3
Programme: Human Movement Science ......................................................104
G.1.19.4
Programme: Recreation Science ..................................................................105
G.1.19.5
Programme: Pharmaceutical Chemistry .......................................................106
G.1.19.6
Programme: Pharmaceutics .........................................................................107
G.1.19.7
Programme: Pharmacology ..........................................................................108
G.1.19.8
Programme: Pharmacy Practice ...................................................................110
G.1.19.9
Programme: Occupational Hygiene ..............................................................111
G.1.19.10
Programme: Dietetics ..................................................................................112
G.1.19.11
Programme: Physiology ..............................................................................113
G.1.19.12
Programme: Consumer Sciences .................................................................115
iv
G.1.19.13
Programme: Nutrition ...................................................................................116
G.1.19.14
Programme: Social Work .............................................................................117
G.1.19.15
Programme: Psychology ..............................................................................118
G.1.19.16
Programme: Nursing ...................................................................................119
G.1.20
G.1.20.1
RULES FOR THE POSTBASIC PROGRAMME IN MIDWIFERY
AND NEONATAL NURSING SCIENCE .......................................................122
Duration of study ..........................................................................................122
G.1.20.2
Admission requirements ...............................................................................122
G.1.20.3
Programme and qualification code ...............................................................122
G.1.20.4
List of modules .............................................................................................122
G.1.21
G.1.21.1
RULES FOR THE ADVANCED UNIVERSITY DIPLOMA IN
HEALTH SCIENCE ......................................................................................123
Modules and credits .....................................................................................123
G.1.21.2
Ratio between credits and teaching periods .................................................123
G.1.21.3
Recognition of prior learning.........................................................................123
G.1.21.4
Registration ..................................................................................................124
G.1.21.5
Duration of the study ....................................................................................124
G.1.21.6
List of modules .............................................................................................124
G.1.21.7
Programme: Advanced University Diploma in Health Science (One
Year) ............................................................................................................125
G.1.22
G.1.22.1
RULES FOR THE POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN
PHARMACOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES OF DRUG THERAPY .......................130
Duration of study ..........................................................................................130
G.1.22.2
Admission requirements ...............................................................................130
G.1.22.3
Programme and qualification code ...............................................................131
G.1.22.4
Curriculum: Pharmacological Principles of Drug Therapy (G501P) ..............131
G.2
MODULE OUTCOMES (ALPHABETICAL) ............... 133
G.2.1
HONOURS DEGREES ................................................................................133
G.2.2
MASTERS DEGREES .................................................................................164
G.2.3
DOCTORAL DEGREES ..............................................................................191
G.2.4
POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMAS....................................................................196
G.2.5
ADDITIONAL MODULES FROM OTHER FACULTIES ...............................205
G.3
LIST OF MODULES .................................................. 207
G.3.1
SCHOOL OF BIOKINETICS, RECREATION AND SPORT SCIENCE .........207
G.3.2
FOCUS AREA: PHYSICAL ACTIVITY, SPORT AND RECREATION
(PhASRec) ..................................................................................................207
G.3.3
SCHOOL OF PSYCHOSOCIAL BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES .....................208
v
G.3.4
AFRICA UNIT FOR TRANSDISCIPLINARY HEALTH RESEARCH
(AUTHeR) ....................................................................................................209
G.3.5
SCHOOL OF PHYSIOLOGY, NUTRITION AND CONSUMER
SCIENCES...................................................................................................210
G.3.6
CENTRE OF EXCELLENCE FOR NUTRITION (CEN) ................................211
G.3.7
HYPERTENSION IN AFRICA RESEARCH TEAM (HART) .........................212
G.3.8
SCHOOL OF PHARMACY ..........................................................................212
G.3.9
NICHE AREA: MEDICINE USAGE IN SOUTH AFRICA (MUSA) ................213
G.3.10
CENTRE OF EXCELLENCE FOR PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES
(Pharmacen) ...............................................................................................213
G.3.11
SCHOOL OF NURSING SCIENCES............................................................213
G.3.12
FOCUS AREA: QUALITY IN NURSING AND MIDWIFERY (INSINQ) .........214
G.3.13
ADDITIONAL MODULES (OTHER FACULTIES) ........................................215
vi
FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES
Office Bearers
DEAN
Prof AF Kotzé, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE), PhD
(Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE)
ADMINISTRATIVE MANAGER
Mrs C Postma, BA (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), MA (PU for CHE)
CENTRE FOR PHARMACEUTICAL AND BIOMEDICAL SERVICES
Head: Prof B Boneschans, BSc (Pharm) (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutics and
Pharmaceutical Chemistry) (PU for CHE), DSc (Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE)
Research Institute for Industrial Pharmacy incorporated with Centre for Quality
Assurance of Medicine (NIIF/CENQAM)
Operational Head: Dr E Swanepoel, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutics) (PU for
CHE), PhD (Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE)
DST/NWU PRECLINICAL DRUG DEVELOPMENT PLATFORM (PCDDP)
Director: Prof AF Grobler, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (Biochemistry) (PU for CHE), MSc
(Medical Biochemistry) (US), PhD (Pharmaceutics) (NWU)
VIVARIUM
Head: Mr CJJ Bester, National Diploma in Laboratory Animal Technology, Senior Primary
Education Diploma (POK), Higher Education Diploma (POK)
CENTRE FOR CHILD, YOUTH, AND FAMILY STUDIES
Head: Prof CHM Bloem, BSW (Social Work) (UP), BSW Hons (Industrial Sociology) (UP),
MSW (Social Work) (UP), DPhil (Social Work) (UP)
UNIT FOR OPEN DISTANCE LEARNING (UODL)
Academic co-ordinator: Dr P Bester, BCur (PU for CHE), MCur (Psychiatric Community
Nursing Sciences) (PU for CHE), Advanced University Diploma in Health Service
Management and Education (NWU), PhD Nursing Sciences (NWU)
RESEARCH ENTITIES
Centre of Excellence for Nutrition (CEN)
Director: Prof JC Jerling, BSc (US), Hons BSc (PU for CHE), MSc (PU for CHE), PhD (PU for
CHE)
vii
Centre of Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences (Pharmacen)
Director: Prof J Du Plessis, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (PU for CHE), PhD (PU for CHE),
Diploma in Tertiary Education (PU for CHE)
Research Unit: Africa Unit for Transdisciplinary Health Research (AUTHeR)
Director: Prof A Kruger, B Soc Sc (Nursing) (UOFS), Hons B Soc Sc (Nursing) (UOFS), M.Sc.
Diploma (Diabetes Education) (University of Glamorgan, Scotland), MSoc Sc (Nursing)
(UOFS), PhD (PU for CHE)
Programme leader: Master of Health Sciences in Transdisciplinary Health Promotion:
Prof A Kruger, B Soc Sc (Nursing) (UOFS), Hons B Soc Sc (Nursing) (UOFS), MSc Diploma
(Diabetes Education) (University of Glamorgan, Scotland), MSoc Sc (Nursing) (UOFS), PhD
(PU for CHE)
Programme leader: Master of Arts in Positive Psychology: Prof MP Wissing, BA (PU for
CHE), BA Hons (Psychology) (PU for CHE), MA (Psychology (PU for CHE), Drs Phil (Clinical
Psychology) (Free University of Amsterdam, The Netherlands), DPhil (Psychology) PU for
CHE
Focus area: Hypertension in Africa Research Team (HART)
Director: Prof R Schutte, BTech (NMMU), Hons BSc (Physiology) (PU for CHE), MSc
(Physiology) (NWU), PhD (Physiology) (NWU)
Focus area: Physical Activity, Sport and Recreation (PhASRec)
Director: Prof SJ Moss, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (Biochemistry) (PU for CHE), Hons BSc
(Biokinetics) (PU for CHE), MSc (Biochemistry) (PU for CHE), PhD (PU for CHE), MBA (NWU)
Focus area: Quality in Nursing and Midwifery (INSINQ)
Director: Dr CS Minnie, B Art et Scien (Nursing) (PU for CHE), Hons BA (Psychology) (PU for
CHE), MCur (Obstetric- and Neonatal Nursing Science) (PU for CHE), PhD (NWU)
Niche area: Medicine Usage in South Africa (MUSA)
Niche area leader: Prof MS Lubbe, BPharm (PU for CHE), MPharm (Pharmacy Practice) (PU
for CHE), PhD (Pharmacy Practice) (PU for CHE)
SCHOOL OF BIOKINETICS, RECREATION AND SPORT SCIENCE
Director: Prof JH de Ridder, BA (PU for CHE), HED (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE),
MA (PU for CHE), PhD (PU for CHE)
Institute for Biokinetics:
Head: Prof CJ Wilders, BJur (PU for CHE), BA (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), PhD
(PU for CHE)
Institute for Sport Science and Development:
Head: Dr Y Willemse, BA (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), MA (PU for CHE), PhD
(NWU)
viii
Programme Managers
Human Movement Sciences & Academic Programme Manager:
Prof DDJ Malan, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (PU for CHE), MSc (PU for CHE), DSc (PU for
CHE)
Recreation Science:
Dr JT Weilbach, BCom (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), MA (NWU), PhD (NWU)
Diploma in Sport Science:
Mr PH van den Berg, BA (PU for CHE), HED (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), MA
(NWU)
Subject Group Chairs
Biokinetics:
Prof CJ Wilders, BJur (PU for CHE), BA (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), MA (PU for
CHE), PhD (PU for CHE)
Kinderkinetics:
Prof AE Pienaar, BA (PU for CHE), HED (PU for CHE), Hons BA (PU for CHE), MA (PU for
CHE), PhD (PU for CHE)
Human Movement Sciences:
Prof MA Monyeki, BA (UNIN), HED (UININ), Hons BA (UNIN), MA (UNIN), PhD (VU)
Sport Science:
Prof B Coetzee, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (PU for CHE), MSc (PU for CHE), PhD (NWU)
SCHOOL OF PHARMACY
Director: Prof S van Dyk, B Pharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutical Chemistry) (PU for
CHE), PhD (Pharmaceutical Chemistry) (PU for CHE)
Programme Leaders:
Pharmacy (Undergraduate) & Academic Programme Manager:
Prof AF Marais, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE), PhD
(Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE)
Programme for Continuous Professional Training:
Mrs JH Hamman, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc, (Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE)
Subject Group Chairs
Pharmacology:
Prof L Brand, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmacology) (PU for CHE), PhD (PU for CHE)
Pharmaceutics:
Prof JH Steenekamp, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutics) (PU for CHE), PhD
(Pharmaceutics) (NWU)
ix
Pharmaceutical Chemistry:
Prof JP Petzer, BPharm (PU for CHE), MSc (Pharmaceutical Chemistry) (PU for CHE), PhD
(PU for CHE)
Pharmacy Practice:
Mr WD Basson, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (Physiology) (PU for CHE), BPharm (PU for
CHE), MPharm (Pharmacy Practice) (PU for CHE)
Clinical Pharmacy:
Mr LN Scheepers, BPharm (PU for CHE).
SCHOOL OF PHYSIOLOGY, NUTRITION AND CONSUMER SCIENCES
Director: Prof SM Hanekom, BSc (PU for CHE), Postgraduate Diploma in Dietetics (UOFS),
Hons BSc (PU for CHE), MSc (PU for CHE), PhD (PU for CHE)
Academic Programme Manager:
Vacant
Programme managers
Dietetics:
Prof E Wentzel-Viljoen, BSc (Dietetics) (PU for CHE), BSc Hons (Dietetics) (PU for CHE),
Diploma in Hospital Dietetics (US), Management Development Programme (Inst for Applied
Management Sciences, US), PhD (Dietetics) (PU for CHE)
Nutrition Sciences:
Vacant
Occupational Hygiene:
Prof FC Eloff, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (Physiology) (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (Industrial
Physiology) (PU for CHE), MSc (Physiology) (PU for CHE), DSc (Physiology) (PU for CHE)
Subject Group Chairs
Physiology:
Prof JM van Rooyen, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (Industrial Physiology), MSc (Physiology)
(PU for CHE), DSc (Physiology) (PU for CHE)
Consumer Sciences:
Dr J van Staden, BSc Home Economics (Ed) (PU for CHE), BEd (PU for CHE), M Tech
(Fashion) (VUT), PhD (Consumer Sciences) (NWU)
SCHOOL OF PSYCHOSOCIAL BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES
Director: Prof AG Herbst, BA (MW) (UP), MA (MW) (UP), PhD (PU for CHE)
Institute for Psychology and Wellbeing
Head: Prof P Kruger BA (Public & Private Sector) (PU for CHE), BA (Hons) Psychology (PU
for CHE), BA (Hons) Sport Science (PU for CHE), MA Clinical Psychology (UFS), PhD
x
Psychology (NWU), Postgraduate Certificate: Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (Albert Ellis
Institute; New York State University)
Subject Group Chairs
Psychology:
Dr AW Nienaber, BSc (PU for CHE), Hons BSc (PU for CHE), MSc (Counselling Psychology)
(PU for CHE), PhD (NWU)
Social Work:
Prof EH Ryke, BA (SW) RAU, MA (Mental Health) UNISA, Post Grad. Dipl. Philosophy (PU for
CHE), PhD (SW) (NWU)
SCHOOL OF NURSING SCIENCES
Director:
Programme managers
BCur-programme: Dr A du Preez, B Soc Sc (Nursing Sciences)(UV), Hons B Soc Sc
(Nursing Sciences)(UV), BA (Nursing Administration & Education), Diploma in Advanced
Midwifery & Neonatological Nursing science, MCur (Midwifery & Neonatological Nursing
Science), PhD (Nursing Science) (NWU)
Post Basic Programmes: Mrs E Bornman, BA Cur (Nursing Education, Nursing
Management) (UNISA), Diploma Clinical Nursing Science, Assessment Treatment and Care
(UOFS), MCur (Professional Nursing Science) (NWU)
EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE: FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES
Chairperson:
Prof AF Kotzé (Dean)
Vice Chairperson: Prof SM Hanekom
Secretary:
Mrs L Grimbeek (Chief Amin Officer)
Bloem, CHM (Prof)
Boneschans, B (Prof)
De Ridder, JH (Prof)
Du Plessis, J (Prof)
Grobler, AF (Prof)
Herbst, AG (Prof)
Jerling, JC (Prof)
Koen, MP (Prof)
Kruger, A (Prof)
Lubbe, MS (Prof)
Minnie, CS (Dr)
Moss, SJ (Prof)
Postma, C Mrs (Administrative Manager)
Schutte, R (Prof)
Van Dyk, S (Prof)
xi
FACULTY BOARD: FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES
Tel x99
Name
Position
Office of the Dean
2223
1.
Prof AF (Awie) Kotzé
Dean (Chairperson)
2221
2.
Mrs C (Corrie) Postma
Administrative Manager
School of Biokinetics, Recreation and Sport Science
1800
3.
Prof JH (Hans) de Ridder
Director & Professor
1795
4.
Prof DDJ (Dawie) Malan
Professor (Human Movement
Sciences)
1796
5.
Prof AE (Anita) Pienaar
Professor (Kinder Kinetics
1801
6.
Prof CJ (Cilas) Wilders
Professor (Biokinetics)
1790
7.
Prof MA (Andries) Monyeki
Professor (Human Movement
Sciences)
1803
8.
Prof B (Ben) Coetzee
Associate professor (Sport Science)
4284
9.
Dr C (Cindy) Pienaar
Senior Lecturer (Sport Science)
2282
10. Dr M (Mariëtte) Swanepoel
Senior Lecturer (Biokinetics)
1811
11. Dr Y (Yolandi) Willemse
Senior Lecturer (Sport Science)
2037
12. Dr JT (Theron) Weilbach
Senior Lecturer (Recreation Science)
1797
13. Ms W (Wilmarié) du Plessis
Lecturer (Kinder Kinetics)
2034
14. Ms E (Erna) Bruwer
Lecturer (Human Movement Sciences)
1802
15. Mr PH (Pieter) van den Berg
Lecturer (Dipl Sport Science)
1863
16. Ms N (Natasha) Peters
Lecturer (Recreation Science)
School of Pharmacy
2267
17. Prof S (Sandra) van Dyk
Director & Associate professor
2234
18. Prof CB (Tiaan) Brink
Professor (Pharmacology)
2271
19. Prof DW (Douglas) Oliver
Professor (Pharmacology)
2249
20. Prof PJ (Pieter) Milne
Professor (Pharmaceutical Chemistry)
2206
21. Prof JP (Jacques) Petzer
Professor (Pharmaceutical Chemistry)
2233
22. Prof L (Linda) Brand
Associate professor (Pharmacology)
4246
23. Prof LH (Lissinda) du Plessis
Associate professor (Pharmaceutics)
2276
24. Prof AF (Dries) Marais
Associate professor (Pharmaceutics)
xii
Tel x99
Name
Position
2276
25. Prof JH (Jan) Steenekamp)
Associate professor (Pharmaceutics)
2275
26. Prof JC (Anita) Wessels
Associate professor (Pharmaceutical
Chemistry)
2255
27. Mr WD (Willem) Basson
Senior Lecturer (Pharmacy Practice)
2204
28. Dr JM (Jesslee) du Plessis
Senior Lecturer (Clinical Pharmacy)
4073
29. Mrs JH (Hannlie) Hamman
Senior Lecturer (Continuing
Professional Education)
2239
30. Mrs I (Irma) Kotzé
Senior Lecturer (Pharmacy Practice)
2254
31. Dr JC (Johan) Lamprecht
Senior Lecturer (Clinical Pharmacy)
2364
32. Dr DM (Dorcas) Rakumakoe
Senior Lecturer (Clinical Pharmacy)
2183
33. Mr LN (Nico) Scheepers
Senior Lecturer (Clinical Pharmacy)
2277
34. Dr MM (Maides) Malan
Senior Lecturer (Pharmaceutics)
2273
35. Dr JM (Joe) Viljoen
Senior Lecturer (Pharmaceutics)
2230
36. Mr PdeW (Dewet) Wolmarans
Senior Lecturer (Pharmacology)
2272
37. Mrs MA (Mariëtta) Fourie
Lecturer (Pharmaceutics)
School of Physiology, Nutrition and Consumer Sciences
2027
38. Prof SM (Grieta) Hanekom
Director & Associate professor
2439
39. Prof HW (Hugo) Huisman
Professor (Physiology)
2482
40. Prof HS (Salome) Kruger
Professor (Nutrition)
2438
41. Prof L (Leone) Malan
Professor (Physiology)
4670
42. Prof M (Marius) Smuts
Professor (Nutrition)
2440
43. Prof JM (Johannes) van Rooyen
Professor (Physiology)
2467
44. Prof E (Edelweiss) Wentzel-Viljoen
Professor (Nutrition)
2434
45. Prof JL (Johan) du Plessis
Associate professor (Occupational
Hygiene)
2442
46. Prof FC (Fritz) Eloff
Associate professor (Occupational
Hygiene)
2476
47. Prof M (Daleen) van der Merwe
Associate professor (Consumer
Sciences)
2461
48. Dr CR (Chrisna) Botha
Senior Lecturer (Nutrition)
4011
49. Dr RC (Robin) Dolman
Senior Lecturer (Nutrition)
xiii
Tel x99
Name
Position
4283
50. Dr CMT (Carla) Fourie
Senior Lecturer (Physiology)
2399
51. Dr L (Lize) Havemann-Nel
Senior Lecturer (Nutrition)
4669
52. Dr T (Tani) Lombard
Senior Lecturer (Nutrition)
2084
53. Dr J (Hanlie) van Staden
Senior Lecturer (Consumer Sciences)
2468
54. Ms M (Marilize) Richter
Lecturer (Nutrition)
2083
55. Mrs N (Neoline) le Roux
Lecturer (Consumer Sciences)
2474
56. Ms A (Annchen) Mielmann
Lecturer (Consumer Sciences)
4422
57. Ms E (Eloise) Botha
Lecturer (Consumer Sciences)
School of Psychosocial Behavioural Sciences
4079
58. Prof AG (Alida) Herbst
Director & Associate professor
1677
59. Prof H (Herman) Strydom
Professor (Social Work)
1681
60. Prof ML (Mike) Weyers
Professor (Social Work)
1735
61. Prof KFH (Karel) Botha
Professor (Psychology)
1727
62. Prof E (Esmé) van Rensburg
Professor (Psychology)
1726
63. Prof JC (Johan) Potgieter
Associate professor (Psychology)
1687
64. Prof EH (Elma) Ryke
Associate professor (Social Work)
1683
65. Prof CC (Cornelia) Wessels
Associate professor (Social Work)
1388
66. Prof P (Pieter) Kruger
Head: Institute for Psychology and
Wellbeing
1731
67. Dr AW (Alida) Nienaber
Senior Lecturer (Psychology)
2132
68. Dr CM (Tertia) Oosthuizen
Senior Lecturer (Psychology)
1684
69. Dr MM (Marie) Steyn
Senior Lecturer (Social Work)
1387
70. Mrs HK (Heleen) Coetzee
Lecturer (Psychology)
1621
71. Ms TR (Rose) Kgantsi
Lecturer (Psychology)
1682
72. Dr S (Sufran) Smith
Lecturer (Social Work)
School of Nursing Sciences
1889
73. Prof MJ (Marlene) Viljoen
Acting Director & Professor
1837
74. Dr A (Antoinette) du Preez
Senior Lecturer
1853
75. Dr R (Ronel) Pretorius
Senior Lecturer
xiv
Tel x99
Name
Position
1833
76. Dr B (Belinda) Scrooby
Senior Lecturer
2288
77. Mrs E (Elsabe) Bornman
Senior Lecturer (Post basic
programmes)
Centre: Centre of Excellence for Nutrition (CEN)
2481
78. Prof JC (Johann) Jerling
Director & Professor
4668
79. Prof M (Marlien) Pieters
Professor
2480
80. Dr K (Karin) Conradie
Senior Lecturer
Centre: Centre of Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences (Pharmacen)
2274
81. Prof J (Jeanetta) du Plessis
Director & Professor
2238
82. Prof BH (Brian) Harvey
Professor
4467
83. Prof W (Wilna) Liebenberg
Professor
4035
84. Prof JH (Sias) Hamman
Navorsingsprofessor
Research Unit: The Africa Unit for Transdisciplinary Health Research (AUTHeR)
4037
85. Prof A (Annamarie) Kruger
Director & Professor
1901
86. Prof M (Minrie) Greeff
Professor
1725
87. Prof V (Vera) Roos
Professor
Focus area: Hypertension in Africa Research Team (HART)
2435
88. Prof R (Rudolph) Schutte
Director & Professor
2053
89. Dr W (Wayne) Smith
Senior Lecturer
1983
90. Dr C (Carina) Mels
Senior Lecturer
Focus area: Physical Activity, Sport and Recreation (PhASRec)
1821
91. Prof SJ (Hanlie) Moss
Director & Associate professor
Focus area: Quality in Nursing and Midwifery (INSINQ)
1836
92. Dr CS (Karin) Minnie
Director & Senior Lecturer
Niche area: Medicine Usage in South Africa (MUSA)
2288
93. Prof MS (Martie) Lubbe
Niche area leader & Professor
2285
94. Dr JR (Johanita) Burger
Senior Lecturer
Centre for Child, Youth and Family Studies (CCYFS)
95. Prof CHM (Retha) Bloem
Head & Associate professor
xv
Tel x99
Name
Position
96. Dr A (Ansie) Kitching
Senior Lecturer
Sentre for Pharmaceutical and Biomedical Services (SPBS)
2280
97. Prof B (Banie) Boneschans
Head & Professor
2325
98. Dr E (Erna) Swanepoel
Head: RIIP/CENQAM
(Expert Subject Specialist)
2322
99. Dr M (Marius) Brits
Expert Subject Specialist (RIIP)
DST / NWU Preclinical Drug Development Platform (PCDDP)
4467
100.
Prof AF (Anne) Grobler
Director & Professor
2102
101.
Mr CJJ (Cor) Bester
Head: Vivarium
Research chair: SARChi
2444
102.
Prof AE (Alta) Schutte
Professor
Student representative
103.
Bernadette Eksteen (23473789)
BRS
Cell. 0828521661
email: [email protected]
Representatives from other faculties/entities
2501
104.
Prof M (Mark) Maboeta
Natural Sciences
1367
105.
Dr A (Alewyn) Nel
Economic and Business Management
1627
106.
Prof SJ (Johann) Zaaiman
Arts
1026
107.
Dr H (Hannelie) Yates
Theology
852030
108.
Dr P (Petra) Bester
Unit for Open Distance Learning
(UODL): Academic coordinator
xvi
G.1
FACULTY RULES
G.1.1
AUTHORITY OF THE GENERAL RULES
The faculty rules, guidelines and procedures applicable to the different
qualifications, programmes and curricula of this faculty and contained in this
faculty calendar, as well as in the Quality Manual of the faculty are subject to
the General Rules of the University, as determined from time to time by the
Council of the University on recommendation by the Senate. The faculty rules,
guidelines and procedures should therefore be read in conjunction with the
General Rules.
The Manual for Masters and Doctoral students, with specific guidelines and
procedures for masters and doctoral studies also apply. The manual can be
obtained at:
http://www.nwu.ac.za/sites/www.nwu.ac.za/files/files/library/documents/manual
postgrad.pdf
G.1.2
FACULTY SPECIFIC RULES
The faculty specific rules regarding the different programmes presented in this
faculty are given in the language in which the specific programme is presented.
If a programme is presented in Afrikaans as well as English, the rules are given
in both languages.
Additional requirements and/or faculty specific rules with regard to different
programmes are indicated at the specific programme in this calendar.
G.1.2.1
G.1.2.1.1
G.1.2.1.2
General rules:
The following general rules apply in the Faculty:
Application for admission
a)
General admission requirements for all qualifications in this calendar, as
stipulated in the Admissions Policy of the University hold.
Visit
the
Admissions
Policy
of
the
University
at:
http://www.nwu.ac.za/sites/www.nwu.ac.za/files/files/i-governancemanagement/policy/7P-7.1.1_Admissions_a.pdf
b)
A prospective postgraduate student applies for admission to the University
by completing the prescribed application form either on paper or
electronically and submitting it to the Admissions Office together with the
prescribed application documentation, fees for application and selection
(where applicable), or proof of payment thereof.
c)
No application for admission is accepted if the applicant does not, in
addition to the general admission requirements, also comply with faculty
specific requirements where applicable.
d)
A prospective postgraduate student is only admitted to the University and
to a specific qualification programme in this faculty once the official
acceptance letter was issued by the Admissions office.
Selection
a) The faculty reserves the right to select students before admission to
specific programmes and not to admit applicants to the relevant
qualification programmes if they do not satisfy the selection standards,
even where such applicants do meet the minimum admission
requirements. Where, in such a case, a student number is allocated to an
1
applicant, it is done solely for administrative purposes, and does not
constitute or create a right to admission.
G.1.2.1.3
b)
Selection processes are approved by faculty structures and is revised
annually. Selection will take place during specific time frames for each
programme mentioned in this calendar.
c)
Submission of an application for selection at a school or research entity
does not replace the official application process for admission to the
University. Admission to a programme in the faculty will only be approved
after an official application was handed in at the Admissions Office.
Registration
a) No one is registered as a student before such person is admitted to a
specific qualification programme in the faculty or for non-degree purposes.
Refer to par G.1.2.1.2 (c)
b)
A student who has been admitted to the University registers each year for
the specific qualification programme for the duration of the study at the
time determined in the annual calendar for that purpose, by paying the
prescribed registration fee, completing a registration form either on paper
or electronically, acquiring the required approval from a study
leader/promoter concerned and submitting the form to the office
concerned, upon which proof of registration is issued to the student. The
aforementioned is also applicable to the re-registration of existing
students. If a provisional postgraduate student fails to register during the
determined registration cycle of the specific academic year, he/she must
re-apply for admission to the University/programme.
c)
A postgraduate student who fails to register before 31 March annually,
may in the same calendar year, apply to the dean for late registration.
Late registration penalties as approved by the Senate will apply.
d)
An existing postgraduate student who failed to re-register for any
academic year must apply at the dean for re-admission and continuation.
Such student will be responsible for all outstanding tuition fees (including
preceding study years or year).
G.1.2.1.4
Duration of registration
a) A postgraduate student who is admitted to the University and is officially
registered remains a student of the University for as long as the
registration is valid, or until such time the registration is cancelled by the
student or by the faculty due to inadequate academic progress.
G.1.2.1.5
Amendment or cancellation of registration
a) A postgraduate student's registration may only be amended or cancelled
on application in the prescribed manner. The faculty may cancel a
student‟s registration for a particular module where such registration was
done contrary to faculty rules.
b)
A student who were granted bursaries from the University, and whose
registration is discontinued or cancelled by the faculty for inadequate
academic progress or any other reason as stipulated in faculty rules, can
be held liable for reimbursement.
2
G.1.2.1.6
Erroneous registration
a) The University reserves the right to cancel any erroneous registration and
to withdraw any qualification that was awarded erroneously after the
conclusion of a disciplinary process or the completion of a thorough
administrative enquiry.
G.1.2.1.7
Exemption from registration
a) A postgraduate student who still needs to write a paper or make
improvements to an examined dissertation or mini-dissertation and who
can attain the qualification at the autumn graduation ceremony, does not
register for a new year, provided that the examination is successfully
completed by the end of January of the new year or the dissertation or
mini-dissertation is satisfactorily improved by the end of January of that
new year.
G.1.2.1.8
Simultaneous registration at more than one institution
a) A postgraduate student may not be registered simultaneously at the
University and at any other higher education institution without written
permission granted by the dean and with the concurrence of the other
institution.
G.1.2.1.9
Simultaneous registration for more than one qualification
a) A postgraduate student may not be registered simultaneously for more
than one qualification within the University without prior written permission
granted by the dean.
G.1.2.1.10
Use of the University's facilities by registered students
a) Subject to specific exceptions granted by the campus registrar concerned,
only registered postgraduate students are entitled to make use of the
University's facilities.
G.1.2.1.11
Submission to rules and resolutions
a) By signing and submitting the application and registration forms either on
paper or electronically a postgraduate student agrees to be bound by all
rules, policies and decisions of the University for the duration of the
student's study at the University.
G.1.2.1.12
Re-admission after interruption of studies
a) Where a postgraduate student's study is interrupted for a year due to preapproval by the dean, such student must apply anew for admission by
completing the relevant form and obtaining written permission to be readmitted. Such students‟ studies will be regarded cancelled if he/she fails
to register on the last date determined for registration following the year of
interruption.
b)
c)
Interruption of masters and doctoral studies will only be allowed in
exceptional circumstances. Students‟ requests must be accompanied by
supporting documents and must be well motivated.
Application for interruption of studies will be approved for one academic
year only. Students who were granted permission to interrupt their studies
will have no entitlement to re-admission in the case of certain restrictions
within the research entity.
3
G.1.2.1.13
Extension of period of study
a) The minimum and maximum period of study per qualification as specified
in this calendar hold.
b) An honours student who does not expect to complete the curriculum for a
qualification programme within the maximum number of years may,
before the end of the penultimate academic year, apply to the school
director concerned for an extension of the study period.
c) Masters and doctoral students who are not expected to complete their
studies within the maximum number of years may, apply before the end of
the penultimate academic year, to the research director or –leader or
where applicable the school director concerned for an extension of the
study period with one academic year. The research director or –leader or
where applicable the school director concerned will make a
recommendation concerning the extension of the study period to the
faculty board.
G.1.2.1.14
Registration for additional modules
a) A postgraduate student may upon request, but subject to faculty rules be
allowed in any study year to register for additional modules, not required
for the curriculum concerned.
G.1.2.1.15
Recognition and exemption of modules
a) A student who has studied at another recognised higher education
institution and who applies to register in a honours qualification
programme at the University, may apply in writing to the dean for
recognition or exemption of modules required for the qualification
programme for which the student wishes to register, provided that the
dean may grant recognition or exemption for no more than half the credits,
preferably regarding the modules in the junior year levels of the
qualification programme concerned.
b)
A postgraduate student who has acquired a qualification from the
University or any other recognized higher education institution and who
applies for registration in a honours qualification programme at the
University, may apply in writing to the research director/-leader concerned
who will make a recommendation to the faculty board for recognition or
exemption of modules required for the qualification programme for which
the student wishes to register, provided that recognition or exemption for
no more than half of the credits, preferably regarding the modules in the
junior year levels of the qualification programme concerned may be
granted.
c)
A student who has studied at another recognised higher education
institution and who applies to register in a master‟s programme with
taught modules at the University, may apply in writing to the dean
concerned for recognition or exemption of taught modules required for the
qualification programme for which the student wishes to register, provided
that the dean may grant recognition or exemption for no more than half
the credits allocated to the taught or performing arts modules.
d)
A student who has acquired a qualification from the University or any
other recognised higher education institution and who applies for
registration in a master‟s programme with taught modules at the
University, may apply in writing to the dean concerned for recognition or
exemption of taught modules required for the qualification programme for
4
which the student wishes to register, provided that the dean may grant
recognition or exemption for no more than half the credits allocated to the
taught or performing arts modules.
G.1.2.1.16
e)
Any registered postgraduate student who wishes to change to a different
curriculum, may within the framework of the applicable rules apply in
writing to the faculty board for the recognition or exemption of modules
already passed which are included in the curriculum to which the student
wishes to change.
f)
Stipulations concerning the period of recognition or exemption of modules
or exemption or recognition of only certain modules will be specified in this
calendar where applicable.
Research proposal and title registration for masters and doctoral degrees
a) Masters and doctoral students must within six months after the first
registration or six months after completion of the last examination, and in
consultation with a possible supervisor present a research proposal and
title registration to a body determined by faculty rules for approval, which
body formalises the appointment of a supervisor and where necessary coor assistant supervisors in consultation with the directors having an
interest therein.
b)
If a student fails to present a research proposal in time for approval after
due notification, the study may be cancelled.
c)
If, in any year, a student fails to re-register as student at the time
determined in the annual calendar, the faculty board concerned may
assign the topic of the dissertation/ mini-dissertation or thesis, if already
registered, to another student in the same research entity.
G.1.2.1.17
Classification of dissertations and mini-dissertations and thesis’
a) Where a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis is classified in terms of
Senate policy, effect is given in the examination process to the rules laid
down by Senate for the purpose.
G.1.2.1.18
Upgrade of master’s degree study to doctoral study
a)
A candidate registered for a master‟s degree study who, in the unanimous
opinion of the supervisor concerned, the research director or research
entity leader concerned, or where applicable, the school director
concerned, has achieved outcomes of a quality and extent acceptable for
a doctoral degree, may apply to the faculty board concerned to convert
the registration for a master‟s degree to that for a doctoral degree.
b)
A candidate to whom such a concession is made, must, where applicable,
successfully complete the paper component of the Master‟s degree
examination before the thesis may be submitted and must comply with all
the rules and requirements set by the University regarding a doctoral
degree. The student only receives the doctoral degree after the number of
credits for the Master‟s degree papers, where applicable, has been
attained and the minimum period required for the registration of the
doctoral degree, has expired.
5
G.1.2.1.19
G.1.2.1.20
G.1.2.1.21
Termination of study
a) The dean may, in terms of the faculty rules and on recommendation of the
research director or research entity leader concerned, or where
applicable, to the school director concerned, cancel or terminate a
student‟s study if the student‟s progress is inadequate or unsatisfactory
during any stage of the study or, after being granted an extended study
period, still fails to complete the study.
b)
A postgraduate student, whose studies have been cancelled or
terminated by the faculty, will not be re-admitted to the same programme
in any subsequent academic year.
c)
A postgraduate student, whose studies have been cancelled/terminated
by the faculty may apply for admission to another study programme within
the University, but should in the application indicate the termination of the
previous studies.
Examiners and moderators for honours degrees
a)
For every non-exit level module there is at least one internal examiner and
at least one internal moderator.
b)
Every exit-level module is moderated externally at least every second
year by a person or persons with the required qualifications, provided that
such a person or persons may not be a staff member or otherwise
connected to the University by way of an extraordinary appointment.
c)
The supervisor of an honours mini-dissertation may not be an internal
examiner of such a mini-dissertation.
Appointment of examiners for masters and doctoral students
a) Concerning the examination of every dissertation/mini-dissertation/thesis
or lectured master‟s degree module, examiners must be appointed by the
dean in accordance with the provisions of faculty specifications to conduct
the assessment of the student‟s performance in an examination.
b)
The examination of a module in a taught master‟s degree is moderated
externally unless the module is examined externally.
c)
Study leaders/promoters involved in the study of a student will not be
appointed as examiners.
d)
Concerning the examination of every dissertation/mini-dissertation or
thesis at least three (3) examiners will be appointed. Not more that (2) two
independent internal examiners will be appointed. In the case of a thesis,
a minimum of (2) two external examiners shall be appointed.
e)
Examiners will be cleared of any conflict of interest.
f)
External examiners appointed for a student will not be associated to the
same institution.
g)
Examiners will as a minimum requirement be in possession of an
equivalent qualification.
h)
No examiner will in any manner be involved in the supervision of the
student.
6
G.1.2.1.22
i)
Appointment of recurring examiners will be avoided.
j)
Names of examiners are confidential and are not made known to the
candidate without the permission of the examiners concerned.
Submission of dissertation or mini-dissertation or thesis for examination
a) A dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis should be submitted for
examination before or on the date annually determined in the time table of
the University for the relevant year.
b)
A postgraduate student, who is dissatisfied with any aspect of study
guidance by a supervisor or promoter, can raise such dissatisfaction in
writing to the research director/-leader for resolving it in consultation with
the dean. The research director/-leader must respond to the student in
writing before a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis is submitted for
examination.
c)
The physical form and number of copies of a dissertation/mini-dissertation
or thesis to be submitted for examination, and after successful
examination be submitted for safekeeping, are determined by Academic
Administration.
d)
Where the supervisor withholds permission for the submission for
examination of a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis, the relevant
research director or research entity leader, may after consultation with the
supervisor and the student, recommend the granting of leave for
submission.
e)
A dissertation or mini-dissertation must comply with the technical
requirements provided for in faculty rules, or requirements by the entity.
f)
With submission of a dissertation or mini-dissertation, submitted in the
traditional format and not in the form of a series of manuscripts or in
article format, faculty rules do not determine that a research article be
submitted to an accredited journal.
g)
With submission of a thesis, which is submitted in the traditional format
and not in the form of a series of manuscripts or in article format, faculty
rules determine that at least one (1) research article must be submitted
to an accredited journal. Proof of submission of the article must be binded
with the thesis. The maximum number of articles to be submitted will be
determined by the A-rules of the University.
h)
Where a masters or doctoral candidate is allowed to submit a
dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis in the article format and more than
one such article or manuscript is used, the dissertation or mini-dissertation
or thesis must still be presented as a unit, supplemented with an inclusive
problem statement, a focused literature analysis and integration and with
a synoptic conclusion, and the guidelines of the journal concerned must
also be included. This rule is compulsory and must be adhered to. (Also
for submission of only one article).
i)
After a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis has been submitted for
examination, the document may not be withdrawn.
j)
Supervisors/promoters do not communicate or negotiate with examiners
about the examination after the examination copies of the
7
dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis have been dispatched to the
examiners.
G.1.2.1.23
G.1.2.1.24
k)
Any conflict of interest concerning examiners will be reported to the dean.
The dean will appoint other examiners in order to ensure that a fair and
objective academic result is obtained.
l)
Where any research article or manuscript and/or internationally examined
patent is used for the purpose of a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis
in article format to which other authors and/or inventors than the
candidate contributed, the candidate must obtain a written statement from
each co-author and/or co-inventor in which it is stated that such co-author
and/or co-inventor grants permission that the research article or
manuscript and/or patent may be used for the stated purpose and in
which it is further indicated what each co-author's and/or co-inventor's
share in the relevant research article or manuscript and/or patent was.
m)
Where co-authors or co-inventors were involved, the candidate must
mention it in the preface and must include the statement of each coauthor or co-inventor in the dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis
immediately following the preface.
Requirements for admission to examination (Honours degrees)
a) An honours student, who achieved the required participation mark or proof
of participation prescribed in the requirements of the programme, is
admitted to the examination in the module concerned.
b)
Pass requirements for every honours curriculum and module, inclusive of
the ratio in which the assessment methods applicable to a specific module
or group of modules in the faculty are combined to determine whether it
has been completed successfully, are provided for in the requirements of
the programme concerned.
c)
An honours degree is passed with distinction if a final mark of at least
75% average is obtained in all examined elements of the degree.
Examination opportunities (Honours and lectured masters degrees)
a) If a module is failed completely, the student must repeat the full module
except where faculty rules provide otherwise.
b)
A student who fails one or more of the modules of an honours or lectured
master‟s degree in an examination shall be granted a second examination
opportunity in the module(s) concerned, except where faculty rules
provide otherwise.
c)
A student may, within the maximum period allowed for the study, repeat
examination papers once in modules not exceeding 25% of the curriculum
concerned.
d)
A student who, after making use of all the ordinary examination
opportunities, passed all the modules required in an honours-/lectured
master‟s programme except one, may apply to the dean concerned for a
final assessment opportunity in the outstanding lectured module, for which
payment of the required amount, but not registration, is required. All
specifications in this yearbook shall be considered beforehand.
8
G.1.2.1.25
Examination (Masters and doctoral degrees)
a) Concerning the examination for the purpose of attainment of a master‟s
degree, the following may be required:
b)

a dissertation only, or

one or more examination papers and a dissertation, or

one or more examination papers and a mini-dissertation, or

a series of manuscripts in article format
Concerning the examination regarding the attainment of a doctoral degree
the following may be required:

a thesis, or

a series of manuscripts in article format, or

a patent, or

A colloquium that may be required for the defence of the thesis.
c)
Each examiner separately submits a written report on the dissertation/
mini-dissertation or thesis to Academic Administration, who provides the
examiners' reports to the research director/-leader and/or postgraduate
co-ordinator concerned, for processing and approval at the faculty board.
d)
All examination reports and final results must be considered by the faculty
board before the student is informed of the outcome.
e)
With regard to a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis, an examiner may
recommend the following:

accept unconditionally (option 1);

accept on condition that specified corrections be made (option 2);

refer back to the candidate for revision and/or elaboration and
resubmission for re-examination (option 3);

not accepted, in which case the candidate fails (option 4)
f)
The dean may in consultation with the research director or research entity
leader concerned, or where applicable, the school director concerned,
clarify anything that is not clear in an examiner‟s report with the
examiners.
g)
Where examiners are unanimous about a student's passing subject to par
(i) below, the decision is final.
h)
Where examiners differ materially about the evaluation of a
dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis, the dean appoints an additional
external examiner or examiners, or takes other discretionary steps that
may be necessary to ensure that a fair and academically defensible
examination result is obtained. (The outcome of such evaluation will be
decisive).
i)
Any comments that arise from the inspection must, within 14 calendar
days after the date of the notice of availability for inspection be submitted
to the dean concerned. The dean must request the relevant faculty
9
structure to evaluate the comments along with the examiner reports, and if
such comments on merit appears to be fundamentally different from the
reports of the examiners, must appoint an external expert who must
specifically evaluate the comments received in relation to the examiner
reports, and whose recommendation must be taken into account by the
relevant faculty structure.
G.1.2.1.26
j)
Pass requirements for dissertations/mini-dissertations and lectured
master‟s degree modules is 50% unless specified otherwise in this
yearbook.
k)
A module, mini-dissertation or dissertation is passed with distinction
where, at the examination thereof an average of at least 75% is awarded.
l)
If a candidate achieves a final mark of 74% the dean may adjust the mark
to 75% (pass with distinction) unless he/she is of the opinion that the
study does not meet the terms of a distinction.
m)
A student who fails any lectured master‟s degree module(s) after a
second or additional examination opportunity must repeat such module(s)
in full in the following academic year before the qualification will be
awarded, on condition that such modules should not exceed 25% of the
curriculum concerned. This rule is subject to specific requirements for
each qualification programme as indicated in this calendar.
n)
A dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis may only be referred back to a
candidate once and after revision be re-submitted for examination. Where
a dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis is referred back to a candidate,
the re-submission must take place within one year after the result was
made known to the candidate; unless the dean is convinced that valid
reasons for an extension exist.
o)
A revised or elaborated dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis will only be
submitted for re-examination to the examiner(s) who referred it back for
revision, unless immense adjustments were made.
p)
A revised or elaborated dissertation/mini-dissertation or thesis must be
accompanied by a memorandum from the study leader/promoter to
update all examiners of the adjustments made.
q)
A postgraduate student, to whom the degree concerned is not awarded
after examination, may, in case of dissatisfaction with any aspect with the
procedures followed during the examination of the dissertation/minidissertation or thesis concerned, submit a written notice to the dean who
will deal with the complaint in consultation with the research director/leader and study leader/promoter. Once all avenues to dispense with the
dissatisfaction are exhausted, the student can declare a dispute with the
University.
r)
A postgraduate student who failed may only once apply for re-admission
to the same qualification programme on condition that a new research
proposal is submitted and that funds and capacity are available in the
research entity.
Attainment of the degree
a) The honours degree is attained when a student has passed in the
examination of all the modules prescribed in faculty rules for the
curriculum concerned. The honours degree is conferred with distinction
10
where the student completes the degree in the minimum period and
obtained a weighted average of 75% in all the core-modules.
G.1.3
b)
The Master‟s degree is attained when a student has passed in the
examination of all the modules, mini-dissertation and/or dissertation
prescribed in faculty rules for the curriculum concerned. The degree is
passed with distinction where a weighted average of at least 75% is
achieved in all the elements examined.
c)
The doctoral degree is attained when a student complies with all the
requirements prescribed therefor in faculty rules.
WARNING AGAINST PLAGIARISM
The Instutional Policy regarding the management of plagiarism and Turn-it-in
apply as well as the Code of Conduct and Ethical code of the University.
Appropriate disciplinary action will be taken against students who make
themselves guilty of plagiarism.
For further details see:
http://www.nwu.ac.za/sites/www.nwu.ac.za/files/files/i-governancemanagement/policy/2P-2.4.3.2_plagiarism%20and%20dishonesty_e.pdf
G.1.4
CAPACITY STIPULATION
Please take cognizance of the fact that, owing to specific capacity constraints,
the University reserves the right to select candidates for admission to certain
fields of study. This means that prospective students who comply with the
minimum requirements may not necessarily be admitted to the relevant
courses.
G.1.5
STRUCTURES IN THE FACULTY
Research and training in master‟s and doctor‟s degrees in the five schools of
the Faculty of Health Sciences are structured in research entities, focus- and
niche areas. At the head of every research entity is a research director or niche
area leader. They are supported by the directors of schools and the staff of the
different subject groups.
11
12
G.1.6
QUALIFICATIONS, PROGRAMMES AND CURRICULA
Various qualifications can be obtained in the Faculty of Health Sciences. A qualification is
presented in one or more programmes. Every programme has one or more curricula,
consisting of a number of prescribed modules. Information on the Rules of the different
qualifications, programmes and curricula is given in this calendar.
The University may confer the following postgraduate degrees in the Faculty of Health
Sciences:
Qualification
Programme and
code
Curriculum and
code
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Recreational
Science:
102161
Biokinetics:
102165
Kinderkinetics:
102166
Sport Science:
102167
Recreational
Science:
G607P
Biokinetics:
G601P
Kinderkinetics:
G602P
Sport Science:
G603P
Fulltime
8
Fulltime
8
Fulltime
8
Fulltime
8
Psychology:
102162
Psychology
G638P
Fulltime
8
Psychology:
102162
Biokinetics:
202150
Kinderkinetics:
202151
Sport Science:
202152
Psychology
G639P
Biokinetics
G601P
Kinderkinetics:
G602P
Sport Science:
G603P
Fulltime
8
Fulltime
8
Fulltime
8
Fulltime
8
Pharmacology:
840100
Pharmacology:
G640P
Physiology:
202131
Nutrition:
202132
Physiology:
G624P
Nutrition:
G626P
Psychology:
202133
Psychology:
G627P
Fulltime
8
Psychology:
202133
Psychology:
G628P
Fulltime
8
808100
Community
Pharmacy:
G618P
Distance
8
808100
Hospital
Pharmacy:
G619P
Distance
8
Honours degrees:
Honours Bachelor of
Arts (Hons BA)
Honours Bachelor of
Arts (Hons BA)
Honours Bachelor of
Arts (Hons BA)
Honours Bachelor of
Arts (Hons BA)
Honours Bachelor of
Arts (Hons BA)
(Phasing out)
Honours Bachelor of
Arts (Hons BA)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
Honours Baccalaureus
Scientiae Pharmacology
(Hons BSc Pharmcol)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
(Phasing out)
Honours Bachelor of
Science (Hons BSc)
Honours Baccalaureus
Pharmaciae (Hons
BPharm)
(Phasing out)
Honours Baccalaureus
Pharmaciae (Hons
BPharm)
(Phasing out)
13
Open
distance
learning /
Distance
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
8
8
8
Qualification
Programme and
code
Honours Bachelor in
Consumer Sciences
835100
Curriculum and
code
Consumer
Sciences:
G630P
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Fulltime /
Part-time
8
Curriculum and
code
Recreational
Science:
G815P
Biokinetics:
G801P
Kinderkinetics:
G802P
Sport Science:
G803P
Psychology:
G801P
Positive
Psychology:
G801P
Clinical
Psychology:
G801P
Clinical
Psychology:
G802P
Counselling
Psychology:
G801P
Counselling
Psychology:
G802P
Research
Psychology:
G801P
Biokinetics:
G801P
Kinderkinetics:
G802P
Sport Science:
G803P
Pharmaceutical
Chemistry:
G801P
Pharmacology:
G801P
Pharmaceutics:
G801P
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Masters degrees:
Master of Arts (MA)
SAQA 90848
Programme and
code
Recreational
Science:
103182
Biokinetics:
103191
Kinderkinetics:
103192
Sport Science:
103193
Psychology:
103181
Positive Psychology:
103195
Master of Arts (MA)
(Phasing out)
Clinical Psychology:
103183
Master of Arts (MA)
Clinical Psychology:
103183
Qualification
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Arts (MA)
(Phasing out)
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Arts (MA)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Counselling
Psychology:
103184
Counselling
Psychology:
103184
Research
Psychology:
103185
Biokinetics:
203195
Kinderkinetics:
203196
Sport Science:
203197
Pharmaceutical
Chemistry:
203184
Pharmacology:
203185
Pharmaceutics:
203186
14
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
Part-time
9
9
9
9
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
9
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Masters degrees:
Qualification
Master of Science
(MSc)
Programme and
code
Occupational
Hygiene:
203160
Master of Science
(MSc)
Nutrition:
203166
Master of Science
(MSc)
Nutrition:
203166
Master of Science
(MSc)
Dietetics:
203169
Master of Science
(MSc)
Dietetics:
203169
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
(Phasing out)
Physiology:
203171
Master of Science
(MSc)
Clinical Psychology:
203176
Master of Science
(MSc)
(Phasing out)
Counselling
Psychology:
203177
Counselling
Psychology:
203177
Research
Psychology:
203165
Master of Science
(MSc)
Master of Science
(MSc)
Clinical Psychology:
203176
Master of Pharmacy
(MPharm)
Pharmacy Practice:
803104
Master of Pharmacy
(MPharm)
SAQA 90675
Advanced Clinical
Pharmacy
803105
Master of Consumer
Sciences (MCons)
836100
Master of Consumer
Sciences (MCons)
836100
15
Curriculum and
code
Occupational
Hygiene:
G851P
Nutrition
(Minidissertation):
G870P
Nutrition
(Dissertation):
G871P
Dietetics
(Minidissertation):
G851P
Dietetics
(Dissertation):
G875P
Physiology:
G855P
Clinical
Psychology:
G801P
Clinical
Psychology:
G802P
Counselling
Psychology:
G801P
Counselling
Psychology:
G802P
Research
Psychology:
G801P
Pharmacy
Practice:
G801P
Advanced
Clinical
Pharmacy
G801P
Consumer
Sciences
(Dissertation):
G880P
Consumer
Sciences
Minidissertation):
G881P
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Fulltime
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime „
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Masters degrees:
Qualification
Master of Social Work
(MSW)
Master of Social Work
(MSW)
(Phasing out)
Master of Social Work
(MSW)
(Phasing out)
Master of Social Work
(MSW)
Programme and
code
Social Work
113104
Curriculum and
code
Social Work:
G801P
Mode of
delivery
Fulltime /
Part-time
Child Protection:
113108
Child Protection:
G801P
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Play Therapy
G802P
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Child Protection:
G803P
Forensic
Practice:
G801P
Play Therapy
G801P
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Child Protection:
113108
Child Protection:
113108
Master of Social Work
(MSW)
Forensic Practice:
113109
Master of Social Work
(MSW)
Play Therapy
113110
Master of Nursing
Science (MCur)
833100
Master of Nursing
Science (MCur)
833100
Master of Nursing
SciencE (MCur)
833100
Master of Nursing
Science (MCur)
833100
Master of Nursing
Science (MCur)
833100
Master of Nursing
Science (MCur)
833100
Master of Nursing
Science (MCur)
Master of Health
Sciences in
Transdisciplinary Health
Promotion (MHSc)
SAQA 91930
Community
Nursing
Science:
G830P
Health Service
Management:
G831P
Health Science
Education:
G832P
Professional
Nursing:
G833P
Psychiatric
Nursing
Science:
G834P
Midwifery and
Neonatal
Nursing
Science:
G835P
Nursing
Science: G836P
833100
Transdisciplinary
Health
Promotion:
G801P
862100
16
Fulltime /
Part-time
NQFLevel
9
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Fulltime /
Part-time
9
Doctorates:
Qualification
Programme and
code
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Human Movement
Sciences:
805109
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Recreation Science:
805111
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Pharmaceutical
Chemistry:
805116
Pharmaceutics:
805117
Pharmacology:
805118
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Pharmacy Practice:
805119
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Occupational
Hygiene:
805104
Dietetics:
805105
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Physiology:
805107
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Consumer Sciences:
805112
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nutrition:
805114
Social Work:
805108
Psychology:
805110
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
17
Curriculum and
code
Human
Movement
Sciences:
G925P
Recreation
Science:
G935P
Pharmaceutical
Chemistry:
G910P
Pharmaceutics:
G911P
Pharmacology:
G912P
Pharmacy
Practice:
G913P
Occupational
Hygiene:
G901P
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime
10
Fulltime
10
Fulltime
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
part-time
10
Dietetics:
G905P
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Physiology:
G915P
Consumer
Sciences:
G940P
Nutrition:
G960P
Social Work:
G921P
Psychology:
G931P
Community
Nursing
Science:
G950P
Health Service
Management:
G951P
Health Science
Education:
G952P
Professional
Nursing
Science:
G953P
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
10
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Doctorates:
Qualification
Programme and
code
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
Doctor of Philosophy
(PhD)
Nursing Science:
805113
POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMAS
Qualification
Programme and
code
Midwifery &
Postgraduate Diploma
Neonatal Nursing
Midwifery & Neonatal
Science
Nursing Science
844100
Postgraduate Diploma
Pharmacological
in Pharmacological
Principles of Drug
Principles of Drug
Therapy:
Therapy
847100
SAQA 88902
Curriculum and
code
Psychiatric
Nursing
Science:
G954P
Midwifery and
neonatal
Nursing
Science:
G955P
Nursing
Science:
G956P
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Fulltime /
Part-time
10
Curriculum and
code
Midwifery &
Neonatal
Nursing Science
G501P
Mode of
delivery
NQFLevel
Part-time
8
Distance
learning
8
Pharmacological
Principles of
Drug Therapy
G501P
Advanced University
Diploma in Health
Science
Community Nursing
837100
Advanced University
Diploma in Health
Science
Health Science
Education
837101
Advanced University
Diploma in Health
Science
Health Service
Management
837102
Advanced University
Diploma in Health
Science
Clinical Nursing
Science, Health
Assessment,
Treatment and Care
837103
18
Community
Nursing (one
year)
G511T
Health Science
Education (One
year)
G512T
Health Services
Management
(One Year)
G513T
Clinical Nursing
Science, Health
Assessment,
Treatment and
Care (One Year)
G515T
7
7
7
7
G.1.7
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACHELOR OF ARTS
G.1.7.1
Duration (minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum duration is
two years.
G.1.7.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
The honours degree follows a three- or four year qualification or after the status
of a Bachelor‟s degree is acquired.
G.1.7.3
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
Faculty specific admission requirements with regard to the different
programmes presented in this faculty are outlined in the programme
information in this calendar.
G.1.7.4
Programme: Recreational Science
Qualification code: 102 161 (F) (Recreational Science)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 31 July.
G.1.7.4.1
G.1.7.4.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements of the University hold.
b)
Prospective students complete a formal selection application form at the
school, which will be evaluated by a selection panel.
c)
Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the RKKXmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 60%.
d)
Selection takes place during August /September each year.
e)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
Practical work as stipulated by the program leader and school director is
required from the student.
G.1.7.4.3
Curriculum G607P: Recreational Science
G.1.7.4.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After the recreation science programme has been completed, students should
be able to:
a)
Combine critical and creative thinking in the use of science, research and
technology with sound and systematic theoretical expertise (models,
theories, etc.);
19
G.1.7.4.3.2
1)
demonstrate skills and values as entrepreneurs or employees in the
field of recreation provision or adventure therapy through integrated
projects (case studies/scenario‟s) in order to identify and solve
known and unknown problems; and
2)
Demonstrate added competencies in community involvement.
Compilation of curriculum: Recreational Science
Qualification- and programme code: 102 161; Curriculum code: G607P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWK686
Child Welfare and Health Promotion
RKKX673
Recreation Practice Management
RKKX677
Therapeutic recreation
RKKX678
Advanced Facilitation
RKKX679
Leisure Programming
RKKX681
Applied Recreation Management
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.7.5
G.1.7.5.1
Credits
32
16
16
24
16
16
24
144
Programme: Biokinetics
Qualification code: 102 165 (F) (Biokinetics)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic and practical
nature. In composing the curriculum, consideration was given to career
possibilities and the manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare
the student for further postgraduate study in Biokinetics.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 31st of July.
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
General admission requirements of the University hold.
Prospective students complete a selection application at the school, which
will be evaluated by a selection panel.
c) Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the HMSmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 65%.
d) Proof of at least 20 hours practical exposure in a registered Biokinetics
practice will be required.
e) Selection takes place during August /September each year.
f)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
a)
b)
G.1.7.5.2
G.1.7.5.2.1
Curriculum G601P: Biokinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum the student should demonstrate extensive
and systematic knowledge, understanding and skills as entrepreneur in private
practice or established institutions to prescribe scientifically based exercise
programmes for clients with a view to promoting health and quality of life, or
prescribe programmes to make rehabilitation of a clinical condition possible
20
where physical exercise is indicated as treatment modality. The graduate will
also be able to undertake appropriate research in an ethical and responsible
manner, gather, analyse and evaluate data and interpret results and
communicate them in writing and orally to an audience of peers.
G.1.7.5.2.2
Compilation of curriculum: Biokinetics
Qualification and programme code: 102 165; Curriculum code: G601P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWB681
Biokinetics: Orthopaedics
MBWB682
Biokinetics: Clinical
MBWB683
Biokinetics: Theory/Health
MBWB684
Biokinetics: Professional Internship
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.7.6
Credits
32
32
32
32
32
160
Programme: Kinderkinetics
Qualification code: 102 166 (F) (Kinderkinetics)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic and practical
nature. In composing the curriculum, consideration was given to career
possibilities and the manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare
the student for further postgraduate study in Kinderkinetics.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 31st of July.
G.1.7.6.1
G.1.7.6.2
G.1.7.6.2.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements of the University hold.
b)
Prospective students complete a selection application at the school, which
will be evaluated by a selection panel.
c)
Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the HMSmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 60%.
d)
Proof of at least 20 hours practical exposure in a registered Kinderkinetics
practice/proof of working with children by using movement programs will
be required.
e)
Candidates must further submit proof of certification in swimming and
gymnastics coaching course.
f)
Selection takes place during August /September each year.
g)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
Curriculum G602P: Kinderkinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After completing this curriculum a student should be able to demonstrate an
extensive knowledge, understanding and skills in order to successfully handle
Kinderkinetics in practice. The graduate will be able to maintain a professional
21
identity and plan and manage an own Kinderkinetics practice. The graduate will
also be qualified to undertake appropriate research, gather, analyse and
evaluate data and interpret the results in order to communicate these in writing
and orally to an audience of peers.
G.1.7.6.2.2
Compilation of curriculum: Kinderkinetics
Qualification and programme code: 102 166; Curriculum code: G602P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWK682
Kinderkinetics Theory
MBWK683
Applied Kinderkinetics Practical
MBWK684
Professional Internship
MBWK685
Applied Exercise Physiology
MBWK686
Child Welfare and Health Promotion
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.7.7
Credits
32
32
24
24
16
16
144
Programme: Sport Science
Qualification code: 102 167 (F) (Sport Science)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic and practical
nature. In composing the curriculum, consideration was given to career
possibilities and the manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare
the student for further postgraduate study in Sport Science.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 31st of July.
G.1.7.7.1
G.1.7.7.2
G.1.7.7.2.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements of the University hold.
b)
Prospective students complete a selection application at the school, which
will be evaluated by a selection panel.
c)
Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the HMSmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 60%.
d)
Proof of practical exposure/ involvement with a recognized Sport Scientist
will be required.
e)
Student must further submit proof of coaching certification in at least 2
sports of which one should be a team sport and one an individual sport.
f)
Selection and takes place during August /September each year.
g)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
Curriculum G603P: Sport Science
Curriculum outcomes
After completing this curriculum the student should be able to demonstrate an
extensive knowledge, understanding and skills in Sport Science by determining
22
and developing the sport performance potential of sport participants and
prospective participants. The graduate will also be able to undertake
appropriate research, gather, analyse and evaluate information and data and
interpret results and communicate them in writing and orally to an audience of
peers.
G.1.7.7.2.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Sport Science
Qualification and programme code: 102 167; Curriculum code: G603P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWS682
Applied Sport Physiology
MBWS683
Applied Biomechanics
MBWS684
Applied Sport Psychology
MBWS685
Sport Science Internship
MBWS686
Sport Science Practice
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.7.8
Credits
32
32
16
16
24
24
144
Programme: Psychology
Qualification code: 102 162 (F) (Psychology)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic nature. In
composing the curricula, consideration was given to career possibilities and the
manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare the student for further
postgraduate study in Psychology.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 16th of September.
G.1.7.8.1
G.1.7.8.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Candidates should be in possession of an applicable Bachelor‟s degree
with third year Psychology or should have passed third year level with
Development Psychology and Psychopathology (undergraduate) as part
of a curriculum, as well as an average of 65% in all Psychology modules.
b)
An academic selection takes place according to the criteria as determined
by the school, where an average of 65% in Psychology is set as minimum
criteria during the first B-degree. The complete academic record is
however taken into consideration but the department holds the decision to
change the minimum criteria depending on the number of applications;
c)
If a candidate is enrolled for another qualification at the time of selection,
selection will only be provisional and may be cancelled by the department
if the aforementioned qualification is not completed at the end of the
academic year.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
An examination sub-minimum of 50% is required for all Psychology modules in
the honours programme.
23
G.1.7.8.3
Curriculum G638P: Psychology
This curriculum (G638P) is phasing OUT and is only
available to pipeline students in 2015.
G.1.7.8.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of this programme students should be able to:
G.1.7.8.3.2
a)
demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of
psychometrics, psychological evaluation, psychopathology, basic
intervention and counselling techniques, including programme
development and programme presentation;
b)
do a critical evaluation of existing knowledge concerning theories,
research methods, techniques and technology in psychology, and apply
that knowledge to various contexts;
c)
diagnose psychological pathology in individuals, groups and communities,
design basic intervention programmes and apply them in various sociocultural circumstances;
d)
obtain, analyse and interpret relevant information concerning individuals,
groups and communities, and communicate the information, either
individually or as a member of a group, by writing reports, doing
assignments, or reporting orally;
e)
reflect on the impact of the study material on the self as a person and as a
future care giver; and
f)
Observe, at all times, an ethical, professional and value-based code of
conduct in all modes of communication and association with individuals
and groups.
Compilation of the curriculum: Psychology
Qualification and programme code: 102 162; Curriculum code: G638P
Module code
PSYC671
PSYC672
PSYC673
PSYC674
PSYC675
PSYC676
Descriptive name
Psychometrics
Psychological Evaluation
Applied Positive Psychology
Research psychology
Intervention techniques
Theoretical Perspectives on the Helping
Relationship
PSYC677
Community Psychology
PSYC678
Psychopathology
PSYC679
Ethics and Professional Conduct
PSYC681
Facilitation of Community Wellness
STTN111
Descriptive Statistics
STTN124
Practical Statistics
Total credits for the curriculum
24
Credits
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
12
12
168
G.1.7.8.4
Curriculum G639P: Psychology
This curriculum (G639P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.7.8.4.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of this programme students should be able to:
a) demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of
psychometrics, psychological evaluation, psychopathology, basic
intervention and counselling techniques, including programme
development and programme presentation;
G.1.7.8.4.2
b)
do a critical evaluation of existing knowledge concerning theories,
research methods, techniques and technology in psychology, and apply
that knowledge to various contexts;
c)
diagnose psychological pathology in individuals, groups and communities,
design basic intervention programmes and apply them in various sociocultural circumstances;
d)
obtain, analyse and interpret relevant information concerning individuals,
groups and communities, and communicate the information, either
individually or as a member of a group, by writing reports, doing
assignments, or reporting orally;
e)
reflect on the impact of the study material on the self as a person and as a
future care giver; and
f)
Observe, at all times, an ethical, professional and value-based code of
conduct in all modes of communication and association with individuals
and groups.
Compilation of the curriculum: Psychology
Qualification and programme code: 102 162; Curriculum code: G639P
Module code
PSYH611
PSYH612
PSYH613
PSYH671
PSYH672
STTN111
Total semester 1
Descriptive name
First semester
Psychological evaluation.
Community psychology: Theory
Applied positive psychology
Research and ethics: Theory and practice
Psychopathology
Descriptive statistics
Second semester
PSYH621
Intervention techniques
PSYH622
Theoretical perspectives on rendering help
PSYH623
Child and adolescent psychology
PSYH671
Research and ethics: Theory and practice
PSYH672
Psychopathology
STTN124
Practical statistics
Total semester 2
Total credits for curriculum
25
Credits
16
8
16
20
8
12
80
16
16
16
20
8
12
88
168
G.1.8
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
G.1.8.1
Duration (minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum duration two
years.
G.1.8.2
Admission requirements of the programme
The Honours degree follows a three- or four year qualification or after the
status of Bachelor‟s degree is acquired
G.1.8.3
Faculty specific admission requirements
Faculty specific admission requirements with regard to the different
programmes presented in this faculty are outlined in the programme
information in this calendar.
G.1.8.4
Programme: Biokinetics
Qualification code: 202 150 (F) (Biokinetics)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic and practical
nature. In composing the curriculum, consideration was given to career
possibilities and the manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare
the student for further postgraduate study in Biokinetics.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 31st of July.
G.1.8.4.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
G.1.8.4.2
G.1.8.4.2.1
General admission requirements of the University hold.
Prospective students complete a selection application at the school, which
will be evaluated by a selection panel.
Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the HMSmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 65%.
Proof of at least 20 hours practical exposure in a registered Biokinetics
practice will be required.
Selection takes place during August /September each year.
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
Curriculum G601P: Biokinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum the student should demonstrate extensive
and systematic knowledge, understanding and skills as entrepreneur in private
practice or established institutions to prescribe scientifically based exercise
programmes for clients with a view to promoting health and quality of life, or
prescribe programmes to make rehabilitation of a clinical condition possible
where physical exercise is indicated as treatment modality. The graduate will
also be able to undertake appropriate research in an ethical and responsible
26
manner, gather, analyse and evaluate data and interpret results and
communicate them in writing and orally to an audience of peers.
G.1.8.4.2.2
Compilation of curriculum: Biokinetics
Qualification and programme code: 202 150; Curriculum code: G601P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWB681
Biokinetics: Orthopaedics
MBWB682
Biokinetics: Clinical
MBWB683
Biokinetics: Theory/Health
MBWB684
Biokinetics: Professional Internship
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.8.5
Credits
32
32
32
32
32
160
Programme: Kinderkinetics
Qualification code: 202 151 (F) (Kinderkinetics)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic and practical
nature. In composing the curriculum, consideration was given to career
possibilities and the manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare
the student for further postgraduate study in Kinderkinetics.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 31st of July.
G.1.8.5.1
G.1.8.5.2
G.1.8.5.2.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements of the University hold.
b)
Prospective students complete a selection application at the school, which
will be evaluated by a selection panel.
c)
Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the HMSmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 60%.
d)
Proof of at least 20 hours practical exposure in a registered Kinderkinetics
practice/proof of working with children by using movement programs will
be required.
e)
Candidates must further submit proof of certification in swimming and
gymnastics coaching courses.
f)
Selection takes place during August /September each year.
g)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
Curriculum G602P: Kinderkinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After completing this curriculum a student should be able to demonstrate an
extensive knowledge, understanding and skills in order to successfully handle
Kinderkinetics in practice. The graduate will be able to maintain a professional
27
identity and plan and manage an own Kinderkinetics practice. The graduate will
also be qualified to undertake appropriate research, gather, analyse and
evaluate data and interpret the results in order to communicate these in writing
and orally to an audience of peers.
G.1.8.5.2.2
Compilation of curriculum: Kinderkinetics
Qualification and programme code: 202 151; Curriculum code: G602P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWK682
Kinderkinetics Theory
MBWK683
Applied Kinderkinetics Practical
MBWK684
Professional Internship
MBWK685
Applied Exercise Physiology
MBWK686
Child Welfare and Health Promotion
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.8.6
Credits
32
32
24
24
16
16
144
Programme: Sport Science
Qualification code: 202 152 (F) (Sport Science)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic and practical
nature. In composing the curriculum, consideration was given to career
possibilities and the manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare
the student for further postgraduate study in Sport Science.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is the 31st of July.
G.1.8.6.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements of the University hold.
b)
Prospective students complete a selection application at the school, which
will be evaluated by a selection panel.
c)
Initial academic selection takes place in which the marks for the HMSmodules in each year of study up to and including that of the 1st semester
in the 3rd year must be above 60%.
d)
Proof of practical exposure/ involvement with a recognized Sport Scientist
will be required.
e)
Students must further submit proof of coaching certification in at least 2
sports of which one should be a team sport and one an individual sport.
f)
Selection and takes place during August /September each year.
g)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school director.
28
G.1.8.6.2
G.1.8.6.2.1
Curriculum G603P: Sport Science
Curriculum outcomes
After completing this curriculum the student should be able to demonstrate an
extensive knowledge, understanding and skills in Sport Science by determining
and developing the sport performance potential of sport participants and
prospective participants. The graduate will also be able to undertake
appropriate research, gather, analyse and evaluate information and data and
interpret results and communicate them in writing and orally to an audience of
peers.
G.1.8.6.2.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Sport Science
Qualification and programme code: 202 152; Curriculum code: G603P
Module code
MBWK681
Descriptive name
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
MBWS682
Applied Sport Physiology
MBWS683
Applied Biomechanics
MBWS684
Applied Sport Psychology
MBWS685
Sport Science Internship
MBWS686
Sport Science Practice
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.8.7
Credits
32
32
16
16
24
24
144
Programme: Physiology
Qualification code: 202 131 (F + P)
The curriculum composed for this programme is of an academic nature. In
composing the curriculum, consideration was given to the career opportunities
and the human capital needs of the country. This curriculum prepares the
student for further postgraduate study in one of the postgraduate programmes
in Physiology, inter alia Occupational Hygiene and Cardiovascular Physiology.
The program is presented fulltime and part-time and the closing date for
applications is 31st of Augustus.
G.1.8.7.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A BSc degree with Physiology as a major subject or an equivalent
qualification with in-depth knowledge of Physiology;
b)
Selection takes place during September to October and is subject to
available capacity and approval by the school director.
G.1.8.7.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
At least 65% average in Physiology on third-year level is required.
b)
STTN111 or a comparable statistics module must be passed.
29
c)
G.1.8.7.3
G.1.8.7.3.1
It is strongly recommended that the student should provide proof of
immunisation against Hepatitis A+B.
Curriculum G624P: Physiology
Curriculum outcomes
At the end of the curriculum the student should have the proficiency and
suitable skills in the field of Physiology specifically, or in the field of Health
Sciences in general. The student will also have at his/her disposal the suitable
basic skills in the field of Occupational Hygiene.
G.1.8.7.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Physiology
Qualification and programme code: 202 131; Curriculum code: G624P
Module code
Descriptive name
Compulsory modules
FLGX613
Neurophysiology
FLGX615
Research methodology
FLGX617
Cellular Physiology
FLGX625
Endocrinology
FLGX671
Practical Project
Choice modules - three out of six must be chosen
FLGX612
Cardiovascular Physiology A
FLGX618
Occupational Hygiene Monitoring A
FLGX621
Cardiovascular Physiology C
FLGX622
Toxicology A
FLGX624
Toxicology B
FLGX627
Cardiovascular Physiology B
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.8.8
Credits
16
8
8
16
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
128
Programme: Nutrition
Qualification code: 202 132 (F + P)
The curriculum composed in this programme consists of three modules, as well
as a research project of limited scope which prepare the student for further
postgraduate study. The focus in the modules falls on the most recent research
findings on highly relevant problems.
The program is presented fulltime and part-time and the closing date for
applications is 30th September.
Preference will be given to fulltime students.
G.1.8.8.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A BSc degree with Nutrition as major subject or an equivalent qualification
is required.
b)
Selection starts on the 1st of October and is subject to the students‟
academic performance and available capacity in the subject group.
30
c)
G.1.8.8.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
At least 60% in Nutrition at undergraduate level in each of the third year
Nutrition modules and the research module will be required.
b)
STTN111 or any other equivalent module must be passed.
c)
Students who wish to register for this degree must submit proof of
immunisation against hepatitis A and B in the previous year.
G.1.8.8.3
G.1.8.8.3.1
Final selection is subject to the approval of the school director.
Curriculum G626P: Nutrition
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should be able to:
G.1.8.8.3.2
a)
a)
demonstrate an extensive and systematic knowledge level in the field of
nutrition and particularly in specialisation areas like the planning and
execution of epidemiological research programmes, nutrition at public
health level, sport and exercise physiology and the genetic composition of
different communities and the importance thereof for health promotion;
b)
demonstrate skills to apply a well-rounded and coherent and critical
understanding of the principles and theory of nutrition, while relevant
information in a specialist area (as mentioned above) of nutrition is
collected and evaluated at a critical and advanced level, after which the
information is processed to arrive at ethically responsible decisions based
on well-grounded theories and proven facts; and
c)
Demonstrate the capability as entrepreneur to identify and analyse real,
complex nutrition-related lifestyle illnesses in communities and to plan and
execute creative and innovative nutrition-related intervention programmes
in an ethically responsible manner by using proven solutions and theorydriven arguments through group work and the use of Information
Technology as means of communication.
Compilation of curriculum: Nutrition
Qualification and programme code: 202 132; Curriculum code: G626P
Compulsory Modules: All students enrolled for the programme (G626P)
must take the following modules:
The compulsory modules contribute 50% (64 credits) to the total credit load for the
year
Module code
*VOED 678
*VOED680
Descriptive name
Research report
Advanced Nutrition Science
Credits
32
32
** Compulsory modules
b)
Students may make the following choices based on the modules taken
on an undergraduate level:
GROUP A
Only students with MBW and Nutrition as main courses must choose modules from
this group for a total of 64 credits (50% of the total credit load for the year):
31
Module code
**MBWB682
**MBWK686
Descriptive name
Biokinetics: Clinical
Applied Research Methodology and
Mini-dissertation
**VOED676
Nutrigenetics
**VOED677
Nutrition Epidemiology
(Module is not available in 2015)
**VOED679
Nutrition at public health level
**VOED681
Sport Nutrition
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
32
8
16
16
32
32
128
** Choice modules
GROUP B
Only students with Nutrition and Physiology as main courses must choose modules
from this group for a total of 64 credits (50% of the total credit load for the year):
Module code
**FLGX612
**FLXG625
**VOED676
**VOED677
Descriptive name
Cardiovascular Physiology A
Endocrinology
Nutrigenetics
Nutrition Epidemiology
(Module is not available in 2015)
**VOED679
Nutrition at public health level
**VOED681
Sport Nutrition
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
16
16
16
16
32
32
128
** Choice modules
GROUP C
Only students with Psychology and Nutrition as main courses must choose modules
from this group for a total of 64 credits (50% of the total credit load for the year):
Module code
**VOED676
**VOED677
Descriptive name
Nutrigenetics
Nutrition Epidemiology
(Module is not available in 2015)
**VOED679
Nutrition at public health level
**VOED681
Sport Nutrition
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
16
16
32
32
128
** Choice modules
G.1.8.9
Programme: Psychology
Qualification code: 202 133 (F) (Psychology)
The curricula composed for this programme are of an academic nature. In
composing the curricula, consideration was given to career possibilities and the
manpower needs of the country. These curricula prepare the student for further
postgraduate study in Psychology.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 16 September.
32
G.1.8.9.1
G.1.8.9.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Candidates should be in possession of an applicable Bachelor‟s degree
with third year Psychology or should have passed third year level with
Development Psychology and Psychopathology (undergraduate) as part
of a curriculum, as well as an average of 65% in all Psychology modules.
b)
An academic selection takes place according to the criteria as determined
by the school, where an average of 65% in Psychology is set as minimum
criteria during the first B degree. The complete academic record is
however taken into consideration but the department holds the decision to
change the minimum criteria depending on the number of applications;
c)
If a candidate is enrolled for another qualification at the time of selection,
selection will only be provisional and may be cancelled by the department
if the aforementioned qualification is not completed at the end of the
academic year.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
An examination sub-minimum of 50% is required for all Psychology modules in
the honours programme.
G.1.8.9.3
Curriculum G627P: Psychology
This curriculum (G627P) is phasing OUT and is only
available to pipeline students in 2015.
G.1.8.9.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of this programme students should be able to:
a)
demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of
psychometrics, psychological evaluation, psychopathology, basic
intervention and counselling techniques, including programme
development and programme presentation;
b)
do a critical evaluation of existing knowledge concerning theories,
research methods, techniques and technology in psychology, and apply
that knowledge to various contexts;
c)
diagnose psychological pathology in individuals, groups and communities,
design basic intervention programmes and apply them in various sociocultural circumstances;
d)
obtain, analyse and interpret relevant information concerning individuals,
groups and communities, and communicate the information, either
individually or as a member of a group, by writing reports, doing
assignments, or reporting orally;
e)
reflect on the impact of the study material on the self as a person and as a
future care giver; and
f)
Observe, at all times, an ethical, professional and value-based code of
conduct in all modes of communication and association with individuals
and groups.
33
G.1.8.9.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Psychology
Qualification and programme code: 202 133; Curriculum code: G627P
Module code
PSYC671
PSYC672
PSYC673
PSYC674
PSYC675
PSYC676
Descriptive name
Psychometrics
Psychological Evaluation
Applied Positive Psychology
Research psychology
Intervention techniques
Theoretical Perspectives on the
Helping Relationship
PSYC677
Community Psychology
PSYC678
Psychopathology
PSYC679
Ethics and Professional Conduct
PSYC681
Facilitation of Community Wellness
STTN111
Descriptive Statistics
STTN124
Practical Statistics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.8.9.4
Credits
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
12
12
168
Curriculum G628P: Psychology
This curriculum (G628P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.8.9.4.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of this programme students should be able to:
a)
demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of
psychometrics, psychological evaluation, psychopathology, basic
intervention and counselling techniques, including programme
development and programme presentation;
b)
do a critical evaluation of existing knowledge concerning theories,
research methods, techniques and technology in psychology, and apply
that knowledge to various contexts;
c)
diagnose psychological pathology in individuals, groups and communities,
design basic intervention programmes and apply them in various sociocultural circumstances;
d)
obtain, analyse and interpret relevant information concerning individuals,
groups and communities, and communicate the information, either
individually or as a member of a group, by writing reports, doing
assignments, or reporting orally;
e)
reflect on the impact of the study material on the self as a person and as a
future care giver; and
f)
Observe, at all times, an ethical, professional and value-based code of
conduct in all modes of communication and association with individuals
and groups.
34
G.1.8.9.4.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Psychology
Qualification and programme code: 202 133; Curriculum code: G628P
Module code
PSYH611
PSYH612
PSYH613
PSYH671
PSYH672
STTN111
Total semester 1
Descriptive name
First semester
Psychological evaluation.
Community psychology: Theory
Applied positive psychology
Research and ethics: Theory and practice
Psychopathology
Descriptive statistics
Second semester
PSYH621
Intervention techniques
PSYH622
Theoretical perspectives on rendering help
PSYH623
Child and adolescent psychology
PSYH671
Research and ethics: Theory and practice
PSYH672
Psychopathology
STTN124
Practical statistics
Total semester 2
Total credits for curriculum
G.1.9
Credits
16
8
16
20
8
12
80
16
16
16
20
8
12
88
168
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACCALAUREUS
SCIENTIAE PHARMACOLOGY
Qualification code: 840 100
This qualification is phasing OUT and no new students will
be admitted in 2015.
G.1.9.1
G.1.9.2
G.1.9.3
Duration (minimum and maximum)
a)
The minimum duration of the study is one (1) year and the maximum
duration is three (3) years.
b)
The programme is offered in such a manner that students can choose to
do it in one or two years. It is recommended, however, that part-time
students take the course over a period of two years.
c)
Students may also enrol for individual modules as certificate courses for
purposes of continued professional development. A maximum of 3
modules may retain credit towards completion of the Honours BSc degree
within a maximum period of three years.
General admission requirements
a)
Admission to honours programmes takes place in accordance with the
General Rules of the University.
b)
Registration can take place throughout the year.
Programme Pharmacology
Continued professional development is an important and integral part of the
South African strategy to improve public services. The programme in
35
pharmacology is accredited by the Health Professions council of South Africa
(HPCSA) for the purpose of continued professional development (CPD) for
medical practitioners. This programme aims at assisting the health care
professionals in South Africa (medical practitioners, pharmacists, etc.) in
practicing more effective pharmacotherapy in the community medicine.
G.1.9.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
In addition to the General University Rules the following Rules also apply for
this degree:
a)
admission is allowed only if the degree BSc (Pharm) or BPharm or
MBChB or BChD was obtained or a qualification regarded by the Senate
as equivalent to the above-mentioned degrees; and
b)
students with appropriate degrees in biological or biomedical sciences
may, according to the judgement of the Faculty Board, obtain conditional
admission, which implies that the student has to (1) prove competence in
basic and computer skills, (2) successfully complete; Module 2 (basic)
and any choice from Modules 4 to 8 (clinical) for non-degree purposes,
(3) successfully complete an oral evaluation on the completed modules
and (4) formally apply in writing to the Faculty Board for admission to the
Hons. BSc. degree programme in pharmacology and for recognition of
the completed modules for degree purposes; and
c)
Students may, according to the judgement of the Faculty Board, be
exempted from certain modules, or it may be expected from candidates to
take additional course material.
G.1.9.3.2
G.1.9.3.2.1
Curriculum G640P: Pharmacology
a)
The curriculum consists of 11 modules.
b)
Module 1-8 and 13 are compulsory.
c)
Any two elective modules from modules 9-12 must also be included.
d)
Modules 1-8 and any two electives from 9-12 are prerequisites for module
13.
e)
Modules 1-8 and the two elective modules may be completed in random
order, although the suggested order is as indicated in the table.
f)
Basic computer and internet skills are pre-requisites for this programme.
Students must proof their computer and internet skills through successful
completion of either a required pre-test or module FWWT671 (an eightcredit certificate course presented at the University).
Curriculum Outcomes
The student will be capable to exercise selections of drugs based on
pharmacological and ethical principles in the best interest of the patient.
Students will be able to: (1) demonstrate a sound knowledge of the basic
pharmacological principles underlying drug therapy, (2) have an insight into the
dynamics and kinetics of interactions between drugs, including a
comprehensive range of drug groups, (3) evaluate existing drug prescriptions,
and advise the patient with regard to drug treatment, (4) synthesise
36
individualised pharmacological treatment approaches for a wide range of
disease states, (5) retrieve the latest information on drug treatment from the
Internet, (6) evaluate published clinical trials on drug treatment, (7)
communicate individually and co-operatively in an Internet-based environment,
(8) show a sensitivity for a patient-orientated approach to drug therapy, and (9)
reason within the frame(work) of reference addressing relevant ethical
questions regarding drug uses.
G.1.9.3.2.2
G.1.9.3.2.3
Faculty-specific Rules for the curriculum
a)
As a general rule a ratio of 3:2 (participation mark: examination mark) is
used to determine the module mark for modules 1 to 8, while a ratio of 1:1
is used for modules 9 to 12 and a ratio of 2:3 is used for module 13.
b)
A subminimum mark of 40% applies to each assessment for each
module, including assignments, moderated group discussion forums,
examination papers and oral evaluations.
Compilation of the Curriculum: Pharmacology
Qualification and programme code: 840 100; Curriculum code: G640P
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
Module 1:
Principles of Pharmacokinetics
8
FKLT631
Module 2:
Principles of Pharmacodynamics
16
FKLT632
Module 3:
Drugs and the Peripheral Nervous
8
FKLT641
System
Module 4:
Drugs and the Central Nervous
16
FKLT651
System
Module 5:
Drugs and the Cardiovascular System
16
FKLT661
Module 6:
Drugs for Pain, Inflammation, Fever
16
FKLT633
and Airway Diseases
Module 7:
Chemotherapy of Infections and
16
FKLT642
Infestations
Module 8:
Hormones, Hominoids and Hormone
16
FKLT652
Antagonists
Module 9:
Drugs for GIT and Skin Disorders
8
FKLT662**
Module 10:
Vitamins, Haematopoietic and
8
FKLT663**
Immunopharmacology
Module 11:
Advanced Pharmacological Principles
8
FKLT664**
Module 12:
Evidence-based Medicine
8
FKLT665**
Module 13:
Integrated Pharmacology
8
FKLT671
Credit total for the curriculum
136
Note: ** Electives: Any two modules can be selected from 9-11.
37
G.1.10
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACCALAUREUS
PHARMACIAE
Qualification code: 808 100
This qualification is phasing OUT and no new students will
be admitted in 2015.
The Hons BPharm degree is a programme for postgraduate study in
professional pharmacy. Various curricula can lead to this qualification, namely
Community Pharmacy (G618P) and Hospital Pharmacy (G619P).
Students may also enrol for individual modules as certificate courses for
purposes of continued professional development. A maximum of 3 modules
may retain credit towards completion of the Honours B Pharm degree within a
maximum period of three years.
G.1.10.1
Duration (minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum duration is
three years.
G.1.10.2
G.1.10.3
General admission requirements
a)
Admission to honours programmes takes place in accordance with the
General Rules of the University.
b)
Registration takes place according to the General Rules of the University.
Programme: Pharmacy
The purpose of this direction is to provide postgraduate pharmacists the
opportunity to become competent to practice as distinguished leaders on a
highly specialised level as community and hospital pharmacists in providing a
comprehensive pharmaceutical service to the inhabitants of South Africa.
G.1.10.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
In addition to General University Rules the following Rules also apply to this
degree:
a)
No student will be allowed into the Hons. BPharm programme unless
he/she has a BPharm or BSc (Pharm) degree or another qualification
deemed by the Senate as equivalent;
b)
experience in the appropriate pharmaceutical field will be strongly
recommended, although it is not a prerequisite; and
c)
Candidates with a Dipl Pharm qualification or another qualification
deemed by the senate as equivalent may enrol for individual modules.
Upon successful completion of a minimum number of these modules, on
further application, the candidate may be admitted to the degree
programme, provided he/she satisfies all the requirements as deemed by
the senate.
38
G.1.10.3.2
Curriculum G618P: Community Pharmacy
The curriculum consists of module work (theoretical component) in the form of
10 modules (16 credits each).
G.1.10.3.2.1
G.1.10.3.2.2
Curriculum outcomes
a)
The student will be able to practise on a highly specialised level as a
Community Pharmacist in providing a comprehensive pharmaceutical
service in the community pharmaceutical environment.
b)
The student will be:
(1)
Capable of providing a specialised community service within the
scope of practise of pharmacists,
(2)
In the position of a leader in the community pharmacy and functions
of the profession; and
(3)
Able to apply research methodology by:
i)
applying the principles of advanced pharmacy management in
practice;
ii)
utilising communication skills and adapting to different cultural
contexts;
iii)
having specialised knowledge of
pertaining to community pharmacy;
iv)
applying the concepts of advanced pharmacotherapy in
practice;
v)
utilising specialised knowledge of pharmaceutical care; and
vi)
Management and control of effective medicine distribution
systems in a community pharmacy environment.
professional
aspects
Compilation of the curriculum Community Pharmacy
Qualification and programme code: 808 100; Curriculum code: G618P
Module code
BSKT221
IOPS311
FMIA613
FPHA611
FPHA612
FPHA613
Descriptive name
Personnel Psychology
Organisation Psychology
Biopharmaceutics
Introduction to Pharmaco-Economics
Managed Pharmaceutical Care
Disease Management and Drug
utilisation review
FPHA621
Pharmacotherapy I
FPHA622
Pharmacotherapy II
FPHA623
Pharmaco-epidemiology
FPHA624
Legislation and Quality Control
Credit total for the curriculum
39
Credits
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
160
G.1.10.3.3
G.1.10.3.3.1
Curriculum G619P: Hospital Pharmacy
The curriculum consists of module work (theoretical component) in the form of
10 modules (16 credits each).
Curriculum outcomes
a)
b)
G.1.10.3.3.2
The student will be able to practise on a highly specialised level as a
Hospital Pharmacist in providing a comprehensive pharmaceutical service
in the hospital environment.
The student will furthermore be:
(1) Able to provide a specialised service within the scope of practice of
a Hospital Pharmacist,
(2) In a position of leadership in the Hospital Pharmacy environment
and functions of the profession and
(3) Able to apply research methodology by:
i)
applying the principles of advanced pharmacy management in
practice;
ii)
utilising specialised skills of hospital pharmacy management;
iii)
obtaining specialised knowledge of hospital pharmaceutical
services;
iv)
having specialised knowledge of professional aspects
pertaining to hospital pharmacy;
v)
utilising specialised knowledge of pharmaceutical care; and
vi)
Management and control of effective medicine distribution
system in a hospital pharmacy environment.
Compilation of the curriculum: Hospital Pharmacy
Qualification and programme code: 808 100; Curriculum code: G619P
The curriculum consists of module work (theoretical component) in the form of
10 modules (16 credits each). The optional module is chosen in collaboration
with the programme co-ordinator.
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
BSKT221
Personnel Psychology
16
IOPS311
Organisation Psychology
16
FMIA613
Biopharmaceutics
16
FPHA611
Introduction to Pharmaco16
Economics
FPHA612
Managed Pharmaceutical Care
16
FPHA613
Disease Management and Drug
16
utilisation review
FPHA621
Pharmacotherapy I
16
FPHA622
Pharmacotherapy II
16
FPHA623
Pharmaco-epidemiology
16
FPHA624
Legislation and Quality Control
16
FPHA625
Medicines Supply Systems
16
Credit total for the curriculum
160
40
G.1.11
RULES FOR THE DEGREE HONOURS BACHELOR IN
CONSUMER SCIENCES
Qualification code: 835 100 (F + P)
The study may be done fulltime or part-time. The part-time option will only be
offered in special cases.
The closing date for applications is the 30th of August.
G.1.11.1
Duration (minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum duration is
two years.
G.1.11.2
Admission requirements of the qualification
The honours degree follows a three year degree in Consumer Sciences or after
the status of a bachelor‟s degree or a BSc degree in Consumer Sciences was
obtained.
G.1.11.3
Programme: Consumer Sciences
Qualification - en programme code: 835 100
The purpose is (1) to provide students who have already obtained a first
degree in Consumer Sciences with specialised vocationally directed training
that will enable them to fulfil the role of the consumer scientist within the retail
industry and the manufacturing sector, and to do consumer research and solve
consumer-orientated problems in these environments; and (2) to improve the
general quality of life of the South African consumer in society with their
scientific knowledge and skills by acting in an advisory capacity or through the
development and implementation of consumer-orientated educational
programmes.
G.1.11.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Admission requirements specified in G.1.11.2 hold.
b)
Admission to this degree is done in consultation with the school director or
delegated person and is subject to available capacity in the subject group.
c)
Selection starts on the 1st of September. Students are required to submit a
portfolio and complete a skills test, after which a preferential list is
compiled.
G.1.11.3.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average of 60% is required during undergraduate studies.
b)
Prerequisites as indicated against each module specified in the curriculum
requirements holds.
c)
Students who do not hold the three year BSc degree in Consumer
Sciences or the four year B degree in Consumer Sciences, but who hold
an equivalent qualification, must, to the satisfaction of the school director,
take in the case of each of the following modules the opposite module(s)
or equivalent modules as prerequisite honours module.
41
VKLE671
VKLE214
VKLE672
VKLE214, 321
VGHB671
VGHB311
VGHB672
VGHB117, 214, 221
VGHB673
VGHB122, VGHB311
VVDL672
VVDL112, VVDL324
VVDL673
VVDL112, VVDL213
*VVBG671
VGHB117
*Compulsory module for the qualification and will count towards
admission. The same requirements apply for admission to the honours
programme.
d)
G.1.11.3.3
G.1.11.3.3.1
STTN111 or equivalent module (optional)
Curriculum G630P: Consumer Sciences
Curriculum outcomes
At the end of the study, the student should be able to open up new knowledge,
do research, initiate entrepreneurial projects and utilise specialised knowledge
in the chosen areas of study, thus improving the quality of life of the South
African consumer.
G.1.11.3.3.2
Compilation of curriculum: Consumer Sciences
Qualification - en programme code: 835 100; Curriculum code: G630P
a)
Compulsory modules
Module
code
VNAM671
VNAV671
VVBG671
VVOO671
b)
Descriptive name
Research Methods and
Scientific Writing Skills *
Research Project: Project
Report Submission
Consumer Behaviour
Adult Education and Training
Credits
Prerequisite
Module
24
32
VNAM671
VVBG671
16
16
A student must in collaboration with the director of the school
choose 2 more modules from group A or B or C
GROUP A
Module code
VGHB671
Descriptive name
Housing and Community
Development
VGHB672
Consumer Resource Management
VGHB673
Interior Design
Total credits for the curriculum
42
Credits
24
24
24
136
GROUP B
Module code
Descriptive name
VGHB672
Consumer Resource Management
VGHB673
Interior Design
VKLE671
Advanced Textiles
VKLE672
Advanced Fashion Industry
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
24
24
24
24
136
GROUP C
Module code
Descriptive name
VGHB672
Consumer Resource Management
VVDL672
Food Product Development
VVDL673
Consumer Behaviour in Foods
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12
Credits
24
24
24
136
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF ARTS
The curricula for a particular master‟s degree or the framework within which
such curriculum may be compiled, is determined by the relevant school and/or
research entity.
Studies towards a master‟s degree can be done fulltime or part-time (for
curriculums where indicated).
G.1.12.1
Duration (Minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration for the study is one year and the maximum duration
two years, calculated from the date of the first registration for the particular
programme.
Although a maximum study period of two years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will have
extensive financial implications for the student.
G.1.12.2
Admission requirements for the qualification
A student who wishes to register for a Master‟s degree must have acquired an
honours degree or equivalent qualification in the applicable field as approved
by the Senate.
G.1.12.3
Programme: Recreational Science
Qualification code: 103 182 (F + P) (Recreation)
The curricula composing this programme are of academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Recreation.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September. (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.12.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.12.2 hold.
43
G.1.12.3.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.12.3.3
G.1.12.3.3.1
Curriculum G815P: Recreational Science
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should:
G.1.12.3.3.2
a)
demonstrate a comprehensive/extensive and systematic knowledge base
of Recreation Science with specialist knowledge of the area in which
research is conducted;
b)
have a coherent and critical understanding of the appropriate theories,
research methods and techniques to identify and analyse complex and
real-life problems under supervision and react by using advanced
information-gathering and processing skills; and
c)
Demonstrate the ability to undertake a research project in an ethical and
responsible way by applying research methods, techniques and
technologies and write a research paper under supervision and orally
present the findings to an audience of peers and professionals.
Compilation of the curriculum: Recreational Science
Qualification-and programme code: 103 182; Curriculum code: G815P
Module code
Descriptive name
RKKV871
Recreation Sciences (Dissertation)
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.4
Credits
180
180
Programme: Biokinetics
Qualification code: 103 191 (F + P) (Biokinetics)
The curricula composing this programme are of an academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Biokinetics.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.12.4.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.12.2 hold.
44
G.1.12.4.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.12.4.3
G.1.12.4.3.1
Curriculum G801P: Biokinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, student should:
G.1.12.4.3.2
a)
demonstrate a comprehensive/extensive and systematic knowledge base
of Biokinetics, with specialist knowledge of the area in which research is
done;
b)
have a coherent and critical understanding of the appropriate theories,
research methods and techniques to identify and analyse complex and
real-life problems under supervision and react by using advanced
information-gathering and processing skills; and
c)
Demonstrate the ability to undertake a research project in an ethical and
responsible manner by applying research methods, techniques and
technologies and write a research paper under supervision and orally
present the findings to an audience of peers and professionals.
Compilation of the curriculum: Biokinetics
Qualification-and programme code: 103 191; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWB871
Dissertation: Biokinetics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.5
Credits
180
180
Programme: Kinderkinetics
Qualification code: 103 192 (F + P) (Kinderkinetics)
The curricula composing this programme are of an academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Biokinetics.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.12.5.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.12.2 hold.
45
G.1.12.5.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.12.5.3
G.1.12.5.3.1
Curriculum G802P: Kinderkinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should:
G.1.12.5.3.2
a)
be able to demonstrate a comprehensive/extensive and systematic
knowledge base of human movement science or recreation science, with
specialist knowledge about the area in which research was conducted;
b)
have a coherent and critical understanding of the appropriate theories,
research methods and techniques, and use advanced informationgathering and processing skills under supervision in order to identify and
analyse complex and real-life problems and react to them; and
c)
Demonstrate the ability to undertake a research project in an ethical and
responsible way by applying research methods, techniques and
technologies and write a research dissertation under supervision and
orally defend the findings to an audience of peers and professionals.
Compilation of the curriculum: Kinderkinetics
Qualification-and programme code: 103 192; Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWK871
Dissertation: Kinderkinetics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.6
Credits
180
180
Programme: Sport Science
Qualification code: 103 193 (F + P) (Sport Science)
The curricula composing this programme are of an academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Biokinetics.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September. (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.12.6.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.12.2 hold.
46
G.1.12.6.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.12.6.3
G.1.12.6.3.1
Curriculum G803P: Sport Science
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should:
G.1.12.6.3.2
a)
Demonstrate an extensive and systematic knowledge of Sport Science;
b)
Synthesize and apply knowledge regarding research methods and
techniques applicable to one of the abovementioned specialising fields in
the planning, compilation and execution of a research project;
c)
Identify and solve a complex research problem or question concerning
one of the abovementioned specialising areas through advanced
information development and processing skills as well as the collection,
capturing, analysing and interpretation of research data;
d)
Present a dissertation which comply to the standards of scientific
professional writing by means of advanced information technology, and
communicate it to a national specialist-examination panel through
professional academic reasoning;
e)
Act in an ethical and responsible manner within the required parameters
of the research project during the execution of projects and the
compilation and finalization of the dissertation.
Compilation of the curriculum: Sport Science
Qualification-and programme code: 103 193; Curriculum code: G803P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWS871
Dissertation: Sport Science
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.7
Credits
180
180
Programme: Psychology
Qualification code: 103 181 (F + P) (Psychology)
The aim of the programme is academic research in Psychology.
Closing date for applications is 30th June where after a selection process will
follow.
47
G.1.12.7.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An honours degree in Psychology (academic or in any GPRSA
registration category for Psychologists) is required.
b)
Conditional admission is granted on the basis of:




c)
G.1.12.7.2
Final approval will be given after an admissions interview and successful
presentation of the research concept before an expert panel.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic mark of at least 65% during the honours degree is
required.
b)
Candidates may be required to attend additional workshops to improve
research skills.
c)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.12.7.3
G.1.12.7.3.1
requirements of the GPRSA where applicable,
academic record,
qualifications,
Extent to which project fits into the research department, as well
as availability of a study leaders.
Curriculum G801P: Psychology
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum the student should be able to:
G.1.12.7.3.2
a)
demonstrate advanced knowledge and competencies in the identification
of a research question that can be researched individually or
interdisciplinary;
b)
design and apply appropriate qualitative and/or quantitative formats and
procedures in an ethical and scientific way;
c)
interpret and report research findings scientifically; and
d)
Go through the research process by effectively cooperating with others.
Compilation of the curriculum: Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 103 181; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
PSYC871
Dissertation: Psychology
Total credits for the curriculum
48
Credits
180
180
G.1.12.8
Programme: Positive Psychology
Qualification code: 103 195 (P) (Positive Psychology)
This programme consists of tuition and research and will be presented in four
weekly sessions per year on campus. The aim is to equip participants to apply
knowledge from positive psychology in various contexts to enhance the wellbeing and quality of life for people. It is a specialized degree in positive
psychology and not a clinical qualification, and does not provide registration at
the HPCSA.
The program is presented on a fulltime and part-time basis in English and the
closing date for applications is the 30th of September. Selection takes place
during October.
G.1.12.8.1
Admission and selection requirements of the program
a)
An honours degree (or equivalent) in psychology or other discipline (e.g.
from other health sciences, education, social work, theology). Admission
is open to applicants from psychology as well as other disciplines.
b)
The honours degree or equivalent in other academic fields must be with a
minimum of 60 – 65%.
c)
It is recommended that applicants must already be in a work context.
d)
Apart from the official application process, students must complete an
application for selection, which can be obtained from the programme
manager. A complete CV will be required.
e)
An interview will be conducted during selection.
G.1.12.8.2
Additional requirements and specific faculty rules
a)
G.1.12.8.3
G.1.12.8.3.1
Students whose academic background is outside of the field of
Psychology, should add an additional motivation for doing the course and
can add a portfolio containing evidence of prior learning and experience...
Curriculum G801P: Positive Psychology
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum, the student should be able to:
a)
Demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of concepts,
theories and research in the fields of positive psychology, well-being,
positive organisational scholarship, psycho-social health, positive lifespan
development and aging and enabling communities;
b)
Demonstrate critical awareness of current issues, debates, new insights
and cutting edge issues within positive psychology to be able to solve
identified problems in the field of positive psychology;
c)
Demonstrate competence in positive psychology assessment methods
49
G.1.12.8.3.2
d)
Demonstrate awareness of meta-theoretical and philosophical
perspectives in positive psychology and the role of cultural, social,
economic, political, historical aspects in conceptualizations and practices
of positive psychology.
e)
Use principles, concepts and theories from positive psychology to assess
and enhance psycho-social health and well-being in various contexts, for
facilitation of life-span development, capacity building, prevention and
advocacy for more comprehensive public health policies;
f)
Make interventions at the appropriate level within a system, based on the
understanding of the hierarchical relations within the system, and the
ability to address the intended and unintended consequences of
interventions;
g)
Show an awareness of and understanding of ethical constraints
associated with application of positive psychology interventions;
contribute to the development of ethical standards in specific contexts;
identify, and manage emerging ethical issues and monitor consequences
where applicable.
h)
Develop knowledge, understanding, skills and experience needed to carry
out research in positive psychology.
i)
Demonstrate the ability to creatively select, design and apply appropriate
research methods and techniques, appropriate to the specific issue and
context.
j)
Communicate ideas from positive psychology to a wide range of
audiences with different levels of knowledge or expertise.
k)
Reflect critically on own learning and experience; demonstrate the ability
to develop own learning strategies which can sustain independent
learning and academic development, and to take responsibility for own
work, decisions and use of resources.
Compilation of curriculum: Positive Psychology
Qualification and programme code: 103 195; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
PSYP874
PSYP875
Descriptive name
Introduction to Positive Psychology
Research methods in Positive
Psychology
PSYP876
Assessment and Basics of
Interventions
PSYP877
Applications in Positive Psychology
PSYP878
Advanced Positive Psychology
PSYP872
Research Dissertation in Positive
Psychology
Credit total for the curriculum
50
Credits
24
24
24
24
24
60
180
G.1.12.9
Programme: Clinical Psychology
Qualification code: 103 183 (F) (Clinical Psychology)
a)
The programme is professional in nature. In developing this curriculum,
requirements of the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA),
and national and regional needs were taken into consideration by
addressing them in the research focus area AUTHeR. In composing the
curriculum, consideration was given to career possibilities and manpower
needs of our country. This curriculum prepares the student for further
postgraduate studies in Psychology.
b)
The Clinical Psychology Programme gives an opportunity for specialised
and advanced training and is a prerequisite for registration as an intern
and eventually Clinical Psychologist at the Health Professions Council of
South Africa (HPCSA).
c)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 4 July where after a selection process will follow.
G.1.12.9.1
G.1.12.9.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An honours degree in Psychology or an applicable equivalent qualification
is required;
b)
A paper selection based on academic performance, relevant skills and
quality of refence reports will be conducted;
c)
A formal selection process based on an individual in-depth interview by a
panel of psychologists, a research assignment, evaluation of traits, skills
and potential by means of case studies and group work will be conducted;
d)
A final in-depth interview by a selection panel of internal and external
psychologists (departmental and internship representatives) will be
conducted.
e)
Final approval is subject to a specific research concept within the focus of
the subject group.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average of 65% in the honours degree is required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes. The
department is free to terminate a student‟s study if the academic,
behavioural and/or functioning record is unsatisfactory and/or poses a
threat to their own health or that of society.
c)
Academic excellence is at all times a priority. A participation mark will be
defined and determined for each module. A pass mark of 55% per module
and an examination sub-minimum of 50% per module are required.
Candidates will receive a second examination opportunity in a module,
only if a paper has been failed, and a maximum mark of 50% will be
allocated for such examination opportunity. If the 2 nd opportunity is failed
the entire year must be repeated. If more than one module are failed the
students fails the course.
51
d)
G.1.12.9.3
If the experiential progress is not as desired, the internship may be
extended.
Curriculum G801P: Clinical Psychology
This curriculum (G801P) is phasing OUT and is only
available to pipeline students in 2015
G.1.12.9.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Clinical
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
G.1.12.9.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Clinical Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 103 183; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
PSYK872
PSYC878
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation
Psychopharmacology, Adult
Psychopathology and Neuropsychology
PSYC879
Child and Adolescent Pathology and
Therapy
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Interventions
PSYC881
Applied Psychological Interventions
PSYC882
Professional Aspects, Psycho Diagnostics
and Practical Work
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.9.4
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
Curriculum G802P: Clinical Psychology
This curriculum (G802P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.12.9.4.1
Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Clinical
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
52
G.1.12.9.4.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Clinical Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 103 183; Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
PSYK872
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation in Clinical
Psychology
PSYC879
Child and Adolescent Pathology and
Therapy
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Interventions
PSYC884
Applied Psychology and Community
Interventions
PSYC883
Ethics, Psychodiagnostics and Practical work
PSYC885
Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and
advanced Psychopathology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.10
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
Programme: Counselling Psychology
Qualification code: 103 184 (Counselling Psychology)
a)
The programme is professional in nature. In developing this curriculum,
requirements of the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA),
and national and regional needs were taken into consideration by
addressing them in the research focus area AUTHeR. In composing the
curriculum, consideration was given to career possibilities and manpower
needs of our country. This curriculum prepares the student for further
postgraduate studies in Psychology.
b)
The Counselling Psychology programme gives an opportunity for
specialised and advanced training and is a prerequisite for registration as
an intern and eventually Counselling Psychologist at the Health
Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA).
c)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 4th July where after a selection process will follow.
G.1.12.10.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An honours degree in Psychology or an applicable equivalent qualification
is required;
b)
A paper selection based on academic performance, relevant skills and
quality of refence reports will be conducted;
c)
A formal selection process based on an individual in-depth interview by a
panel of psychologists, a research assignment, evaluation of traits, skills
and potential by means of case studies and group work will be conducted;
d)
A final in-depth interview by a selection panel of internal and external
psychologists (departmental and internship representatives) will be
conducted.
e)
Final approval is subject to a specific research concept within the focus of
the subject group.
53
G.1.12.10.2
G.1.12.10.3
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average of 65% during the honours degree is required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes. The
department is free to terminate a student‟s study if the academic,
behavioural and/or functioning record is unsatisfactory and/or poses a
threat to their own health or that of society.
c)
Academic excellence is at all times a priority. A participation mark will be
defined and determined for each module. A pass mark of 55% per module
and an examination sub-minimum of 50% per module are required.
Candidates will receive a second examination opportunity in a module,
only if a paper has been failed, and a maximum mark of 50% will be
allocated for such examination opportunity. If the 2 nd opportunity is failed
the entire year must be repeated. If more than one module are failed the
students fails the course.
d)
If the experiential progress is not as desired, the internship may be
extended.
Curriculum G801P: Counselling Psychology
This curriculum (G801P) is phasing OUT and is only
available to pipeline students in 2015
G.1.12.10.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Counselling
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
G.1.12.10.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Counselling Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 103 184; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
PSYV872
PSYC878
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation
Psychopharmacology, Adult
Psychopathology and Neuro-psychology
PSYV879
Child and Adolescent Development,
Pathology and Therapy
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Interventions
PSYV881
Applied Counselling and Psychological
Interventions
PSYC882
Professional Aspects, Psycho Diagnostics
and Practical Work
Total credits for the curriculum
54
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
G.1.12.10.4
Curriculum G802P: Counselling Psychology
This curriculum (G802P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.12.10.4.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Counselling
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
G.1.12.10.4.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Counselling Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 103 184; Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
PSYV872
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation in
Counselling Psychology
PSYV879
Child and Adolescent Development,
Pathology and Therapy
PSYV880
Theory of Psychological Interventions in
Counselling Psychology
PSYV885
Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and
advanced Psychopathology in Counselling
Psychology
PSYC884
Applied Psychology and Community
Interventions
PSYC883
Ethics, Psychodiagnostics and Practical work
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.12.11
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
Programme: Research Psychology
Qualification code: 103 185 (F) (Research Psychology)
a)
The programme is professional in nature. In developing this curriculum,
national and regional needs were taken into consideration by addressing
them in the research focus area AUTHeR. In composing the curriculum,
consideration was given to career possibilities and manpower needs of
our country. This curriculum prepares the student for further postgraduate
studies in Psychology.
b)
The Research Psychology programme gives an opportunity for
specialised and advanced training and is a prerequisite for registration as
Psychologist at the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA).
c)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 30 September where after a selection process will follow.
G.1.12.11.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An Honours degree in Psychology is required (with at least 65 %);
55
G.1.12.11.2
b)
Passing of an paper-, academic- and personality screening at the
completion of the honours degree for admission to the professional
programme in Research Psychology;
c)
Students must submit a selection application by 30 September. The
application should consist of the following: (a) a letter of motivation, (b)
complete CV, (c) complete academic record, (d) a two page proposal with
possible research topics.
d)
Students who comply with all the requirements will be invited for a
selection interview to determine their potential to benefit from the research
programme and will be requested to complete a research assignment.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes. The
department is free to terminate the studies if a student‟s academic,
behavioural, and/or function record is unsatisfactory and hold a danger to
him/her or the public.
b)
Academic excellence is always a prerequisite. A participation mark will be
defined and determined for each module. A pass mark of 55 % per
module and an examination sub-minimum of 50 % per module are
required. Candidates are only allowed a 2nd opportunity in one paper. If
the 2nd opportunity is failed the year must be repeated. Should more
papers be failed, the candidate fails the course.
c)
If the experiential progress is not as desired, the internship may be
extended.
G.1.12.11.3
Curriculum G801P: Research Psychology
G.1.12.11.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
After completing this curriculum, the student should:
a)
demonstrate advanced, systematic and specialist knowledge to undertake
research at individual, community and/or interdisciplinary level by applying
appropriate research methods and techniques to identify, analyse and
formulate complex research problem(s) in the domain of psychology;
b)
demonstrate advanced strategies to obtain, analyse and evaluate
applicable information for its relevance and validity;
c)
use applicable quantitative and/or qualitative research methods to provide
answers for research phenomena;
d)
interpret results in a scientific manner;
e)
integrate research findings and reflect on it critically;
f)
communicate the findings orally by means of applicable IT and by writing
it up in research reports; and
g)
Perform and communicate research in an ethical and scientific manner.
After the successful completion of the academic curriculum and an internship,
the student complies with the requirements of the Health Professions Council
56
of South Africa (HPCSA) and may register as a Research Psychologist, if the
student so desires.
G.1.12.11.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Research Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 103 185; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
PSYC872
Dissertation
PSYC874
Critical Research Skills
PSYC875
Quantitative Research Methods
PSYC876
Qualitative Research Methods
PSYC877
Project management
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13
Credits
116
16
16
16
16
180
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF SCIENCE
The curricula for a particular master‟s degree or the framework within which
such curriculum may be compiled, is determined by the relevant school and/or
research entity.
Studies towards a master‟s degree can be done fulltime or part-time (for
selected curriculums).
G.1.13.1
Duration (Minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration for the study is one year and the maximum duration
two years, calculated from the date of the first registration for the particular
programme.
Although a maximum study period of two years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will have
extensive financial implications for the student.
G.1.13.2
Admission requirements of the qualification
A student who wishes to register for a Master‟s degree must have acquired an
honours degree or equivalent qualification in the applicable field as approved
by the Senate.
G.1.13.3
Programme: Biokinetics
Qualification code: 203 195 (F + P) (Biokinetics)
The curricula composing this programme are of an academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Biokinetics.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.13.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.13.2 hold.
57
G.1.13.3.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.13.3.3
G.1.13.3.3.1
Curriculum G801P: Biokinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, student should:
G.1.13.3.3.2
a)
demonstrate a comprehensive/extensive and systematic knowledge base
of Biokinetics, with specialist knowledge of the area in which research is
done;
b)
have a coherent and critical understanding of the appropriate theories,
research methods and techniques to identify and analyse complex and
real-life problems under supervision and react by using advanced
information-gathering and processing skills; and
c)
Demonstrate the ability to undertake a research project in an ethical and
responsible manner by applying research methods, techniques and
technologies and write a research paper under supervision and orally
present the findings to an audience of peers and professionals.
Compilation of the curriculum: Biokinetics
Qualification-and programme code: 203 195; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWB871
Dissertation: Biokinetics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.4
Credits
180
180
Programme: Kinderkinetics
Qualification code: 203 196 (F + P) (Kinderkinetics)
The curricula composing this programme are of an academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Biokinetics.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.13.4.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.13.2 hold.
58
G.1.13.4.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.13.4.3
G.1.13.4.3.1
Curriculum G802P: Kinderkinetics
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should:
G.1.13.4.3.2
a)
be able to demonstrate a comprehensive/extensive and systematic
knowledge base of human movement science or recreation science, with
specialist knowledge about the area in which research was conducted;
b)
have a coherent and critical understanding of the appropriate theories,
research methods and techniques, and use advanced informationgathering and processing skills under supervision in order to identify and
analyse complex and real-life problems and react to them; and
c)
Demonstrate the ability to undertake a research project in an ethical and
responsible way by applying research methods, techniques and
technologies and write a research dissertation under supervision and
orally defend the findings to an audience of peers and professionals.
Compilation of the curriculum: Kinderkinetics
Qualification-and programme code: 203 196; Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWK871
Dissertation: Kinderkinetics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.5
Credits
180
180
Programme: Sport Science
Qualification code: 203 197 (F + P) (Sport Science)
The curricula composing this programme are of an academic nature. The
programmes give an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Biokinetics.
The programme is presented fulltime and part-time and applications should be
submitted by 11th September. (Late applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.13.5.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
General admission requirements in par G.1.13.2 holds.
59
G.1.13.5.2
b)
A selection process as prescribed for the specialist field/programme of the
school, which takes place during October to November; must be passed.
c)
Final selection is subject to approval by the school- and research director.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average academic performance of 60% in the honours year is
required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students.
G.1.13.5.3
G.1.13.5.3.1
Curriculum G803P: Sport Science
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should:
G.1.13.5.3.2
a)
Demonstrate an extensive and systematic knowledge of Sport Science;
b)
Synthesize and apply knowledge regarding research methods and
techniques applicable to one of the abovementioned specialising fields in
the planning, compilation and execution of a research project;
c)
Identify and solve a complex research problem or question concerning
one of the abovementioned specialising areas through advanced
information development and processing skills as well as the collection,
capturing, analysing and interpretation of research data;
d)
Present a dissertation which comply to the standards of scientific
professional writing by means of advanced information technology, and
communicate it to a national specialist-examination panel through
professional academic reasoning;
e)
Act in an ethical and responsible manner within the required parameters
of the research project during the execution of projects and the
compilation and finalization of the dissertation.
Compilation of the curriculum: Sport Science
Qualification-and programme code: 203 197; Curriculum code: G803P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWS871
Dissertation: Sport Science
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.6
Credits
180
180
Programme: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Qualification code: 203 184 (F) (Pharmaceutical Chemistry)
The MSc degree in Pharmaceutical Chemistry is a research-based degree and
consists of a research project and the writing of a dissertation in
Pharmaceutical Chemistry. The aim of the curriculum is to provide in South
Africa‟s need of high-level manpower in the pharmacy profession. The student
will distinguish himself/herself as a specialist in the specific chosen field
60
(programme) and will be capable of applying Research Methodology at this
level and in the specific field of study.
The curriculum is presented fulltime in Afrikaans and English.
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. Applications received
after this date will be considered on merit.
G.1.13.6.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year BPharm degree, a BSc (Pharm) degree and a suitable
honours degree with Chemistry on at least third year level, or a
qualification which the Senate deems to be equivalent. In all the abovementioned cases additional course work will be required as determined by
the specific programme coordinator.
b)
Students who do not have a BPharm degree will be assessed according
to prior learning.
c)
Selection involves the submission of a formal application form and
curriculum vitae by the applicant as well as a possible interview by the
director of the Centre of Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences as well
as the subject chair.
G.1.13.6.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
A 60% pass mark will be required for first semester modules in the final
year of the BPharm degree.
b)
The research director may refuse a prospective student admission to a
curriculum if the standard of proficiency that the student has reached
previously in the specific subject(s) wherein he/she wants to study does
not comply with the specific curriculum requirements.
G.1.13.6.3
Curriculum G801P: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
The curriculum consists of a research project in a field within the relevant
research focus area, culminating in the writing of a dissertation. A participation
mark is accrued from the attendance/completion of specific modules which,
according to the specific supervisor, may be of importance for the student in
completing his/her study. The modules are indicated and set out in the
“Information document for master‟s degree studies” in the Centre of Excellence
for Pharmaceutical Sciences.
G.1.13.6.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the programme the student should be able to:
a)
demonstrate advanced / comprehensive specialist knowledge and skills in
order to identify relevant research questions within the field of
Pharmaceutical Chemistry;
b)
identify a research problem/need, and to plan and execute a suitable
research design in a scientific and ethical manner by making use of
appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;
61
G.1.13.6.3.2
c)
interpret and integrate research findings in a scientifically accountable
manner, and in a scientific and ethical way communicate - orally and in
writing - the necessary information by means of a research report;
d)
Act as a leader, i.e. ethically and responsibly, in the pharmacists‟
profession in the field of Pharmaceutical Chemistry.
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Qualification and programme code: 203 184; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
FCHG871
Dissertation: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.7
Credits
180
180
Programme: Pharmacology
Qualification code: 203 185 (F) (Pharmacology)
The MSc degree in Pharmacology is a research-based degree and consists of
a research project and the writing of a dissertation in Pharmacology. The aim
of the curriculum is to provide in South Africa‟s need of high-level manpower in
the pharmacy profession. The student will distinguish himself/herself as a
specialist in the specific chosen field (programme) and will be capable of
applying Research Methodology at this level and in the specific field of study.
The curriculum is presented fulltime in Afrikaans and English.
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. Applications received
after this date will be considered on merit.
G.1.13.7.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year BPharm degree, a BSc (Pharm) degree and a suitable
honours degree or a qualification which the Senate deems to be
equivalent. In all the above-mentioned cases additional course work will
be required as determined by the specific programme coordinator.
b)
Students who do not have a BPharm degree will be assessed according
to prior learning.
c)
Selection involves the submission of a formal application form and
curriculum vitae by the applicant as well as a possible interview by the
director of the Centre of Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences as well
as the subject chair.
G.1.13.7.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
A 60% pass mark will be required for first semester modules in the final
year of the BPharm degree.
b)
The research director may refuse a prospective student admission to a
curriculum if the standard of proficiency that the student has reached
previously in the specific subject(s) wherein he/she wants to study does
not comply with the specific curriculum requirements.
62
G.1.13.7.3
Curriculum G801P: Pharmacology
The curriculum consists of a research project in a field within the relevant
research focus area, culminating in the writing of a dissertation. A participation
mark is accrued from the attendance/completion of specific modules which,
according to the specific supervisor, may be of importance for the student in
completing his/her study. The modules are indicated and set out in the
“Information document for master‟s degree study” in the Centre of Excellence
for Pharmaceutical Sciences.
G.1.13.7.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the programme the student should be able to:
G.1.13.7.3.2
a)
demonstrate advanced / comprehensive specialist knowledge and skills in
order to identify relevant research issues within the field of Pharmacology;
b)
identify a research problem/need, and to plan and execute a suitable
research design in a scientific and ethical manner by making use of
appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;
c)
interpret and integrate research findings in a scientifically accountable
manner, and in a scientific and ethical way communicate - orally and in
writing - the necessary information by means of a research report; and
d)
Act as a leader, i.e. ethically and responsibly, in appropriate research and
health professions in the field of Pharmacology.
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmacology
Qualification and programme code: 203 185; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
FKLG871
Dissertation: Pharmacology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.8
Credits
180
180
Programme: Pharmaceutics
Qualification code: 203 186 (F) (Pharmaceutics)
The MSc degree in Pharmaceutics is a research-based degree and consists of
a research project and the writing of a dissertation in Pharmaceutics. The aim
of the curricula is to provide in South Africa‟s need of high-level manpower in
the pharmacy profession. The student will distinguish himself/herself as a
specialist in the specific chosen field (programme) and will be capable of
applying Research Methodology at this level and in the specific field of study.
The curriculum is presented fulltime in Afrikaans and English.
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. Applications received
after this date will be considered on merit.
G.1.13.8.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year BPharm degree, a BSc (Pharm) degree and a suitable
honours degree or a qualification which the Senate deems to be
63
equivalent. In all the above-mentioned cases additional course work will
be required as determined by the specific programme coordinator.
b)
Students who do not have a BPharm degree will be assessed according
to prior learning.
c)
Selection involves the submission of a formal application form and
curriculum vitae by the applicant as well as a possible interview by the
director of the Centre of Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences as well
as the subject chair.
G.1.13.8.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
A 60% pass mark will be required for first semester modules in the final
year of the BPharm degree.
b)
The research director may refuse a prospective student admission to a
curriculum if the standard of proficiency that the student has reached
previously in the specific subject(s) wherein he/she wants to study does
not comply with the specific curriculum requirements.
G.1.13.8.3
Curriculum G801P: Pharmaceutics
The curriculum consists of a research project in a field within the relevant
research focus area, culminating in the writing of a dissertation. A participation
mark is accrued from the attendance/completion of specific modules which,
according to the specific supervisor, may be of importance for the student in
completing his/her study. The modules are indicated and set out in the
“Information document for master‟s degree study” in the Centre of Excellence
for Pharmaceutical Sciences.
G.1.13.8.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the programme the student should be able to:
a)
demonstrate advanced/comprehensive specialist knowledge and skills in
order to identify relevant research questions within the field of
Pharmaceutics;
b)
identify a research problem/need, and to plan and execute a suitable
research design in a scientific and ethical manner by making use of
appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;
c)
interpret and integrate research findings in a scientifically accountable
manner, and in a scientific and ethical way communicate - orally and in
writing - the necessary information by means of a research report; and
d)
Act as a leader, i.e. ethically and responsibly, in the pharmacists‟
profession in the field of Pharmaceutics.
64
G.1.13.8.3.2
Composition of the curriculum: Pharmaceutics
Qualification and programme code: 203 186; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
FMSG871
Dissertation: Pharmaceutics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.9
Credits
180
180
Programme: Occupational Hygiene
Qualification code: 203 160 (F)
The objective of this qualification is the training of postgraduate students,
enabling them to function as occupational hygienists at a highly qualified level
as researchers in the health sciences.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis. The closing date for
applications is 31st August (phase 1) and 30th September (phase 2).
Applications received after this date will be considered on merit.
G.1.13.9.1
G.1.13.9.2
G.1.13.9.3
G.1.13.9.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
The student must be in possession of a relevant honours degree or
equivalent qualification.
b)
A selection process takes place during September and October and
approval by the School director is subject to available capacity.
Additional requirements and faculty-specific rules
a)
An average of 65% in Physiology (or equivalent qualification) is required
at honours level.
b)
It is strongly recommended that the student must provide proof of
immunisation, at least against Hepatitis A and B.
c)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on a
continual basis by the students.
d)
Four examination papers and a mini-dissertation should be completed
during the curriculum.
e)
The module mark is calculated as follows: Mini-dissertation: 50% and the
average of four modules: 50%.
Curriculum G851P: Occupational Hygiene
Curriculum outcomes
The qualified student will be equipped with advanced knowledge and skills to
identify a relevant research need within the field of occupational hygiene; plan
and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research design in a
scientific ethical manner and utilize suitable research methods, -techniques
and –procedures in the approach; interpret research results in a scientific
65
accountable manner and compile a research report on it. The student will have
the skills to function as an occupational hygienist in the industry.
G.1.13.9.4
Compilation of the curriculum: Occupational Hygiene
Qualification and programme code: 203 160; Curriculum code: G851P
Module code
FLGX873
FLGX884
FLGX885
Descriptive name
Mini-Dissertation
Occupational hygiene monitoring B
Vibration, heat and ergonomic
factors
FLGX886
Labour legislation
FLGX887
Personal protection equipment and
radiation
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.10
Credits
96
24
24
24
24
192
Programme: Nutrition
Qualification code: 203 166 (F + P)
The programme is composed in such a way that the student has a choice
between both the research-directed curriculum (G871P), which includes a
dissertation, or the structured curriculum (G870P), which includes three
modules and a mini-dissertation, based on a research project.
The programme is presented on a fulltime and part-time basis and the closing
date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.13.10.1
G.1.13.10.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
The student must be in possession of a relevant honours degree or
equivalent qualification.
b)
Selection by a selection committee starts on the 1st of October and is
subject to the academic performance of the student. Students, who
comply with all the requirements, will be invited to an interview.
c)
Selection is subject to available capacity and approval of the director of
the Centre of Excellence for Nutrition.
Additional requirements and faculty-specific rules
a)
The student should have obtained at least 60% in the Honours degree.
b)
Students with a four year BSc Dietetics degree should have obtained at
least 60% in all of the third-year Nutrition modules as well as in the
research module.
c)
STTN111 (Descriptive statistics) or an equivalent module must be
passed.
66
d)
G.1.13.10.3
Students to be registered for this programme must at the time of
registration submit proof of immunisation against Hepatitis A and B, being
administered during the previous 5 years.
Curriculums G870P and G871P: Nutrition
G.1.13.10.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student should be equipped:
a)
with advanced knowledge and skills to identify a relevant research
problem within the field of Nutrition;
b)
to plan and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research
topic in a scientific and ethical way, using suitable research methods,
techniques and procedures;
c)
to interpret the research findings in a scientifically accountable way,;
d)
to compose a research report on it in the form of a mini-dissertation or
dissertation, in chapter or article format; and
e)
To play a leading role in Nutrition Care in South Africa.
Additional curriculum outcomes for the structured degree that includes a
mini-dissertation (G870P)
“Mini-dissertation” is a written piece, including a written report or one published
research article or a couple of published research articles or unpublished
manuscript(s) in article format, that is of a more limited scope than a
dissertation and that is compiled for exam purposes in agreement with the
regulations with regard to documentation, argumentation, language and style
and that are evaluated together with answering a couple of prescribed
examination papers, to determine whether a student is confident with the
research methodology, and that is presented in partial fulfilment of the
requirements for obtaining a master‟s degree at the university in accordance
with the prescribed Rules.
Additional curriculum outcomes for the degree that includes a
dissertation (G871P)
“Dissertation” is a written piece compiled for examination purposes, including
one published research article or a couple of published research articles or
unpublished manuscript(s) in article format, in accordance with the
requirements for documentation, argumentation, language and style, in which a
student must provide proof that he / she is confident with the research
methodology and that is presented in partial fulfilment of the requirements of
the prescribed outcomes for a master‟s degree at the University.
G.1.13.10.4
Compilation of the curriculums: Nutrition
A student has a choice between both a mini-dissertation and three modules
(G870P) or a dissertation (G871P), depending on the previous learning and the
master‟s programme of the school.
67
Qualification and programme code: 203 166; Curriculum code: G870P
Module code
Descriptive name
VOED873
Mini-dissertation
96
VOED874
Public Health Nutrition
32
VOED875
Advanced Nutrition
32
VOED876
Sport Nutrition
32
NUTE871
Nutritional Epidemiology
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
32
192
Qualification and programme code: 203 166; Curriculum code: G871P
Module code
Descriptive name
VOED871
Dissertation
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.11
Credits
192
192
Programme: Dietetics
Qualification code: 203 169 (F + P)
The programme is presented on a fulltime and part-time basis and the closing
date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.13.11.1
G.1.13.11.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
The student must be in possession of a relevant honours degree or
equivalent qualification.
b)
It is possible to register for this programme directly after the four year BSc
(Dietetics)-degree, if the admission requirements are complied with.
c)
Selection by a selection committee starts on the 1st of October and is
subject to the academic performance of the student. Students who
comply with the requirements will be invited to an interview.
d)
Selection is subject to approval by the director and available capacity in
the Centre of Excellence for Nutrition.
Additional requirements and faculty-specific rules
a)
The student should have obtained at least 60% in the Honours degree.
b)
Students with a four year BSc Dietetics degree should have obtained at
least 60% in all of the third year Nutrition modules as well as in the
research module.
c)
STTN111 (Descriptive statistics) or an equivalent module must be
passed.
d)
Preference will be given to fulltime students.
68
e)
G.1.13.11.3
Students to be registered for this programme must at the time of
registration submit proof of immunisation against Hepatitis A and B, being
administered during the previous 5 years.
Curriculums G851P and G875P
G.1.13.11.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
After completion of this curriculum the student will:
a)
be able to demonstrate knowledge and insight on the general scientific
method of research with attention to the specific research methodology in
Dietetics; and
b)
Be able to apply knowledge and competence to identify, analyse and
evaluate complicated problems in Dietetics, to solve it systematically and
creatively in an ethical way, to make theoretically grounded
pronunciations by using the acquired data and information, and to clearly
communicate results and conclusions to specialist and non-specialist
audiences, orally or in writing by using the relevant IT.
G.1.13.11.3.2 Compilation of the curriculums: Dietetics
A student may choose between a mini-dissertation and three modules
(G851P) or a dissertation (G875P).
Qualification-and programme code: 203 169; Curriculum code: G851P
Module code
Descriptive name
Compulsory module
VOED873
Mini-dissertation
Choice modules
VOED874*
Public Health Nutrition
VOED875*
Advanced Nutrition
VOED876*
Sport Nutrition
VOED880*
Nutrition support of the
paediatric patient
VOED882*
Nutrition support of the
critically ill
NUTE871*
Nutritional Epidemiology
Total credits for the curriculum
* Choice modules: any three modules must be chosen
Credits
96
32
32
32
32
32
32
192
Qualification-and programme code: 203 169; Curriculum code: G875P
Module code
Descriptive name
VOED871
Dissertation
Total credits for the curriculum
69
Credits
192
192
G.1.13.12
Programme: Physiology
Qualification code: 203 171 (F)
The aim of this qualification is the training of postgraduate students, enabling
them to function at a highly specialised level as researchers in the health
sciences.
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the general closing date
for applications is 31st October. Applications received after this date will be
considered on merit.
G.1.13.12.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
The student must be in possession of a relevant honours degree or
equivalent qualification.
b)
Selection and approval by a postgraduate selection committee is subject
to available capacity.
G.1.13.12.2
G.1.13.12.3
Additional requirements and faculty-specific rules
a)
An average mark of at least 60% in Physiology (or equivalent
qualification) at honours level is required.
b)
It is strongly recommended that the student should provide proof of
immunisation, at least against Hepatitis A and B.
c)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by the students.
d)
It is recommended that students should follow Pharmacology and
Therapy (FKLG211) as additional module to improve their knowledge with
regard to therapy.
Curriculum G855P: Physiology
G.1.13.12.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The qualified student will be equipped with advanced knowledge and skills to
identify a relevant research need within the field of Health Sciences of
cardiovascular physiology in particular plan and execute a suitable quantitative
and/or qualitative research design in a scientific ethical manner and utilize
suitable research methods, -techniques and –procedures in the approach;
interpret research results in a scientific accountable manner and compile a
research report on it.
G.1.13.12.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Physiology
Qualification and programme code: 203 171; Curriculum code: G855P
Module code
Descriptive name
FLGX871
Dissertation (Physiology)
Total credits for the curriculum
70
Credits
192
192
G.1.13.13
Programme: Clinical Psychology
Qualification code: 203 176 (F) (Clinical Psychology)
a)
The programme is professional in nature. In developing this curriculum,
requirements of the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA),
and national and regional needs were taken into consideration by
addressing them in the research focus area AUTHeR. In composing the
curriculum, consideration was given to career possibilities and manpower
needs of our country. This curriculum prepares the student for further
postgraduate studies in Psychology.
b)
The Clinical Psychology Programme gives an opportunity for specialised
and advanced training and is a prerequisite for registration as an intern
and eventually Clinical Psychologist at the Health Professions Council of
South Africa (HPCSA).
c)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 4 July where after a selection process will follow.
G.1.13.13.1
G.1.13.13.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An honours degree in Psychology or an applicable equivalent qualification
is required;
b)
A paper selection based on academic performance, relevant skills and
quality of refence reports will be conducted;
c)
A formal selection process based on an individual in-depth interview by a
panel of psychologists, a research assignment, evaluation of traits, skills
and potential by means of case studies and group work will be conducted;
d)
A final in-depth interview by a selection panel of internal and external
psychologists (departmental and internship representatives) will be
conducted.
e)
Final approval is subject to a specific research concept within the focus of
the subject group.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average of 65% during the honours degree is required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes. The
department is free to terminate a student‟s study if the academic,
behavioural and/or functioning record is unsatisfactory and/or poses a
threat to their own health or that of society.
c)
Academic excellence is at all times a priority. A participation mark will be
defined and determined for each module. A pass mark of 55% per module
and an examination sub-minimum of 50% per module are required.
Candidates will receive a second examination opportunity in a module,
only if a paper has been failed, and a maximum mark of 50% will be
allocated for such examination opportunity. If the 2 nd opportunity is failed
the entire year must be repeated. If more than one module are failed the
students fails the course.
71
d)
G.1.13.13.3
If the experiential progress is not as desired, the internship may be
extended.
Curriculum G801P: Clinical Psychology
This curriculum is phasing OUT and is only available to
pipeline students in 2015
G.1.13.13.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Clinical
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
G.1.13.13.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Clinical Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 203 176; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
PSYK872
PSYC878
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation
Psychopharmacology, Adult
Psychopathology and Neuropsychology
PSYC879
Child and Adolescent Pathology and
Therapy
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Interventions
PSYC881
Applied Psychological Interventions
PSYC882
Professional Aspects, Psycho Diagnostics
and Practical Work
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.13.4
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
Curriculum G802P: Clinical Psychology
This curriculum (G802P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.13.13.4.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Clinical
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
72
G.1.13.13.4.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Clinical Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 203 176; Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
PSYK872
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation in Clinical
Psychology
PSYC879
Child and Adolescent Pathology and
Therapy
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Interventions
PSYC884
Applied Psychology and Community
Interventions
PSYC883
Ethics, Psychodiagnostics and Practical work
PSYC885
Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and
advanced Psychopathology in Clinical
Psychology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.14
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
Programme: Counselling Psychology
Qualification code: 203 177 (Counselling Psychology)
a)
The programme is professional in nature. In developing this curriculum,
requirements of the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA),
and national and regional needs were taken into consideration by
addressing them in the research focus area AUTHeR. In composing the
curriculum, consideration was given to career possibilities and manpower
needs of our country. This curriculum prepares the student for further
postgraduate studies in Psychology.
b)
The Counselling Psychology programme gives an opportunity for
specialised and advanced training and is a prerequisite for registration as
an intern and eventually Counselling Psychologist at the Health
Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA).
c)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 4 July where after a selection process will follow.
G.1.13.14.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An honours degree in Psychology or an applicable equivalent qualification
is required;
b)
A paper selection based on academic performance, relevant skills and
quality of refence reports will be conducted;
c)
A formal selection process based on an individual in-depth interview by a
panel of psychologists, a research assignment, evaluation of traits, skills
and potential by means of case studies and group work will be conducted;
d)
A final in-depth interview by a selection panel of internal and external
psychologists (departmental and internship representatives) will be
conducted.
e)
Final approval is subject to a specific research concept within the focus of
the subject group.
73
G.1.13.14.2
G.1.13.14.3
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
An average of 65% during the honours degree is required.
b)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes. The
department is free to terminate a student‟s study if the academic,
behavioural and/or functioning record is unsatisfactory and/or poses a
threat to their own health or that of society.
c)
Academic excellence is at all times a priority. A participation mark will be
defined and determined for each module. A pass mark of 55% per module
and an examination sub-minimum of 50% per module are required.
Candidates will receive a second examination opportunity in a module,
only if a paper has been failed, and a maximum mark of 50% will be
allocated for such examination opportunity. If the 2 nd opportunity is failed
the entire year must be repeated. If more than one module are failed the
students fails the course.
d)
If the experiential progress is not as desired, the internship may be
extended.
Curriculum G801P: Counselling Psychology
This curriculum is phasing OUT and is only available to
pipeline students in 2015
G.1.13.14.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Counselling
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
G.1.13.14.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Counselling Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 203 177; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
PSYV872
PSYC878
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation
Psychopharmacology, Adult
Psychopathology and Neuro-psychology
PSYV879
Child and Adolescent Development,
Pathology and Therapy
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Interventions
PSYV881
Applied Counselling and Psychological
Interventions
PSYC882
Professional Aspects, Psycho Diagnostics
and Practical Work
Total credits for the curriculum
74
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
G.1.13.14.4
Curriculum G802P: Counselling Psychology
This curriculum (G802P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.13.14.4.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will comply with the requirements of the Health Professions
Council of South Africa (HPCSA) to register for an internship in Counselling
Psychology and will be equipped with specialised and advanced knowledge to
provide curative services, diagnose and prevent pathology, and promote biopsychosocial health as well as primary, secondary and tertiary welfare in
individuals, families, organisations and communities; particularly with those
people facing serious life challenges and relative serious forms of
psychopathology and psychological distress.
G.1.13.14.4.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Counselling Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 203 177; Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
PSYV872
Descriptive name
Research Theory and Dissertation in
Counselling Psychology
PSYV879
Child and Adolescent Development, Pathology
and Therapy
PSYV880
Theory of Psychological Interventions in
Counselling Psychology
PSYV885
Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and
advanced Psychopathology in Counselling
Psychology
PSYC884
Applied Psychology and Community
Interventions
PSYC883
Ethics, Psychodiagnostics and Practical work
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.13.15
Credits
100
20
20
20
20
20
200
Programme: Research Psychology
Qualification code: 203 165 (F) (Research Psychology)
a)
The programme is professional in nature. In developing this curriculum,
national and regional needs were taken into consideration by addressing
them in the research focus area AUTHeR. In composing the curriculum,
consideration was given to career possibilities and manpower needs of
our country. This curriculum prepares the student for further postgraduate
studies in Psychology.
b)
The Research Psychology Programme gives an opportunity for
specialised and advanced training and is a prerequisite for registration as
Psychologist at the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA).
c)
The programme is presented on a fulltime basis and the closing date for
applications is 30th September where after a selection process will follow.
G.1.13.15.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An Honours degree in Psychology is required with at least 65%.
75
G.1.13.15.2
b)
Passing of a paper-, academic- and personality screening at the
completion of the honours degree for admission to the professional
programme in Research Psychology;
c)
Students must submit an application for selection by 30th September. The
application should consist of the following: (a) a letter of motivation, (b)
complete CV, (c) complete academic record, (d) a two page proposal with
possible research topics.
d)
Students who comply with all the requirements will be invited for a
selection interview to determine their potential to benefit from the research
programme and will be requested to complete a research assignment.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes. The
department is free to terminate the studies if a student‟s academic,
behavioural, and/or function record is unsatisfactory and hold a danger to
him/her or the public.
b)
Academic excellence is always a prerequisite. A participation mark will be
defined and determined for each module. A pass mark of 55 % per
module and an examination sub-minimum of 50 % per module are
required. Candidates are only allowed a 2nd opportunity in one paper. If
the 2nd opportunity is failed the year must be repeated. Should more
papers be failed, the candidate fails the course.
c)
If the experiential progress is not as desired, the internship may be
extended.
G.1.13.15.3
Curriculum G801P: Research Psychology
G.1.13.15.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
After completing this curriculum, the student should:
a)
demonstrate advanced, systematic and specialist knowledge to undertake
research at individual, community and/or interdisciplinary level by applying
appropriate research methods and techniques to identify, analyse and
formulate complex research problem(s) in the domain of psychology;
b)
demonstrate advanced strategies to obtain, analyse and evaluate
applicable information for its relevance and validity;
c)
use applicable quantitative and/or qualitative research methods to provide
answers for research phenomena;
d)
interpret results in a scientific manner;
e)
integrate research findings and reflect on it critically;
f)
communicate the findings orally by means of applicable IT and by writing
it up in research reports; and
g)
Perform and communicate research in an ethical and scientific manner.
After the successful completion of the academic curriculum and an internship,
the student complies with the requirements of the Health Professions Council
76
of South Africa (HPCSA) and may register as a Research Psychologist, if the
student so desires.
G.1.13.15.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Research Psychology
Qualification-and programme code: 203 165; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
PSYC872
Dissertation
PSYC874
Critical Research Skills
PSYC875
Quantitative Research Methods
PSYC876
Qualitative Research Methods
PSYC877
Project management
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.14
Credits
116
16
16
16
16
180
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF PHARMACY
Research and training with the aim of obtaining this qualification in the Faculty
of Health Sciences are structured in the research niche area: Medicine Usage
in South Africa. (MUSA)
Apart from highly exceptional cases that should be approved by the Senate,
the research required for this qualification should be done within the niche area
Medicine Usage in South Africa.
The objective of the M Pharm degree is to train postgraduate students to be
capable of practising at a highly specialised level as specialised pharmacists
with the aim of rendering a comprehensive pharmaceutical service to the
people of South Africa.
G.1.14.1
Duration (Minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration for the study is one year and the maximum duration
two years, calculated from the date of the first registration for the particular
programme.
Although a maximum study period of two years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will have
extensive financial implications for the student.
G.1.14.2
Admission requirements of the qualification
Admission to this qualification is done according to the stipulations of the
General Rules of the University and Admission Policy as approved by the
Senate and Council in compliance with specific requirements as determined by
the faculty.
G.1.14.3
Programme: Pharmacy Practice
Qualification code: 803 104 (F + P) (Pharmacy Practice)
The programme consists of a research project in a research field within the
suitable research niche area and culminates in the writing of a dissertation. The
general closing date for applications is 31 October. Applications received after
this date will be considered on merit.
77
The programme is presented on a fulltime and part-time basis in Afrikaans and
English.
G.1.14.3.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A BPharm degree or an equivalent qualification approved by the Senate is
required;
b)
The academic record of a prospective fulltime student with no practise
experience will be evaluated during the selection process. For
prospective part-time students with practise experience, prior learning will
be taken into consideration.
c)
Final selection will take place after an interview with the candidate.
G.1.14.3.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
In the case of a three year BSc (Pharm) degree additional module work is
required as decided by the school director.
b)
Admission to a programme/curriculum can be refused if the standard of
proficiency that the student who wants to study further has reached
previously in the specific subject(s) does not comply with the
requirements of the programme/curriculum.
c)
Relevant experience in the field of the program/curriculum is a
requirement for the program/curriculum.
d)
It is expected of students to obtain a participation mark before „n
dissertation can be submitted for examination. The participation mark is
acquired through:
e)

Successfully completing the course on applied pharmaco-economics
and pharmaco-epidemiology;

completing a biostatistics course (if necessary, in cases where there
is no previous knowledge);

providing proof of proficiency in MS Word l and ll, Excell l and ll,
Powerpoint, and Access;

preparing and presenting three colloquiums over the two study
years:
1)
Colloquium 1: Literature study (presentation after 5 months of the
study);
2)
Colloquium 2: Planning of empirical study (presentation after
approximately 9 months of the study); and
3)
Colloquium 3: Complete research project (presentation in the 2nd
year of study).
A satisfactory behaviour and functioning record should be maintained on
a continual basis by all students in the professional programmes.
78
G.1.14.3.3
G.1.14.3.3.1
Curriculum G801P: Pharmacy Practice
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the programme the student should be able to:
G.1.14.3.3.2
a)
demonstrate advanced / comprehensive specialist knowledge and skills in
order to identify relevant research questions within the field of medicine
consumption;
b)
plan and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research
design in a scientific and ethical manner by making use of appropriate
research methods, techniques and procedures;
c)
interpret and integrate research results in a scientifically accountable
manner, and in a scientific and ethical way communicate - orally and in
writing - the necessary information in a research report; and
d)
Act as a leader, i.e. ethically and responsibly, in the pharmacists‟
profession as far as appropriate medicine consumption is concerned.
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmacy Practice
Qualification- and programme code: 803 104; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
FPHA872
Dissertation: Pharmacy Practice
FPHA811
Applied Pharmacoeconomics
FPHA812
Applied Pharmacoepidemiology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.14.4
Credits
148
16
16
180
Programme: Advanced Clinical Pharmacy
Qualification code: 803 105 (F + P)
Students in the Master of Pharmacy in Advanced Clinical Pharmacy
programmes are provided the opportunity to further their growth beyond entrylevel professional competence in patient-centred care, pharmacy management
services, and in leadership skills that can be applied in any position regardless
of the practice setting. It sets the basis for clinical research and adds the
competencies that contribute to working successfully in the health care
environment as a motivated and innovative pharmacist.
The course is offered on a two year mixed-mode basis. This programme
makes use of a variety of ways to enhance the students‟ clinical skills (e.g.
lectures, exercises, tutorials, workshops, presentations, e-Fundi, and guest
speakers). The programme is divided into four semesters (two study years).
The first two semesters are intended to broaden the students‟ knowledge of
subjects relating to the specialization through course work and involves
teaching modules that students are obliged to attend. The last two semesters
are devoted to clinical practice experience, a research project and the
completion of a research mini-dissertation (in the article format).
Applications close on the 31st July where after a selection process will follow
during August.
79
G.1.14.4.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
The applicant must have acquired a bachelor degree in Pharmacy
(BPharm).
b)
The selection process involves the evaluation of the applicant‟s curriculum
vitae, a portfolio providing evidence of appropriate clinical experience and
of sufficient associated competencies in pharmaceutical care
management as well as at least two letters of recommendation from a
work colleague or direct manager/supervisor.
c)
Any scientific articles published by the applicant and/or any protocol or
guideline developed by the applicant will be taken into consideration.
d)
Psychometric evaluation as well as written and personal interviews with
the programme co-ordinator and postgraduate advice counsel will be
conducted during the selection process.
e)
Selection is subject to capacity restrictions.
G.1.14.4.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
A current registration from the South African Pharmacy Board is required.
b)
Evidence of appropriate clinical experience and of sufficient associated
competencies in pharmaceutical care management must be provided.
c)
Demonstration of appropriate computer literacy is required to enrol for the
programme, either by successful completion of a computer literacy pretest, or by completing an approved short course in basic computer and
internet skills.
d)
The pass rate for each component in the curriculum is 60% excluding the
mini-dissertation with pass rate 50%.
e)
In the event of plagiarism, a mark of zero will be awarded.
f)
The research project undertaken is required to be of a standard for
publication.
G.1.14.4.3
G.1.14.4.3.1
Curriculum G801P: Advanced Clinical Pharmacy
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum, the student should be able to:
a)
Manage and improve the medication-use process by ensuring a quality
medication-use system.
b)
Provide evidence-based, patient-centred medication therapy management
within multidisciplinary health care teams.
c)
Exercise leadership and clinical practice management skills through
development, implementation, evaluation and provision of pharmaceutical
care plan.
80
G.1.14.4.3.2
d)
Provide advanced clinical services and practice-related evidence-based
information, education and training to diverse specialists.
e)
Utilize medical informatics and manage clinical audits of medicine
utilisation.
f)
Design, implement and justify clinical programmes (protocol and guideline
development as well as policies and procedures) to enhance the efficacy
of patient care.
g)
Perform clinical pharmacy research, critically analyse research reports,
report own research and apply research findings to specific clinical
settings.
Compilation of the curriculum: Advanced Clinical Pharmacy
Qualification- and programme code: 803 105; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
CLNP811
Descriptive name
Clinical Pharmacy, Social Pharmacy,
and Professional Practice
CLNP812
Clinical Epidemiology, Research
Methodology, Biostatistics, and
Evidence-based Medicine
CLNP821
Clinical Pharmacotherapeutics and
Therapeutic Outcomes Management II
CLNP813
Clinical Pharmacotherapeutics and
Therapeutic Outcomes Management I
CLNP814
Clinical Drug Toxicology, Drug Therapy
in Oncology and the Management of
Drug Abuse
CLNP873
Dissertation
Credit total for the curriculum
G.1.15
Credits
16
32
40
24
16
64
192
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF CONSUMER SCIENCES
The curricula for the master‟s degree or the framework within which the
curriculum may be compiled, is determined by the relevant school and/or
research entity.
This study may be conducted fulltime or part-time.
G.1.15.1
G.1.15.2
Duration (minimum and maximum)
a)
The minimum duration of study is one year. The maximum duration is
two years.
b)
Although a maximum study period of two year is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will
have extensive financial implications for the student.
Admission requirements of the qualification
A student who wishes to register for a Master‟s degree must have acquired an
honours degree or equivalent qualification in the applicable field as approved
by the Senate
81
G.1.15.3
Programme: Consumer Sciences
Qualification code: 836 100 (F + P) (Consumer Sciences)
The closing date for applications is 30 September.
G.1.15.3.1
Admission requirements for the programme
General admission requirements as per G.1.15.2 hold.
G.1.15.3.2
G.1.15.3.3
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
Admission is based on academic performance during previous studies.
b)
An average academic mark of 60% in the honours programme or
equivalent four year B Consumer Sciences programme is required.
c)
STTN111 (Descriptive statistics) or an equivalent statistics course/module
is required as a prerequisite, or an additional requirement in the case of
projects requiring quantitative methods and result calculations.
d)
The module, VVBG671, is a compulsory requirement for admission to the
programme.
e)
Students who do not comply with the admission requirements will be
allowed to write an admissions examination, which must be passed before
final selection.
f)
Students will only be admitted to the programme if sufficient capacity is
available.
Curriculum G880P and G881P: Consumer Sciences
In conjunction with the school director and supervisor, a student may choose
between either a curriculum consisting of a dissertation and one paper, or a
curriculum consisting of a mini-dissertation and two papers.
The choice module will be determined by the field of specialisation. If a student
doesn‟t have the necessary background on NQF-level 8, it must be updated to
the satisfaction of the School director before the student may proceed to the
research project.
G.1.15.3.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum the student should be able to:
a)
demonstrate by means of extensive and systematic knowledge bases of
consumer behaviour, in-depth and specific knowledge;
b)
demonstrate a coherent and critical understanding of consumer behaviour
theory and appropriate research methods, and also to recognise
techniques and technology and to apply it to a specific research problem
in a specific area;
c)
select complex and true-life problems and to approach them from an
ethical basis and solve such problems, to demonstrate with evidenceproven and theory-driven arguments and to evaluate critically the
specialised knowledge and skills within other academic environments,
and also to raise and vindicate them within a specific epistemology;
82
G.1.15.3.3.2
d)
master the application of applied research methods, techniques and
technology effectively within a specific specialisation field and
demonstrate the ability to execute a research project and accordingly
record the process in the form of a research report;
e)
show the ability to identify a complex research problem, and to analyse it
by systematically and creatively applying theory, literature and research
methods within the specialist area;
f)
illustrate advanced information searches and processing skills, to illustrate
the identification and critical analysis, synthesis and independent
evaluation of qualitative and/or quantitative data, and to be able to do
research on an area of specialisation under the leadership of a
supervisor; and
g)
Present and communicate the results of research on consumer behaviour
over the specialist area concerned effectively to experts in the area as
well as non-experts, by making use of appropriate professional and
academic resources, and also to submit a research report meeting the
standard set by the academic institution involved.
Compilation of the curriculums: Consumer Sciences
Qualification- and programme code: 836 100; Curriculum code: G880P
Module
code
Descriptive name
VERB871
Dissertation
Credits
184
184
Total credits for the curriculum
Qualification- and programme code: 836 100; Curriculum code: G881P
Module
code
Descriptive name
Prerequisite
modules
Credits
VERB873
Mini-dissertation
96
VERB876
Consumer Behaviour and
Research Methodology
40
Choice modules: Choose one of the following:
VGHB671
VGHB672
VGHB874
Advanced Consumer Resource
Management
48
VKLE874
Advanced Textiles
VKLE671
48
VKLE878
Specialised Fashion Industry
48
VVDL874
Advanced Food
VKLE672
VVDL672
VGHB673
48
VVDL673
Total credits for the curriculum
184
Note: VERB876 consists of Consumer Behaviour (24 credits) and Research
Methodology (16 credits).
83
G.1.16
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK
The curricula for the Master‟s degree or the framework within which the
curricula may be compiled, is determined by the relevant school and/or
research entity.
Research and training with the aim of obtaining this qualification in the Faculty
of Health Sciences are structured within the research entity AUTHeR.
Research and training in Social Work take place under the guidance of the
research director, assisted by the director of the School of Psychosocial
Behavioural Sciences and personnel of the subject group Social Work.
Apart from highly exceptional cases that have to be approved by the Senate,
the research required for this qualification should be done within the research
entity AUTHeR.
Studies in the Master‟s degree can be done fulltime or part-time.
G.1.16.1
G.1.16.2
G.1.16.3
G.1.16.4
Duration (minimum and maximum)
a)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum
duration is two years, calculated from the date of first registration for the
specific programme.
b)
Although a maximum study period of two years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will
have extensive financial implications for the student.
Admission requirements of the qualification
a)
A four year Bachelor‟s degree in Social Work.
b)
Students enrolling for this programme must provide proof of registration
as Social Worker as required by the Act on Social Service Professions
1978 (Act 110 of 1978).
Social Work Curriculums
a)
The student has a choice between four curricula which consist of a
dissertation or one of three structured courses.
b)
The dissertation option is aimed for students who want to do research on
a topic of their own choice within the focus area of the subject group
Social Work and the Faculty of Health Sciences.
c)
The structured curricula are meant for students who want to extend their
knowledge base and skills in Social Work on a broad base to practise at
an advanced level, or who want to specialise in Social Work in Forensic
Practice or Child Protection or Play Therapy.
Collective outcomes of the Social Work programmes
The student will be proficient in:
a)
the utilisation of the ecosystem approach in research and the solution of a
variety of social problems and needs;
b)
the responsible and effective organisation and management of the self,
his/her activities and his/her services;
84
G.1.16.5
c)
effective communication where visual, mathematical and language skills
are required within the sphere of Social Work research and services;
d)
the effective and critical utilisation of science and technology; and
e)
Making a contribution to the full development of himself/herself and the
social and economic development of the community as a whole.
Programme: Social Work
Qualification code: 113 104 (F + P) (Social Work)
Completion of this qualification allows students access for admission to
doctoral study.
Closing date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.16.5.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year Bachelor‟s degree in Social Work is required.
b)
Students enrolling for this qualification could be asked to write an
admissions examination, for which certain material must be prepared.
c)
An in-depth discussion focussing on certain criteria which can be related
to the general standards for postgraduate students will be conducted with
each prospective student.
d)
Selection takes place from the 1st of October.
G.1.16.5.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
It may be expected of prospective students to write a Test for Academic
Literacy for Postgraduate students.
b)
Students enrolling for this programme must provide proof of registration
as Social Worker as required by the Act on Social Service Professions
1978 (Act 110 of 1978)
G.1.16.5.3
G.1.16.5.3.1
Curriculum G801P: Social Work
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the dissertation the student should be proficient to:
a)
identify a research problem in social work which is in accordance with the
research niche areas for the School of Psychosocial Behavioural
Sciences;
b)
formulate and apply a research design and procedures;
c)
reproduce the research results in the form of a dissertation of high quality;
and
d)
Collaborate effectively with fellow-researchers and research teams,
respondents, organisations and communities in the research process.
85
G.1.16.5.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Social Work
Qualification- and programme code: 113 104; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
MSWR871
Dissertation: Social Work
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.16.6
Credits
180
180
Programme: Child Protection
Qualification code: 113 108 (F + P) (Child Protection)
Completion of this qualification allows students access for admission to
doctoral study.
Closing date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.16.6.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year Bachelor‟s degree in Social Work is required.
b)
An in-depth discussion focussing on certain criteria which can be related
to the general standards for postgraduate students will be conducted with
each prospective student.
c)
It is expected from students enrolling for this qualification to write an
admissions examination, for which specific material must be prepared.
d)
It is expected of prospective students to write a Test for Academic
Literacy for postgraduate students.
e)
Admission will be subject to previous learning and academic performance
as well as experience in the field.
G.1.16.6.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
G.1.16.6.2.1
Students enrolling for this programme must provide proof of registration
as Social Worker as required by the Act on Social Service Professions
1978 (Act 110 of 1978).
Curriculum G801P: Child Protection
This curriculum (G801P) is phasing OUT and is only
available for pipeline students in 2015.
G.1.16.6.2.2
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum, students should be able to:
a)
apply extensive and systematic specialist knowledge on the South African
child protection system and field, as well as on different forms of
alternative care of children in an ethically accountable manner at macro,
meso and micro level in order to protect and empower children;
b)
demonstrate the ability to apply advanced information-gathering and
information-processing strategies, as well as critical analysis, synthesis
and evaluation in order to debate solutions to complex and real-life
86
problems in the field of child protection, and to support this by means of
appropriate theories and principles;
G.1.16.6.2.3
c)
identify complex, unknown and real-life problems in the field of child
protection, and investigate with the aid of appropriate research methods,
techniques and procedures, and present evidence-based, theory-driven
solutions in the form of a supervised mini research dissertation; and
d)
Plan, implement and evaluate appropriate interventions at micro, meso
and macro level.
Compilation of the curriculum: Child Protection
Qualification- and programme code: 113 108; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
MWKK873
MWKK874
MWKK875
MWKK876
Descriptive name
Mini-dissertation
Child protection as field of service
Children as a vulnerable group
Social work intervention in the field
of child protection
MWKK877
Substitute care in South Africa
MWKF880
Research Theory
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.16.6.2.4
Credits
60
20
20
24
24
32
180
Curriculum G803P: Child Protection
This curriculum (G803P) is phasing IN from 2015.
G.1.16.6.2.5
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum, students should be able to:
a)
apply extensive and systematic specialist knowledge on the South African
child protection system and field, as well as on different forms of
alternative care of children in an ethically accountable manner at macro,
meso and micro level in order to protect and empower children;
b)
demonstrate the ability to apply advanced information-gathering and
information-processing strategies, as well as critical analysis, synthesis
and evaluation in order to debate solutions to complex and real-life
problems in the field of child protection, and to support this by means of
appropriate theories and principles;
c)
identify complex, unknown and real-life problems in the field of child
protection, and investigate with the aid of appropriate research methods,
techniques and procedures, and present evidence-based, theory-driven
solutions in the form of a supervised mini research dissertation; and
d)
Plan, implement and evaluate appropriate interventions at micro, meso
and macro level.
87
G.1.16.6.2.6
Compilation of the curriculum: Child Protection
Qualification- and programme code: 113 108; Curriculum code: G803P
Module code
Descriptive name
First semester
MWKF880
Research Theory
MWKK874
Child protection as field of service
MWKK875
Children as a vulnerable group
Second semester
MWKK873
Mini-dissertation
MWKC874
Alternative care
MWKC875
Adoption
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.16.6.2.7
Credits
32
20
20
60
20
28
180
Curriculum G802P: Play Therapy
This curriculum (G802P) is phasing OUT and no new
students will be taken in for 2015.
Qualification code: 113 108 (Play Therapy)
G.1.16.6.2.8
G.1.16.6.2.9
Admission and selection requirements of the curriculum (Play Therapy)
a)
A four year Bachelor‟s degree in Social Work or equivalent qualification as
approved by Senate is required
b)
Assessment takes place during a personal interview conducted with
candidates;
c)
Reference letters from referents chosen by the candidate will be
considered;
d)
Completion of psychometric tests; and
e)
Considering the candidate‟s experience in the field.
f)
It is highly recommended that students enrolling for this programme must
submit proof of immunisation against Hepatitis B.
Curriculum outcome
After completion of this curriculum, the student should be able to:
a)
Demonstrate extensive and systematic specialist knowledge,
understanding and skill regarding relevant theories, techniques and media
true to the field of Play Therapy with children and be able to apply it
ethically and culturally sensitively on micro-, meso- and macro levels
when developing helping strategies and interventions as well as
assessment and reporting in relevant report formats;
b)
Demonstrate the ability to obtain, analyse, synthesize and evaluate
information about the child in his/her psychosocial context;
c)
Utilize advanced research skills in order to identify complex and real-life
problems in the psycho-social context of the child within the field of Play
Therapy and to collect appropriate data, analyse such data critically, to
integrate and to report findings and solutions in writing with the guidance
88
of a study supervisor in the form of a dissertation so that it complies with
the format prescribed by NWU;
d)
Demonstrate skill in working within a group setting with professional
colleagues towards the identification and dealing with problems regarding
the child within his/her psychosocial context and to use information
technology to report to such colleagues.
G.1.16.6.2.10 Composition of the curriculum: Play Therapy
Qualification and program code: 113 108 Curriculum code: G802P
Module code
MWKS873
MWKS811
Descriptive name
Mini-dissertation
Basic principles, theories and philosophy of
Gestalt Play Therapy
MWKS875
The therapeutically relationship and process
in Gestalt Play Therapy
MWKS821
Gestalt Play Therapy: Advanced
intervention
MWKS877
Practice-based utilisation of Gestalt Play
Therapy
MWKF880
Social Work Research: Theory
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.16.7
Credits
60
20
20
16
32
32
180
Programme: Forensic Practice
Qualification code: 113 109 (F + P) (Forensic Practice)
Completion of this qualification allows students access for admission to
doctoral study.
Closing date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.16.7.1
G.1.16.7.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year Bachelor‟s degree in Social Work or equivalent qualification as
approved by Senate is required.
b)
An in-depth discussion focussing on certain criteria which can be related
to the general standards for postgraduate students as well as the forensic
field of social work, will be conducted with each prospective student.
c)
Prospective students will be required to pass a psychometric test during
the selection process.
d)
Previous learning and academic performance as well as experience in the
field will be considered.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
Students enrolling for this programme must provide proof of registration as
Social Worker as required by the Act on Social Service Professions 1978 (Act
110 of 1978).
89
G.1.16.7.2.1
Curriculum G801P: Forensic Practice
G.1.16.7.2.2
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the programme students must be able to:
G.1.16.7.2.3
a)
manage and carry through a full forensic investigation process on the
basis of comprehensive theoretical knowledge, which includes the
evaluation of children in traumatic real-life situations, as well as the
planning of interventions in the process of guidance;
b)
apply his/her knowledge of the applicable legislation correctly and to act
ethically and correctly as an expert in court with regard to sexual abuse;
and
c)
Undertake a practice-related research project on the basis of appropriate
techniques and methods and report on the matter in the form of an article.
Compilation of the curriculum: Forensic Practice
Qualification- and programme code: 113 109; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
MWKF873
Descriptive name
Research Paper
(Semesters 1 en 2)
MWKF876
General Child Assessment
(Semester 1)
MWKF877
Sexual Abuse and Physical
Battering (Semester 1)
MWKF878
Trauma Assessment and
Investigation Process
(Semester 2)
MWKF879
Report Writing and the Social
Worker as Expert in Court
(Semester 2)
MWKF880
Research Theory
(Semesters 1 en 2)
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.16.8
Credits
60
24
24
24
24
32
188
Programme: Play Therapy
Qualification code: 113 110 (V + D)
The major goal for student intake is therefore to provide a comprehensive basis
of professionals working with children through-out Southern Africa. Through
the training the nature, scope, extent and level of professional services, which
will form the basis for the development of appropriate norms and standards for
service delivery, will be addressed.
G.1.16.8.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A four year Bachelor‟s degree in Social Work or equivalent qualification as
approved by Senate is required.
b)
Assessment takes place during a personal interview conducted with
candidates.
90
c)
Completion of psychometric tests; and
d)
Consideration of the candidate‟s experience in the field.
G.1.16.8.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
Students enrolling for this programme must provide proof of registration
as Social Worker as required by the Act on Social Service Professions
1978 (Act 110 of 1978)
b)
It is highly recommended that students enrolling for this programme must
submit proof of immunisation against Hepatitis B.
G.1.16.8.2.1
Curriculum G801P: Play Therapy
G.1.16.8.2.2
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of this curriculum, the student should be able to:
G.1.16.8.2.3
a)
Demonstrate extensive and systematic specialist knowledge,
understanding and skill regarding relevant theories, techniques and media
true to the field of Play Therapy with children and be able to apply it
ethically and culturally sensitively on micro-, meso- and macro levels
when developing helping strategies and interventions as well as
assessment and reporting in relevant report formats;
b)
Demonstrate the ability to obtain, analyse, synthesize and evaluate
information about the child in his/her psychosocial context;
c)
Utilize advanced research skills in order to identify complex and real-life
problems in the psycho-social context of the child within the field of Play
Therapy and to collect appropriate data, analyse such data critically, to
integrate and to report findings and solutions in writing with the guidance
of a study supervisor in the form of a dissertation so that it complies with
the prescribed format;
d)
Demonstrate skill in working within a group setting with professional
colleagues towards the identification and dealing with problems regarding
the child within his/her psychosocial context and to use information
technology to report to such colleagues.
Compilation of the curriculum: Play Therapy
Qualification- and programme code: 113 110; Curriculum code: G801P
Module code
MWKP873
MWKP811
Descriptive name
Mini dissertation
Basic principles, theories and philosophy
of play therapy
MWKP812
The child as client
MWKP813
Play therapy intervention with children
MWKP821
Community based play therapy
intervention
MWKP880
Research theory and community
engagement
Credit total for the curriculum
91
Credits
60
22
22
22
22
32
180
G.1.17
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF NURSING SCIENCE
Research and training with the aim of obtaining this qualification in the Faculty
of Health Sciences are structured in the School of Nursing Sciences and the
research focus area INSINQ (Quality in Nursing and Midwifery).
Research and training in the various programmes indicated below take place
under the guidance of the Director of the research focus area INSINQ (Quality
in Nursing and Midwifery), whilst lectured modules are managed by the School
of Nursing Sciences and the staff of the different subject groups.
The research that is required for this qualification could be done within the
research entity.
The following curricula may be chosen: Health Service Management; Health
Science Education; Professional Nursing; Community Nursing; Psychiatric
Community Nursing; Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing; and Nursing depending
on availability of study supervisors.
The Master‟s degree can be conducted on a fulltime and part-time basis.
G.1.17.1
G.1.17.2
Duration (minimum and maximum)
a)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum
duration two years, calculated from the date of the first registration for
the specific programme.
b)
Although a maximum study period of two years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will
have extensive financial implications for the student.
Admission requirements of the qualification
A four year Bachelors qualification in Nursing Science or any other equivalent
qualification approved by the Senate is required. Specific admission
requirements for the particular curriculums in this programme are mentioned
below.
G.1.17.3
Collective outcomes
After completion of the qualification, the specialist nursing professional should
be able to:

demonstrate specialist knowledge to enable engagement with and critique
of current research or practices as well as focused research in the fields
of nursing and/or health science;

evaluate current processes of knowledge production and choose an
appropriate process of enquiry for the area of study or practice;

process a command of and ability to design, select and apply appropriate
and creative research methods, techniques, processes or technologies to
research problems in the fields of nursing and/or health science;

to use a range of research skills in identifying, conceptualising, designing
and implementing methods of enquiry to address complex and
challenging problems in the fields of nursing and/or health science;
92
G.1.17.4

to make autonomous ethical decisions which affect research, and an
ability to critically contribute to the development of ethical standards in the
context of nursing and/or health science;

to design and implement a strategy for the processing and management
of information, in order to conduct a comprehensive review of leading and
current research to produce significant insights;

to use the resources of academic and professional or occupational
discourses to communicate and defend substantial ideas that are the
products of research or development in nursing and/or health science;
and use a range of advanced and specialised skills and discourses
appropriate to a field, discipline or practice,

to communicate to a range of audiences with different levels of knowledge
or expertise;

to develop his or her own learning strategies which sustain independent
learning and academic or professional development, and can interact
effectively within the learning or professional group as a means of
enhancing learning; and

To operate independently and take full responsibility for his or her own
work, and, where appropriate, to account for leading and initiating
processes and implementing systems, ensuring good resource
management and governance practices.
Programme: Research Master’s degree (Dissertation)
Qualification Code: 833 100 (F + P)
The qualified student should be able to practise as a leader and independent
practitioner together with other multi-disciplinary team members within the
health care system. As leader, he/she should be able to practise professional,
comprehensive, high-quality; scientifically founded nursing this health care
should be able to supply the needs of the time, the province, the country and
the person. Health care at this level is characterized /driven by service delivery,
involvement in policy development. The masters prepared professional
demonstrates leadership, continues professional development and lifelong
learning. He/she role models scholarship in health and mentors others.
This programme includes the curricula for Community Nursing, Health Service
Management, Health Science Education, Professional Nursing and Nursing.
Closing date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.17.4.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
Students should provide proof that he/she has already obtained a first
bachelor‟s degree or equivalent qualification1.
G.1.17.4.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
Students, who want to practise as a nurse in South Africa, should provide
proof of registration as a nurse at the South African Nursing Council.
93
b)
To be admitted to any of the programmes/curricula, a student should
have obtained at least 60% in the research methodology module of the
B degree or equivalent qualification.
c)
The selection process will take place from the 1st of October. The director
of INSINQ and experts of the particular study field/programme will select
candidates based on documents presented with application, an essay for
evaluation of the candidate‟s writing and arguing skills and other
procedures as necessary;
d)
Successful completion of Research Methodology (VPKN874) with at least
60% and presentation of an acceptable research proposal are required to
progress to the second study year. The studies of students who do not
comply with the criteria may be terminated.
Further stipulations in the specified curriculum:
a) Community Nursing
A student who wishes to specialise in Community Nursing should have a
Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Sciene with Community Nursing as major. If the
Bachelor‟s degree did not include the specified major, an additional
qualification in Community Nursing is required.
b) Health Services Management
A student who wishes to specialise in Health Services Management should
have a Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Sciene with Health Services Management
as major. If the Bachelor‟s degree did not include the specified major, an
additional qualification in Health Services Management is required.
c) Health Sciences Education
A student who wishes to specialise in Health Sciences Education should have
a Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Sciene with Health Sciences Education as
major. If the Bachelor‟s degree did not include the specified major, an
additional qualification in Health Sciences Education is required.
d) Professional Nursing
A student who wishes to specialise in Professional Nursing should have a
Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Science
e) Nursing
A student registering for this curriculum should have a Bachelor‟s degree in
Nursing Science.
G.1.17.4.3
G.1.17.4.3.1
Curriculum G830P: Community Nursing
Curriculum outcomes
After completing the curriculum, the student should be able to facilitate the
quality of life of the person, family and/or the community by conducting
research that contributes to scientifically grounded practice namely promoting,
maintaining and restoring health within a community-centred, cultural sensitive
approach.
94
G.1.17.4.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Community Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G830P
Module code
VPGV872
VPKN874
Descriptive name
Dissertation: Community
Nursing
Research methodology
Credits
152
32
184
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.17.4.4
G.1.17.4.4.1
Curriculum G831P: Health Service Management
Curriculum outcomes
After completing the curriculum, the student should be able to manage health
services in a community-centred, culture sensitive way with the objective to
facilitate the person‟s, family‟s and/or community‟s health.
G.1.17.4.4.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Health Service Management
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G831P
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
Dissertation:
Health
Services
152
VPBV872
Management
Research methodology
32
VPKN874
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.17.4.5
G.1.17.4.5.1
184
Curriculum: G832P: Health Science Education
Curriculum outcomes
After completing the curriculum, the student should be able to facilitate the
quality of life of the person, family and/or community in a community-centred,
culture sensitive way through health science education.
G.1.17.4.5.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Health Science Education
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G832P
Module code
Descriptive name
VPKN874
Research methodology
VPOV872
Dissertation: Health
Sciences Education
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.17.4.6
G.1.17.4.6.1
Credits
32
152
184
Curriculum G833P: Professional Nursing
Curriculum outcomes
After completing the curriculum, the student should be able to facilitate the
quality of life of the patient by promoting, maintaining and restoring health in a
community-centred, culture sensitive approach.
95
G.1.17.4.6.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Professional Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G833P
Module code
Descriptive name
VPKN874
Research methodology
Credits
32
VPKV872
Dissertation: Professional Nursing
152
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.17.4.7
G.1.17.4.7.1
184
Curriculum G836P: Nursing
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum, the student should be able to facilitate
quality of life of the patient by promoting, maintaining and restoring health
within a community-centred, culture sensitive approach.
G.1.17.4.7.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G836P
Module code
Descriptive name
VPKN874
Research methodology
VPVV872
Dissertation: Nursing
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.17.5
Credits
32
152
184
Programme: Structured Master’s Degree (Mini-dissertation)
Qualification code: 833 100 (F + P)
After completing the degree as a nursing specialist, a student can apply for
registration as an advanced nurse at the South African Nursing Council.
He/she should be able to practise effectively as a leader, researcher and
independent practitioner together with other multi-disciplinary team members
within the health care system. As a leader, he/she should be able to conduct
research and practise professional, comprehensive, high-quality, scientifically
founded Nursing Science. Nursing at this level should be able to supply in the
needs of the time, the province, the country and the person. It will be directed
at service, care and culture sensitivity and will be based on the primary health
approach. The nursing specialist should be in continual pursuit of personal and
professional growth and health and also facilitate the patient‟s pursuit of health.
This programme includes Psychiatric Community Nursing, as well as Midwifery
and Neonatal Nursing. Prospective students will be subject to a selection
process and availability of capacity in the subject field. (Note: The curriculum
in Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Science will not be presented in 2015.)
Closing date for applications is 30th September.
G.1.17.5.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Students should provide proof that they have obtained a three or four year
bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Science or equivalent qualification1.
96
G.1.17.5.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
If a student wants to practise as a nurse in South Africa, he/she should
provide proof of registration as a nurse at the South African Nursing
Council at the beginning of every study year;
b)
To specialise in any of the Nursing programmes/curricula, the student
should supply proof of a special registration at the South African Nursing
Council or of an equivalent registration if the student is not a South
African citizen2;
c)
To be admitted to any of the programmes/curricula, a student should
have obtained at least 60% in the research methodology module and
relevant clinical specialization of bachelor‟s degree or equivalent
qualification.
d)
The selection process will take place from the 1st of October. The school
director, the director of INSINQ and experts of the particular study
field/programme will select candidates based on documents presented
with application; an essay for evaluation of the candidate‟s writing and
arguing skills and other procedures as necessary.
e)
Successful completion of Research Methodology (VPKN874) with at least
60% and the presentation of an acceptable research proposal are
required for progress to the second study year. The studies of students
who do not comply with the criteria may be terminated.
Further stipulations in the specified curriculum:
a) Psychiatric Community Nursing
A student who wishes to specialise in Psychiatric Community Nursing should
have a four year Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing with Psychiatric Community
Nursing as a major, or a three year Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Science and
a diploma in Psychiatric Community Nursing. The candidate should have
obtained at least 60% in the final module of psychiatric nursing science in the
Bachelor‟s degree or equivalent. Apart from the mentioned academic selection,
the candidate will also undergo a further selection process which takes place
from the 1st of November.
b)
Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing
The curriculum will not be presented in 2015
A student who wishes to specialise in Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing should
have a four-year Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Science with Midwifery and
Neonatal Nursing as a major, or a three-year Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing
Science and a Diploma in Midwifery.
G.1.17.5.3
G.1.17.5.3.1
Curriculum G834P: Psychiatric Community Nursing
Curriculum outcomes
The student should be able to apply to register as a nursing specialist in
Psychiatric Community Nursing by the South African Nursing Council. He/she
should be able to:
a)
Conduct research,
b)
facilitate the promotion, maintenance and restoring of mental health;
97
c)
demonstrate critical-analytical, problem-solving mental skills, as well as
apply ethical principles in the nursing practice;
d)
integrate professional and personal values and norms in ethical-legal
practising of Psychiatric Community Nursing;
e)
gather, analyse and evaluate mental health information critically;
f)
show awareness regarding the importance of effective learning strategies,
responsible citizenship, culture sensitivity, teaching, occupational matters
and entrepreneurial capabilities in Psychiatric Community Nursing;
g)
organise and manage effectively himself/herself and activities in Mental
Health;
h)
facilitate psychiatric health care as a specialist researcher, practitioner,
leader therapist, consultant and companion;
i)
apply intra- and interpersonal skills in the handling of stress and conflict to
facilitate his/her own pursuit of wholeness, as well as that of others;
j)
work as an independent practitioner, leader and consultant together with
other disciplines within the health care system and the community health
services in order to promote, maintain and restore mental health, and to
promote an effective lifestyle;
k)
apply advanced scientific principles regarding Psychiatric Community –
Nursing;
l)
act as a health service facilitator to render quality Psychiatric Community
Nursing;
m)
utilise and bring about reference sources or mobilise them by means of
the development of networks;
n)
create and/or use teaching opportunities to facilitate and optimise mental
health;
o)
contribute significantly to the formulation of mental health policies in
Nursing;
p)
maintain professional excellence and capability by continual learning; and
q)
Use science and technology effectively and critically, showing
responsibility regarding the environment and the health of others.
98
G.1.17.5.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Psychiatric Community Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G834P
Module code
Descriptive name
VPEK874
Clinical Psychiatric Community Nursing
32
VPEK875
Psychiatric Community Nursing Skills
and Methods
32
VPEK876
Psychiatric Community Nursing Practice,
Leadership and Consultation
32
VPEP884
Psychiatric Community Nursing Practice
48
VPES873
Mini-dissertation: Psychiatric Community
Nursing
112
VPKN874
Research Methodology
32
288
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.17.5.4
Credits
Curriculum G835P: Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing
Prospective students will be subject to a selection process and availability of
capacity in the subject field.
The curriculum in Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Science
will not be presented in 2015
G.1.17.5.4.1
Curriculum outcomes
The qualified student may register as an advanced nurse in Midwifery and
Neonatal Nursing Science at the South African Nursing Council. After
completing the curriculum, he/she should be able to:
a)
facilitate the promotion, maintenance and restoring of the health of the
mother and child;
b)
demonstrate critical-analytical, problem-solving mental skills, as well as
apply ethical principles during the practise of Midwifery and Neonatal
Nursing;
c)
integrate professional and personal values and norms in the ethical-legal
practising of Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing;
d)
analyse, organise and evaluate health information regarding the mother
and child critically;
e)
show awareness regarding the importance of effective learning strategies,
responsible citizenship, culture sensitivity, teaching, occupational matters
and entrepreneurial capabilities in Midwifery and Neonatological Nursing;
f)
organise and manage herself/himself and activities effectively in mother
and child care;
g)
facilitate Midwifery and Neonatal Health care as a specialist practitioner,
leader, researcher and consultant;
h)
apply intra- and interpersonal skills in the handling of stress and conflict to
facilitate his/her own pursuit of wholeness, as well as that of others;
i)
collaborate as an independent practitioner, leader and consultant with
other disciplines within the health care system and the community health
99
service for promoting, maintaining and restoring the health of the mother
and child;
G.1.17.5.4.2
j)
act as a health care facilitator for rendering quality Midwifery and
Neonatal Nursing;
k)
create and/or use teaching opportunities to facilitate and optimise the
health of the mother and child;
l)
develop and implement standards for quality assurance;
m)
bring about, utilise and mobilise reference sources for the development of
networks;
n)
facilitate personal and professional development;
o)
contribute significantly to the formulation of policies regarding the mother
and child, as well as the development of Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing;
p)
maintain professional excellence and capability by continual learning; and
q)
Use science and technology effectively and critically, showing
responsibility regarding the environment and the health of others.
Compilation of the curriculum: Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 833 100; Curriculum code: G835P
Module code
Descriptive name
VPKN874
Research Methodology
32
VPVK874
The Specialist Midwife as Practitioner,
Leader and Consultant
16
VPVK875
The Specialist Midwife as Clinician in
Ante-, Intra- and Postpartum Context
32
VPVK876
The Specialist Midwife as Clinician in the
Neonatal Context
16
VPVP884
Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Science
Practice
48
VPVS873
Mini-dissertation: Midwifery and
Neonatal Nursing Science
112
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
256
¹ An equivalent qualification may include the following:
a)
A four-year diploma in Nursing Science that leads to registration as a nurse
(General, Psychiatric, Community) and Midwife and an advanced university
diploma, e.g. in Health Science Education or Health Service Management.
² If the student is not a South African citizen or if there is uncertainty about
his/her qualification, the following procedure should be followed to apply for
admission:
a)
It may be expected from the student to subject his/her qualifications for
evaluation to the South African Qualification Authority (SAQA).
If SAQA determines that the qualifications of the student are equal or equivalent to
those stated above, the school reserves the right to advise the student to obtain a
bachelor‟s degree or a master‟s degree (whichever is applicable) first to get
provisional selection (dependent on successful completion of Research
Methodology [VPKN874] and the successful completion of the research proposal).
100
G.1.18
RULES FOR THE DEGREE MASTER OF HEALTH SCIENCES IN
TRANSDISCIPLINARY HEALTH PROMOTION
Qualification code: 862 100
This qualification affords health professionals access to doctoral studies,
subsequently increasing the candidate pool for leadership in health. The
programme will offer candidates from various disciplines articulation on
different levels (both horizontal and vertical) along the teaching-learningresearch–practice continuum with possibilities to articulate towards
transdisciplinary research. Researchers from different backgrounds
(disciplines/scientific fields) will get the opportunity to transcend disciplined
focused conceptual, theoretical and methodological frameworks, share their
ideas and results, and thus enhance their knowledge in order to understand
health and alleviate health problems, resulting in an improved quality of life.
This degree is presented fulltime or part-time via contact learning with a
blended learning environment approach, including two theoretical modules as
well as a research dissertation via contact and on-line delivery.
The general closing date for applications are 30th September and applications
received after this date will be selected on merit.
G.1.18.1
Duration (minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration of the study is one year and the maximum duration
two years, calculated from the date of first registration for the specific
programme.
Although a maximum study period of two years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional third study year must note that it will have
extensive financial implications for the student
G.1.18.2
Admission requirements of the qualification
a)
A relevant four-year professional bachelor degree in Health Sciences, or a
relevant three-year and honours degree in Health Sciences or a healthrelated discipline, including biology, demography, economics,
epidemiology, gerontology, the human sciences, medicine, nutrition,
psychiatry, psychology, public health, social policy, nursing and sociology.
b)
Paper selection criteria such as academic achievement (a final mark of
60% Applies for the previous qualification) and relevant experience.
c)
Successful completion of a quality scientifically written essay according to
specific guidelines.
d)
A formal individual in-depth interview by a selection panel of researchers.
e)
Selection by a selection committee takes effect on October 1 and is
subject to the academic performance of the student, and available
capacity in the subject field. Students who meet the requirements will be
invited to an interview.
f)
Selection is subject to approval by the research director.
g)
Access to and skills in computer technology as this qualification will be
delivered via a blended mode and many of the materials and activities will
have to be completed on-line.
101
G.1.18.2.1
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
G.1.18.3
Apart from the formal requirements, related to university admission,
candidates who want to enrol for the masters of Health Sciences in
Transdisciplinary Health Promotion must:
-
demonstrate the information-gathering, analysis and presentation
skills required for study at exit level 8 on the NQF;
-
demonstrate understanding of and the ability to communicate
accurately and comprehensively in the required medium of instruction;
-
take responsibility for their own learning and its progress within a
structured learning environment;
-
demonstrate the
performance;
-
Have adequate basic knowledge of the discipline he/she represents to
be able to argue the contribution of that discipline in a transdisciplinary
team.
-
Have a final mark of 60% applies for the previous qualification.
ability
to
monitor
and
evaluate
their
own
b)
Students apply directly to the NWU for admission.
c)
Validity of admission and selection criteria is overseen by the Faculty of
Health Sciences and the Campus Senate of the Potchefstroom campus.
d)
Students from foreign countries are requested to have their degrees
validated by SAQA before admission.
Programme: Transdisciplinary Health Promotion
Qualification- and programme code 862 100 (F+P) (Transdisciplinary
Health Promotion)
The programme will enable health-care professionals from various disciplines
to assist communities in increasing control over and improvement of their own
health. The health-care professionals will be able to act as leaders,
consultants, educators, specialist practitioners and researchers in
transdisciplinary health promotion.
The programme consists of two (2) compulsory theoretical core modules (16
credits each) providing the necessary grounding for the third module (148
credits) in applied transdiciplinary health research. The three modules are
completed in the same year for fulltime studies or in two years for part-time
students.
Progression rules: Should a theoretical module be failed a second chance will
be afforded. In the case of the dissertation the assessment and moderation
policy and faculty rules of the university apply.
G.1.18.3.1
Curriculum: Transdisciplinary Health Promotion: G801P
The curriculum in this program is of an academic nature. Health-care
professionals who are credited with this qualification will be able to function
with advanced intellectual and practical competencies in complex and illdefined areas of health, focusing on a transdisciplinary team approach of
health promotion across the total life span. The programme aims at advancing
102
existing professional skills and developing research skills, but does not lead to
an additional professional qualification.
G.1.18.3.1.1
Curriculum outcomes
Transdisciplinary Health Promotion: G801P
After completion of this module the student should be able to have:
a)
advanced, systematic and specialist knowledge, understanding and skills to
undertake research on individual, community and/or interdisciplinary level by
applying appropriate research methods and techniques to identify, analyse and
formulate complex real-world research problem(s) in the domain of
transdisciplinary health promotion, and to communicate and defend, orally and
in writing, substantial ideas;
b)
knowledge and critical understanding of international and national population
trends and community needs, with special focus on health promotion, both
globally and in South Africa;
c)
the competency to undertake a critical and relevant literature survey, to apply
theories and specialised tools and techniques in identifying and analysing
complex real-world health problems and to draw valid, reliable and relevant
conclusions from different sources; and
d)
The ability to communicate (with the help of a supervisor) results of the
research effectively and ethically in a coherent dissertation and present this
verbally to a specialist and non-specialist audience by using the resources of
an academic-professional discourse, including IT.
G.1.18.3.1.2
Composition of curriculum: Transdisciplinary Health Promotion
Qualification- and programme code: 862 100; Curriculum: G801P
Module code
Descriptive name
TDHP811
Research methodology
TDHP812
Transdisciplinary health promotion
TDHP872
Dissertation
Credit total for the curriculum
Credits
16
16
148
180
G.1.19
RULES FOR THE DEGREE DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY (PhD)
G.1.19.1
Duration (minimum and maximum)
The minimum duration of the study is two years and the maximum duration
three years, calculated from the date of first registration for the specific
programme.
Although a maximum study period of three years is granted by the faculty,
students who apply for an additional fourth study year must note that it will
have extensive financial implications for the student.
G.1.19.2
Admission requirements of the qualification
A Master‟s degree or equivalent qualification as approved by Senate is
essential for admission to a doctoral degree.
103
G.1.19.3
Programme: Human Movement Science
Qualification code: 805 109 (F + P) (Human Movement Science)
The curriculum composed in this programme is of an academic nature. The
curriculum provides an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Human Movement Science.
Applications should be submitted by 11th September. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.3.1
Admission requirements for the programme
a)
A Master‟s degree or equivalent qualification as approved by Senate is
required.
b)
Admission is subject to approval by the school - and research director.
c)
A selection process by an internal selection panel takes place during
October to November.
G.1.19.3.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
The student should pass the master‟s degree with an average of at least 60%.
G.1.19.3.3
G.1.19.3.3.1
Curriculum G925P: Human Movement Science
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student should have:
G.1.19.3.3.2
a)
a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of Human Movement
Science and be able to identify practical problems through the most
advanced research methods, techniques and technologies in the field of
Human Movement Science, research them by collecting, analysing and
evaluating data and appropriate information and become involved in
advanced and scientific debates at the forefront of an area of
specialisation;
b)
the ability to undertake substantial, independent research with an
advanced scientific character that will lead to the (re)interpretation and
development of knowledge deemed to be publishable by peers, and
present and communicate these research results and own opinion
effectively to specialist and non-specialist audiences; and
c)
Deliver a thesis that complies with international standards for scientific
papers.
Compilation of the curriculum: Human Movement Science
Qualification- and programme code: 805 109; Curriculum code: G925P
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWK971
Thesis: Human Movement Science
Total credits for the curriculum
104
Credits
360
360
G.1.19.4
Programme: Recreation Science
Qualification code: 805 111 (F + P) (Recreation Science)
The curriculum composed in this programme is of an academic nature. The
curriculum provides an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Recreation.
Applications should be submitted by 11th September. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.4.1
Admission requirements for the programme
a)
A Master‟s degree or equivalent qualification as approved by Senate is
required.
b)
Admission is subject to approval by the school - and research director.
c)
A selection process by an internal selection panel takes place during
October to November.
G.1.19.4.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
The student should pass the Master‟s degree with an average mark of at least
60%.
G.1.19.4.3
G.1.19.4.3.1
Curriculum G935P: Recreation Science
Curriculum outcomes
After the curriculum has been completed, the student:
G.1.19.4.3.2
a)
have a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of Recreation Science
and be able to identify practical problems through the most advanced
research methods, techniques and technologies in the field Recreation
Science, research them by collecting, analysing and evaluating data and
appropriate information and become involved in advanced and scientific
debates at the forefront of an area of specialisation;
b)
the ability to undertake substantial, independent research with an
advanced scientific character that will lead to the (re)interpretation and
development of knowledge deemed to be publishable by peers, and
present and communicate these research results and own opinion
effectively to specialist and non-specialist audiences; and
c)
Deliver a thesis that complies with international standards for scientific
papers.
Compilation of the curriculum: Recreation Science
Qualification- and programme code: 805 111; Curriculum code: G935P
Module code
Descriptive name
RKKX971
Thesis: Recreation Sciences
Total credits for the curriculum
105
Credits
360
360
G.1.19.5
Programme: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Qualification code: 805 116 (F) (Pharmaceutical Chemistry)
a)
The PhD degree is a research-based degree and consists of a study
(research project) and a thesis in one of the following curriculum:
Pharmaceutical Chemistry.
b)
The curriculum is presented on a fulltime basis in Afrikaans and English.
c)
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.5.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A Master‟s degree or equivalent qualification as approved by Senate is
required in the particular field of specialization.
b)
Admission is based on selection by the director of the Centre of
Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences and selection is done on an ongoing basis, with consideration of the specific registration dates as
determined by the University.
c)
Admission to a program/curriculum may be refused if the standard of
proficiency that the student has acquired previously in the specific
subject(s) in which the student wants to study further does not meet the
requirements of the specific program/curriculum.
G.1.19.5.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
In the case where a student gets permission to present a thesis in the form of
research articles, the stipulations of the General Rules hold. (par. 5.4.2.7)
G.1.19.5.3
Curriculum G910P: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
This curriculum has a dual aim, namely:
G.1.19.5.3.1
1)
for the student who has reached the level of a master‟s degree in the
Pharmaceutical Sciences and Practice, to show with a doctoral thesis
that he/she has made a significant contribution to the development of
(1) new scientific knowledge, and/or (2) new skills in a specific
research field, thus making an addition of value to the community in
the fields of knowledge and skills in his/her specific field, and
2)
To provide South Africa with advanced pharmaceutical scientists and
practising manpower with advanced theoretical and practical
knowledge in different pharmaceutical-scientific and practice
disciplines. With this qualification the student can contribute to a
broadening of the leadership base for innovative and knowledgebased economic and scholastic activities in the country.
Curriculum outcomes
a)
Over and above the outcomes and criteria as described by the BPharmHons BSc-, MSc- and MPharm degrees, the student will be able to (1)
practise at a highly specialised level as pharmacist, (2) distinguish
106
himself/herself as a leader in the field, and (3) apply Research
Methodology at this level and in the specific field.
b)
G.1.19.5.3.2
Furthermore, the student will be able to (1) execute advanced functions of
a pharmacist, (2) act as a leader in the profession and functions of the
profession, (3) apply Research Methodology, (4) solve problems, (5) act
as an independent researcher, (6) lead research programmes, (7) act as
a supervisor/co-supervisor for students up to the PhD level, (8) find
research funds, and (9) make known research results by seminars and
lectures.
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Qualification- and programme code: 805 116; Curriculum code: G910P
Module code
Descriptive name
FCHG971
Thesis: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.6
Credits
360
360
Programme: Pharmaceutics
Qualification code: 805 117 (F) (Pharmaceutics)
a)
The PhD degree is a research-based degree and consists of a study
(research project) and a thesis in Pharmaceutics.
b)
The curriculum is presented on a fulltime basis in Afrikaans and English.
c)
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit)
G.1.19.6.1
G.1.19.6.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A master‟s degree or equivalent qualification as approved by Senate is
required in the particular field of specialization.
a)
Admission is based on selection by the director of the Centre of
Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences and selection is done on an ongoing basis, with consideration of the specific registration dates as
determined by the University.
b)
Admission to a program/curriculum may be refused if the standard of
proficiency that the student has acquired previously in the specific
subject(s) in which the student wants to study further does not meet the
requirements of the specific program/curriculum.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
In the case where a student gets permission to present a thesis in the form of
research articles, the stipulations of the General Rules hold. (par. 5.4.2.7)
107
G.1.19.6.3
Curriculum G911P: Pharmaceutics
This curriculum has a dual aim, namely:
G.1.19.6.3.1
G.1.19.6.3.2
1)
for the student who has reached the level of a master‟s degree in the
Pharmaceutical Sciences and Practice, to show with a doctoral thesis
that he/she has made a significant contribution to the development of
(1) new scientific knowledge, and/or (2) new skills in a specific
research field, thus making an addition of value to the community in
the fields of knowledge and skills in his/her specific field, and
2)
To provide South Africa with advanced pharmaceutical scientists and
practising manpower with advanced theoretical and practical
knowledge in different pharmaceutical-scientific and practice
disciplines. With this qualification the student can contribute to a
broadening of the leadership base for innovative and knowledgebased economic and scholastic activities in the country.
Curriculum outcomes
a)
Over and above the outcomes and criteria as described by the BPharm,
Hons BSc, MSc and MPharm degrees, the student will be able to (1)
practise at a highly specialised level as pharmacist, (2) distinguish
himself/herself as a leader in the field, and (3) apply Research
Methodology at this level and in the specific field.
b)
Furthermore, the student will be able to (1) execute advanced functions of
a pharmacist, (2) act as a leader in the profession and functions of the
profession, (3) apply Research Methodology, (4) solve problems, (5) act
as an independent researcher, (6) lead research programmes, (7) act as
a supervisor/co-supervisor for students up to the PhD level, (8) find
research funds, and (9) make known research results by seminars and
lectures.
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmaceutics
Qualification- and programme code: 805 117; Curriculum code: G911P
Module code
Descriptive name
FMSG971
Thesis: Pharmaceutics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.7
Credits
360
360
Programme: Pharmacology
Qualification code: 805 118 (F) (Pharmacology)
a)
The PhD degree is a research-based degree and consists of a study
(research project) and a thesis in Pharmacology.
b)
The curriculum is presented on a fulltime basis in Afrikaans and English.
c)
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
108
G.1.19.7.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A Master‟s degree or equivalent qualification as approved by Senate is
required in the particular field of specialization.
b)
Admission is based on selection by the director of the Centre of
Excellence for Pharmaceutical Sciences and selection is done on an ongoing basis, with consideration of the specific registration dates as
determined by the University.
c)
Admission to a program/curriculum may be refused if the standard of
proficiency that the student has acquired previously in the specific
subject(s) in which the student wants to study further does not meet the
requirements of the specific program/curriculum.
G.1.19.7.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
In the case where a student gets permission to present a thesis in the form of
research articles, the stipulations of the General Rules hold (par. 5.4.2.7).
G.1.19.7.3
Curriculum G912P: Pharmacology
This curriculum has a dual aim, namely:
G.1.19.7.3.1
1.
for the student who has reached the level of a master‟s degree in
the Pharmaceutical Sciences and Practice, to show with a doctoral
thesis that he/she has made a significant contribution to the
development of (1) new scientific knowledge, and/or (2) new skills in
a specific research field, thus making an addition of value to the
community in the fields of knowledge and skills in his/her specific
field, and
2.
To provide South Africa with advanced pharmaceutical scientists
and practising manpower with advanced theoretical and practical
knowledge in different pharmaceutical-scientific and practice
disciplines. With this qualification the student can contribute to a
broadening of the leadership base for innovative and knowledgebased economic and scholastic activities in the country.
Curriculum outcomes
a)
Over and above the outcomes and criteria as described by the BPharm,
Hons BSc, MSc and MPharm degrees, the student will be able to (1)
practise at a highly specialised level as pharmacist, (2) distinguish
himself/herself as a leader in the field, and (3) apply Research
Methodology at this level and in the specific field.
b)
Furthermore, the student will be able to (1) execute advanced functions of
a pharmacist, (2) act as a leader in the profession and functions of the
profession, (3) apply Research Methodology, (4) solve problems, (5) act
as an independent researcher, (6) lead research programmes, (7) act as
a supervisor/co-supervisor for students up to the PhD level, (8) find
research funds, and (9) make known research results by seminars and
lectures.
109
G.1.19.7.3.2
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmacology
Qualification- and programme code: 805 118; Curriculum code: G912P
Module code
Descriptive name
FKLG 971
Thesis: Pharmacology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.8
Credits
360
360
Programme: Pharmacy Practice
Qualification code: 805 119 (F + P) (Pharmacy Practice)
a)
The PhD degree is a research-based degree and consists of a study
(research project) and a thesis in Pharmacy Practice.
b)
The curricula are presented on a fulltime and part-time basis in Afrikaans
and English.
c)
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.8.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A MPharm or equivalent qualification is required;
b)
Admission to the program/curriculum takes place according to selection
by the leader of the research niche area and the School director, and
selection is done on an on-going basis, with consideration of applicable
registration dates as determined by the University.
G.1.19.8.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
It is recommended that a prospective student must have achieved at least
60% in an applicable master‟s project.
b)
Practise experience and prior learning will be taken in consideration.
c)
Admission to a programme/curriculum may be refused if the standard of
proficiency that the student has acquired previously in the specific
subject(s) in which the student wants to study further does not meet the
requirements of the specific programme/curriculum.
d)
In the case where a student gets permission to present a thesis in the
form of research articles, the stipulations of the General Rules of the
University hold. (par. 5.4.2.7).
G.1.19.8.3
Curriculum G913P: Pharmacy Practice
a)
This curriculum has a dual aim, namely:
1.
for the student who has reached the level of a master‟s degree in
the Pharmaceutical Sciences and Practice, to show with a doctoral
thesis that he/she has made a significant contribution to the
development of (1) new scientific knowledge, and/or (2) new skills in
a specific research field, thus making an addition of value to the
110
community in the fields of knowledge and skills in his/her specific
field, and
2.
G.1.19.8.3.1
G.1.19.8.3.2
To provide South Africa with advanced pharmaceutical scientists
and practising manpower with advanced theoretical and practical
knowledge in different pharmaceutical-scientific and practice
disciplines. With this qualification the student can contribute to a
broadening of the leadership base for innovative and knowledgebased economic and scholastic activities in the country.
Curriculum outcomes
a)
Over and above the outcomes and criteria as described by the BPharm,
Hons BSc, MSc and MPharm degrees, the student will be able to (1)
practise at a highly specialised level as pharmacist, (2) distinguish
himself/herself as a leader in the field, and (3) apply Research
Methodology at this level and in the specific field.
b)
Furthermore, the student will be able to (1) execute advanced functions of
a pharmacist, (2) act as a leader in the profession and functions of the
profession, (3) apply Research Methodology, (4) solve problems, (5) act
as an independent researcher, (6) lead research programmes, (7) act as
a supervisor/co-supervisor for students up to the PhD level, (8) find
research funds, and (9) make known research results by seminars and
lectures.
Compilation of the curriculum: Pharmacy Practice
Qualification- and programme code: 805 119; Curriculum code: G913P
Module code
Descriptive name
FPKG971
Thesis: Pharmacy Practice
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.9
Credits
360
360
Programme: Occupational Hygiene
Qualification code: 805 104 (F + P)
a)
The aim of the qualification is to enable a student that already has a
master‟s degree in the field of Occupational Hygiene, or a qualification
that is recognised as equivalent, to prove by a doctoral thesis that he/she
did a definite scientific contribution to development of new knowledge
and/or applicable skills.
b)
A further objective of the qualification is to provide South Africa with
scientific researchers who have a broad theoretical expertise and
practical skills in Occupational Hygiene.
c)
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
111
G.1.19.9.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Admission to this programme can be granted after completion of a
master‟s degree in Occupational Health (or equivalent qualification) at
master‟s level;
b)
Selection according to specified admission requirements is done by the
Research Director and senior researchers and is subject to available
capacity in the Occupational Hygiene subject group.
G.1.19.9.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
At least 60% average in the master‟s degree is required.
G.1.19.9.3
G.1.19.9.3.1
Curriculum G901P: Occupational Hygiene
Curriculum outcomes
Over and above the outcomes and criteria as described by the first generally
formative BSc degree, the Honours BSc degree and the MSc degree, in this
curriculum the student will:
G.1.19.9.3.2
a)
have appropriate competency in applicable quantitative and/or qualitative
research methodology and scientific writing ability;
b)
be able to identify a relevant research problem in a Health Science
discipline by integrating the above skills on the basis of a thorough
investigation of existing knowledge as reflected in appropriate scientific
literature;
c)
define a research problem area in a scientific discipline;
d)
conduct the necessary research in order to solve the problem;
e)
scientifically evaluate the results within the context of the problem; and
f)
Scientifically communicate the results.
Compilation of the curriculum: Occupational Hygiene
Qualification- and programme code: 805 104; Curriculum code: G901P
Module code
Descriptive name
FLGB971
Thesis: Occupational Hygiene
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.10
Credits
384
384
Programme: Dietetics
Qualification code: 805 105 (F + P)
The objective of the PhD degree is to give the student in the field of Dietetics
the opportunity to show that he/she has delivered a significant contribution with
a doctoral thesis to the development of (1) new scientific knowledge, and/or (2)
new skills in a particular research field. The second objective of the
qualification is to provide South Africa with scientific researchers who have
broad theoretical expertise and practical skills in Nutrition Science. By doing
112
so, a contribution will be made to the broadening of the leadership base for
innovative and knowledge-based nutrition care in the country.
The general closing date for applications is 31st October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.10.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Students will only be admitted to the PhD degree in this programme if
they are in possession of a suitable MSc degree or a qualification which
the Senate considers equivalent;
b)
A postgraduate selection committee evaluates applications and
candidates who comply with the requirements will be invited for an
interview.
c)
Selection is subject to academic performance, practical considerations
and available capacity in the subject group.
G.1.19.10.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
Students should pass an academic selection (an average of at least 60%)
at the completion of the master‟s degree.
b)
Students who wish to register for this programme must submit proof of
immunisation against Hepatitis A en B during the previous 5 years.
G.1.19.10.3
Curriculum G905P: Dietetics
G.1.19.10.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
Over and above the outcomes as described by the BSc and MSc degrees, the
student should be able to (1) practise as a dietician at a highly specialised
level, (2) act as a leader in the profession and functions of the profession, (3)
solve problems, (4) lead a research programme, (5) act as a leader or coleader for students up to the PhD level, (6) be able to find research funds, and
(7) make known research results by lectures and publications in scientific
journals.
G.1.19.10.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Dietetics
Qualification- and programme code: 805 105; Curriculum code: G905P
Module code
Descriptive name
DIET971
Thesis: Dietetics
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.11
Credits
360
360
Programme: Physiology
Qualification code: 805 107 (F + P) (Physiology)
a)
The aim of the qualification is to enable a student who has already
obtained a master‟s degree in the field of Cardiovascular Physiology, or a
qualification which is recognised as equivalent, to provide proof by means
113
of a doctoral thesis that he/she made a definite scientific contribution to
the development of new knowledge and/or applicable skills.
b)
A further aim of the qualification is to provide South Africa with scientific
researchers that have a broad expertise and practical skills in the Health
Science, with specialisation and master ship in Cardiovascular
Physiology.
c)
The general closing date for applications is the 31st of October. (After this
date applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.11.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Students must be in possession of a suitable MSc degree or a
qualification which the Senate considers equivalent.
b)
Selection is done at the hand of specific admission requirements and
considered by the research director and senior researchers in the entity
HART.
c)
Selection is subject to available capacity in the research entity.
G.1.19.11.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
The student should achieve at least 60% in Physiology at master‟s level
(or equivalent qualification).
b)
It is strongly recommended that the student should provide proof of
immunisation against Hepatitis A and B.
G.1.19.11.3
Curriculum G915P: Physiology
G.1.19.11.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
Over and above the outcomes and criteria as described by the first generally
formative BSc degree, the Honours BSc degree and the MSc degree, in this
curriculum the student will:
a)
have appropriate competency in applicable quantitative and/or qualitative
research methodology and scientific writing ability;
b)
be able to identify a relevant research problem in a Health Science
discipline by integrating the above skills on the basis of a thorough
investigation of existing knowledge as reflected in appropriate scientific
literature;
c)
conduct the necessary research in order to solve the problem;
d)
scientifically evaluate the results within the context of the problem; and
e)
Scientifically communicate the results.
114
G.1.19.11.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Physiology
Qualification- and programme code: 805 107; Curriculum code: G915P
Module code
Descriptive name
FLGX971
Thesis: Physiology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.12
Credits
384
384
Programme: Consumer Sciences
Qualification code: 805 112 (F + P) (Consumer Sciences)
a)
The PhD degree comprises the planning and execution of a research
project and the writing of a thesis.
b)
One curriculum, namely Consumer Sciences General, leads to this
qualification. The student can focus on Family Resource Management,
Clothing or Food.
c)
The closing date for applications is the 30th of September. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.12.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
An applicable master‟s degree or a qualification which the Senate
considers equivalent is required.
b)
The selection process takes place from the 1st of October and applications
will be considered by a selection panel.
c)
Admission is granted in consideration of the students‟ previous academic
performance (during completion of master‟s degree);
d)
Students will only be admitted to the programme if capacity in the subject
group permits it.
G.1.19.12.2
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
The curriculum and the topic are chosen in consultation with the School
director and/or the Research Director and Supervisor, with the reservation that
the topic will fit into the approved focus area programmes of both the
Consumer Sciences and the Faculty of Health Sciences.
G.1.19.12.3
Curriculum G940P: Consumer Sciences
This PhD programme leads to the development of specialised knowledge and
the capability to apply acquired skills to the solving of problems in the specific
subject field.
G.1.19.12.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will be able to:
a)
master the applicable Research Methodology;
115
b)
identify a relevant research problem, execute research for solving the
problem, analyse and communicate the results together with the problem
statement and draw conclusions addressing the problem;
c)
give scientific knowledge and research results in a coherent,
argumentative structure in written reports and publications; and
d)
Deliver oral lectures, using relevant verbal skills and suitable aids.
G.1.19.12.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Consumer Sciences
Qualification- and programme code: 805 112; Curriculum code: G940P
Module code
Descriptive name
VERB971
Thesis: Consumer Sciences
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.13
Credits
360
360
Programme: Nutrition
Qualification code: 805 114 (F + P) (Nutrition)
The aim of the PhD degree is to provide the student in the field of Nutrition the
opportunity to show by a doctoral thesis that he/she has made a significant
contribution to the development of (1) new scientific knowledge, and/or (2) new
skills in a specific research field. The second aim of the qualification is to
provide South Africa with scientific researchers that have a broad theoretical
expertise and practical skills in the nutrition science. A contribution will thus be
made to the broadening of the leadership base for innovative and knowledgebased nutrition care in the country.
The general closing date for applications is the 31st of October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit)
G.1.19.13.1
G.1.19.13.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Students will only be admitted to the PhD degree in this programme if
they are in possession of a suitable MSc degree or a qualification which
the Senate considers equivalent;
b)
A postgraduate selection committee evaluates applications and
candidates who comply with the requirements will be invited for an
interview.
c)
Selection is subject to the academic achievement of the student as well
as the available capacity in the subject group.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
Students should pass an academic selection (an average of at least 60%)
at the completion of the master‟s degree.
b)
Students who wish to register for this programme must submit proof of
immunisation against Hepatitis A en B during the previous 5 years.
116
G.1.19.13.3
Curriculum G960P: Nutrition
G.1.19.13.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
Over and above the outcomes as described by the BSc, Hons BSc and MSc
degrees, the student should be able (1) to practise as a nutritionist at a highly
specialised level, (2) to act as a leader in the profession and functions of the
profession, (3) to be able to solve problems, (4) to lead a research programme,
(5) to act as a leader or co-leader for students up to the PhD level, (6) to be
able to find research funds and (7) to make known research results by lectures
and publications in scientific journals.
G.1.19.13.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Nutrition
Qualification- and programme code: 805 114; Curriculum code: G960P
Module code
Descriptive name
VOED971
Thesis: Nutrition
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.14
Credits
360
360
Programme: Social Work
Qualification code: 805 108 (F + P) (Social Work)
The curriculum composed in this programme is of an academic nature. It gives
the opportunity for the development of specialised and advanced knowledge,
and should enable the qualified student to distinguish himself/herself as a
leader and researcher in the field of Social Work.
The closing date for applications is the 30th of September. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit)
G.1.19.14.1
G.1.19.14.2
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
Admission to this programme/curriculum takes place after obtaining the
master‟s degree in Social Work and with consideration of the student‟s
previous academic performance;
b)
An in-depth discussion focussing on certain criteria which can be related
to the general standards for postgraduate students as well as the field of
social work, will be conducted with each prospective student.
c)
It may be expected of prospective students to write an admissions test for
which certain material must be prepared as well as a Test for Academic
Literacy for Postgraduate students.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
Students registering for this programme/curriculum should supply proof of
registration as a social worker according to the Act on Social Service
Professions (Act 110 of 1978).
117
G.1.19.14.3
Curriculum G921P: Social Work
G.1.19.14.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student will be skilled in:
a)
the utilisation of the ecosystem approach in the extension and promotion
of Social Work knowledge;
b)
the identification of a research problem of highly complicated nature in the
field of Social Work, of which the solution can contribute to the extension
of the knowledge base of Social Work;
c)
the formulation and application of a suitable research topic and
procedure;
d)
the analysis and application, interpretation and critical evaluation of
research-related data;
e)
the presentation and report writing of research data in the form of a thesis
of high quality; and
f)
The distribution of the newly obtained knowledge to social workers and
other relevant role players.
G.1.19.14.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Social Work
Qualification- and programme code: 805 108; Curriculum code: G921P
Module code
Descriptive name
MWKN971
Thesis: Social Work
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.15
Credits
360
360
Programme: Psychology
Qualification code: 805 110 (F + P)
The curriculum composed in this programme is of an academic nature. The
curriculum gives an opportunity for the development of specialised and
advanced knowledge, applied skills, attitudes and values as researchers in
Psychology, and prepares the student for postdoctoral study in Psychology. In
the development of this curriculum, national and regional needs were
addressed in the specific research focus area.
The general closing date for applications is the 30th of September. (After this
date applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.15.1
Admission and selection requirements of the programme
a)
A master‟s degree in Psychology is required.
b)
Provisional admission is granted after completion of a selection process
but is subject to a suitable qualification, academic performance as well as
a suitable research concept within the research focus and projects in the
subject group.
118
c)
G.1.19.15.2
Final admission and approval is subject to the submission of a successful
research protocol as well as available capacity in the subject group.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
Students must have achieved at least 60% in the master‟s degree.
b)
Recognition will be given to additional experience and expertise.
c)
Selected students who are provisionally admitted must submit a research
protocol within the prescribed timeframe, which will be evaluated by a
specialist panel.
d)
Candidates may be requested to attend additional workshops to improve
their research skills.
G.1.19.15.3
Curriculum G931P: Psychology
G.1.19.15.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
The student should be equipped with advanced knowledge and skills to identify
a socially relevant research problem within the field of Psychology, to develop
and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research topic in a
scientific and ethical way, using suitable research methods, techniques and
procedures, to interpret the research findings in a scientifically accountable
way that makes a significant contribution to the encyclopaedia of psychological
knowledge and to write a research report on the project.
G.1.19.15.3.2 Compilation of the curriculum: Psychology
Qualification- and programme code: 805 110; Curriculum code: G931P
Module code
Descriptive name
PSYC971
Thesis: Psychology
Total credits for the curriculum
G.1.19.16
Credits
360
360
Programme: Nursing
Qualification code: 805 113 (F + P)
The student should be able to execute the profession of Nursing as an expert
at a highly specialised level and to distinguish him/her as a leader in research
in the field of Nursing Science. He/she should be able to initiate research and
understand and predict future tendencies. Furthermore, he/she should be able
to lead others in the use of advanced Research Methodology in nursing studies
and to add knowledge to the knowledge base of Nursing Science.
The general closing date for applications is the 31st of October. (After this date
applications will be considered on merit).
G.1.19.16.1
Admission requirements for the programme
a)
Students will only be admitted to the PhD degree if they are in possession
of a suitable master‟s degree or a qualification which the Senate
considers equivalent.
119
b)
G.1.19.16.2
An application for selection must be handed in before the selection
process starts on 1 November.
Additional requirements and faculty specific rules
a)
The candidate must have achieved at least 65% in the master‟s degree.
b)
A pre-doctoral study programme must be completed successfully (details
are available from the research director)
c)
After presenting the research proposal to the Research Committee, the
student should defend it during a doctoral seminar; and present the
findings during the doctoral seminar.
G.1.19.16.3
Curriculums: G950P / G951P / G952P / G953P / G954P / G955P / G956P
G.1.19.16.3.1 Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the curriculum, the student should be able to:
a)
demonstrate critical-analytical problem-solving skills at a high level;
b)
practise the profession of Nursing at a specialised level;
c)
distinguish himself/herself as a leader in the field of Nursing;
d)
apply advanced Research Methodology, initiate research, predict
outcomes and apply results;
e)
contribute significantly and scientifically to the knowledge base of Nursing
Science;
f)
act independently as a researcher;
g)
maintain specialised professional expertise by continual learning; and
h)
Initiate and maintain networks at national and international level.
G.1.19.16.3.2 Compilation of the curricula
ONE of the following curriculums may be chosen:
Community Nursing, Health Services Management, Health Science Education,
Professional Nursing, Psychiatric Community Nursing, Midwifery and Neonatal
Nursing, and Nursing.
G.1.19.16.4
Curriculum: Community Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G950P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis: Community Nursing
VPGP971
Total credits for the curriculum
120
Credits
360
360
Curriculum: Health Services Management
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G951P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis: Health Service
Management
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
360
VPBP971
360
Curriculum: Health Science Education
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G952P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis: Health Science
VPOP971
Education
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
360
360
Curriculum: Professional Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G953P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis: Professional Nursing
VPPP971
Total credits for the curriculum
Credits
360
360
Curriculum: Psychiatric Community Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G954P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis: Psychiatric Community
Nursing
Total credits for the curriculum
VPEP971
Credits
360
360
Curriculum: Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G955P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis:
Midwifery
VPVP971
Neonatal Nursing
Total credits for the curriculum
and
Credits
360
360
Curriculum: Nursing
Qualification- and programme code: 805 113; Curriculum code: G956P
Module code
Descriptive name
Thesis: Nursing
VPVV971
Total credits for the curriculum
121
Credits
360
360
G.1.20
RULES FOR THE POSTBASIC PROGRAMME IN MIDWIFERY AND
NEONATAL NURSING SCIENCE
This postgraduate diploma can only be presented if available capacity in the
school exists.
No students will be admitted for 2015.
a)
This is a postbasic programme and is accessible to SANC registered
nurses and midwives.
b)
This programme leads to an additional registration of a qualification in
Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Science and registration at the SANC as
an advanced Midwife.
c)
This programme is presented as a part-time programme on the
Potchefstroom campus.
G.1.20.1
Duration of study
The minimum duration is one year and the maximum duration is two years.
G.1.20.2
Admission requirements
a) A Bachelor‟s degree in Nursing Science and Midwifery or equivalent
qualification.
b) Current registration at the South African Nursing Council as a nurse and
midwife.
G.1.20.3
Programme and qualification code
Qualification and programme code: 844 100 (V + D) Curriculum code:
G501P
G.1.20.4
List of modules
Module
Descriptive name
code
NSDT111
Health Science Dynamics
NSRT121
Health Science Research
VPVK574
The advanced midwife as
practitioner, leader and
consultant
VPVK575
The advanced midwife as
clinician in ante-, intra- and
postpartum context
VPVK576
The advanced midwife as
clinician in neonatal context
VPVP584
Advanced midwifery and
neonatal nursing science:
Practica
Type of credit
Credits
Fundamental
Fundamental
Core
16
16
16
National
hours
160
160
160
Core
32
320
Core
16
160
Core
32
640
Fundamental
Core
Elective
Total
32
96
0
128
122
G.1.20.4.1
Programme outcomes
As a registered advanced midwife and neonatal nurse the student should be
able to act independently as a clinical nurse specialist, researcher, consultant,
and change agent in the midwifery practise. He/she will be able to function in
the multi- professional team as a leader, facilitator and manager. As an
advanced Midwife and Neonatal nurse he/she will be able to render cultural
sensitive, holistic integrated evidence-based advanced midwifery care. This
qualification will enable you to obtain personal and professional growth in your
strive to obtain lifelong learning and advance on your career path.
G.1.20.4.2
Articulation possibilities
Students can proceed to the research master‟s degree after completion of this
qualification.
G.1.21
RULES FOR THE ADVANCED UNIVERSITY DIPLOMA IN HEALTH
SCIENCE
This is a post-basic qualification and is accessible to health professionals.
If a professional nurse, this qualification leads to further registration of
qualifications in Nursing Education and Nursing Management or Community
Nursing, or Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment and Care
at the South African Nursing Council.
G.1.21.1
G.1.21.2
Modules and credits
a)
On each level (first, second, third year of study) the subjects are divided
into modules. Each module can be identified by a code and a name that
explains the nature of the module. NSRT121 refers to the subject Health
Science Research; the first figure (1) indicates the level (first year of
study) the second figure (2) indicates the semester in which this module
is offered. The third figure (1) distinguishes between modules within the
same subject on the same level and in the same semester.
b)
Modules carry credits. A credit represents the expected hours of study
(one credit equals 10 study hours) a student will spend to achieve the
specified outcomes.
Ratio between credits and teaching periods
As a general rule, the following shall apply: For each 16 credit module 4
contact sessions of 100 minutes each are required.
G.1.21.3
Recognition of prior learning
a)
A student should apply in writing for recognition of modules completed
successfully at this or other tertiary institutions.
b)
Applications should include proof of prior learning: academic records and
module outcomes.
c)
The modules of a major subject in a qualification already awarded cannot
be credited for a second qualification.
123
d)
G.1.21.4
G.1.21.5
A student not being a professional nurse, but a professional in other
health related professions, can apply for recognition of prior learning.
Registration
a)
A student should apply for admission to a specific programme and
curriculum.
b)
A student registers annually for a specific programme and curriculum
according to the Rules of the specific programme.
c)
Registration can be changed on provision that the prescribed procedure is
honoured.
Duration of the study
The minimum duration for this diploma is one year for the one year diploma
and two years for the two years diploma. The maximum duration is respectively
two years and three years.
G.1.21.6
List of modules
Module
code
BSKT111
BSKT221
NSCT211
NSCT221
NSCT271
NSKT211
NSDT111
NSET111
NSET211
NSET221
NSET271
NSFT121
NSHT211
NSHT221
Descriptive name
Business Management
Introduction to Psychology in Work
Context
Personnel Psychology
Community Nursing
Grounding of Community Nursing
Principles of Primary Health Care
Community Nursing: Practica
Pharmacology
Health Science Dynamics
Health Science Dynamics
Health Science Education
Health Science Education:
Introduction
Health Science Education:
Curriculum Studies
Health Science Education: Didactics
Health Science Education: Practica
Financial Health Management
Financial Health Management
Clinical Nursing Science
Clinical Nursing Science, Health
Assessment, Treatment and Care:
Child
Clinical Nursing Science, Health
Assessment, Treatment and Care:
Adult
124
Credits
Outcomes
based
requirements
16
NONE
16
NONE
16
16
24
16
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
16
NONE
16
NONE
16
NONE
16
16
NONE
NONE
16
NONE
16
NONE
16
NONE
Module
code
Descriptive name
NSHT271
Clinical Nursing Science, Health
Assessment, Treatment and Care:
Practica (Child and Adult)
Health Service Management
Unit/Clinic Management
Human Resources Management
Health Service Management:
Practica
Health Science Research
Health Science Research
Public Management and
Governance
Introduction to Public Management
NSMT211
NSMT221
NSMT271
NSRT121
OBAD112
Credits
48
Outcomes
based
requirements
NONE
16
16
16
NONE
NONE
NONE
16
NONE
16
NONE
Year modules must be registered in the first semester.
G.1.21.7
Programme: Advanced University Diploma in Health Science (One Year)
a)
This programme offers health professionals the opportunity to enhance
their knowledge and skills in health service delivery and to function as an
independent practitioner within the multidisciplinary team to render quality
health care according to the needs of the country.
b)
It offers professional nurses the opportunity to register with the South
African Nursing Council with one additional qualification.
G.1.21.7.1
Programme and qualification code
See different programmes.
G.1.21.7.2
Admission requirements
a)
The student must possess a Matriculation Exemption Certificate. A
student who does not possess the latter may apply through the University
to the Matriculation Board for a Matriculation Exemption Certificate.
b)
In order to be admitted to this program, the student should, (if a
professional nurse) be:
c)
1)
in possession of an applicable diploma in General Nursing Science
and one additional qualification;
2)
registered as professional nurse with the South African Nursing
Council;
3)
Submit the current year‟s South African Nursing Council receipt.
In order to be admitted to this program, the student should be a health
professional, be:
1)
d)
In possession of an applicable diploma/degree in health science.
If a student who successfully completed the Advanced University Diploma
in Health Science with two specialities at the North-West University,
125
should wish to proceed with the BCur. (Ed- et Adm), a maximum of TEN
theory modules can be credited on a written request and payment of the
applicable fees.
G.1.21.7.3
Community Nursing (One Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 100 Curriculum G511T
G.1.21.7.3.1
Curriculum outcomes
On completion of this curriculum the successful candidate should be able to
function as an independent practitioner within the multi-professional team and
the ethical legal framework by:
G.1.21.7.3.2
G.1.21.7.3.3
a)
utilising critical analytical problem solving skills to provide comprehensive
community nursing based on a scientific approach;
b)
rendering preventive, promotive, curative and rehabilitative health service;
c)
managing a community health centre with regard to human and material
resources; and
d)
demonstrate leadership skills in facilitating changes in the health service.
Articulation and exit point
a)
Students may apply for recognition of credits for modules completed at
other universities.
b)
If a student who completed the AUDHS (one-year) wishes to register for
the BCur (Ed et Adm) degree a maximum of eight (8) theory modules will
be credited on written request from the student and payment of the
prescribed fees.
Additional Rules
a)
This curriculum is only accessible to professional nurses and a student
must be qualified in General Nursing Science and Midwifery.
b)
Students registered for NSCT, must also complete the accompanying
practica. Any costs involved must be paid by the student.
c)
All practica arrangements must be made by the student.
d)
A maximum of one year extension is allowed for completion of practica.
126
G.1.21.7.3.4
Compilation of curriculum: Community Nursing (One Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 100 Curriculum G511T
YEAR 1
FIRST SEMESTER
CODE
NSCT211
NSCT271
NSDT111
NSGT111
NSMT211
Total semester 1
CR
16
24
16
16
16
88
YEAR 1
SECOND SEMESTER
CODE
NSCT221
NSFT121
NSGT121
NSRT121
Total semester 2
TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE
CURRICULUM
CR
16
16
16
16
64
152
NOTE: NSCT271 runs over a year.
G.1.21.7.4
Health Science Education (One Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 101; Curriculum G512T
G.1.21.7.4.1
Curriculum outcomes
The successful candidate should be able to:
G.1.21.7.4.2
G.1.21.7.4.3
a)
utilise the psychology and philosophy of education in creating a context
conducive to learning;
b)
apply the knowledge and skills of andragogic didactics to facilitate deep
holistic lifelong learning;
c)
participate in curriculum development;
d)
utilise intra- and interpersonal life skills to facilitate relationships within the
personal and professional sphere; and
e)
partake in health research.
Articulation and exit point
a)
Students may apply for recognition of credits for modules completed at
other universities.
b)
If a student who completed the AUDHS (one year) wishes to register for
the BCur (Ed- et Adm) degree a maximum of eight (8) theory modules
can be credited on written request from the student and payment of the
prescribed fees.
Additional Rules
a)
Students registered for NSET, must complete the accompanying practica.
Any costs involved must be paid by the student.
b)
All practica arrangements must be made by the student.
c)
A maximum of one year extension is allowed for completion of practica.
127
G.1.21.7.4.4
Compilation of Curriculum Health Science Education (One year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 101; Curriculum G512T
YEAR 1
FIRST SEMESTER
CODE
BSKT111
NSDT111
NSET111
NSET211
NSET271
Total semester 1
YEAR 1
SECOND SEMESTER
CODE
CR
16
16
16
16
16
80
BSKT221
NSET221
NSFT121
NSRT121
Total semester 2
TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE
CURRICULUM
CR
16
16
16
16
64
144
NOTE: NSET271 runs over a year.
G.1.21.7.5
Health Service Management (One Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 102; Curriculum G513T
G.1.21.7.5.1
Curriculum outcomes
The successful candidate should be able to utilise managerial skills in
rendering quality health care by the:
G.1.21.7.5.2
G.1.21.7.5.3
a)
application of risk and financial management principles;
b)
implementation of information systems;
c)
management of human resources;
d)
management of a health service Unit/Clinic; and
e)
utilisation of intra- and interpersonal life skills to facilitate relationships
within personal and professional sphere.
Articulation and exit point
a)
Students may apply for recognition of credits for modules completed at
other universities.
b)
If a student who completed the AUDHS (one year) wishes to register for
the BCur (Ed et Adm) degree a maximum of eight (8) theory modules can
be credited on written request from the student and payment of the
prescribed fees.
Additional Rules
a)
Students registered for NSMT, must complete the accompanying practica.
Any costs involved must be paid by the student.
b)
All practica arrangements must be made by the student.
c)
A maximum of one year extension is allowed for completion of practica.
128
G.1.21.7.5.4
Compilation of Curriculum: Health Service Management (One Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 102; Curriculum G513T
YEAR 1
FIRST SEMESTER
CODE
BSKT111
NSDT111
NSMT211
NSMT271
OBAD112
Total semester 1
YEAR 1
SECOND SEMESTER
CODE
CR
16
16
16
16
16
80
CR
16
16
16
16
BSKT221
NSFT121
NSMT221
NSRT121
Total semester 2
TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE
CURRICULUM
64
144
NOTE: NSMT271 runs over a year.
G.1.21.7.6
Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment and Care (One
Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 103; Curriculum G515T
(This curriculum is offered at selected centres only)
G.1.21.7.6.1
Curriculum outcomes
The successful candidate should be able to function as an independent
practitioner within the multi-professional team and within the ethical-legal
framework by:
G.1.21.7.6.2
G.1.21.7.6.3
a)
utilising critical analytical problem solving skills in the management of the
health problems of patients;
b)
assessing, diagnosing
comprehensive care;
c)
communicating effectively; and
d)
undertaking research within the epidemiological framework.
and
implementing
outcomes
of
planned
Articulation and exit point
a)
Students may apply for recognition of credits for modules completed at
other universities.
b)
If a student who completed the AUDHS (one year) wishes to register for
the BCur (Ed et Adm) degree credit will be given on written request from
the student and payment of the prescribed fees for a maximum of eight
(8) theory modules completed.
Additional Rules
a)
A student must be qualified in General Nursing Science and Midwifery;
b)
Students registered for NSHT, must complete the accompanying practica.
Any costs involved must be paid by the student;
c)
All practica arrangements must be made by the student.
d)
A maximum of one year extension is allowed for completion of practica.
129
G.1.21.7.6.4
Compilation of Curriculum: Clinical Nursing Science, Health
Assessment, Treatment and Care (One Year)
Qualification and programme code: 837 103; Curriculum G515T
YEAR 1
FIRST SEMESTER
CODE
NSDT111
NSHT211
NSKT211
NSHT271
CR
16
16
16
48
Total semester 1
96
YEAR 1
SECOND SEMESTER
CODE
NSRT121
NSCT221
NSFT121
NSHT221
Total semester 2
TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE
CURRICULUM
CR
16
16
16
16
64
160
NOTE: NSHT271 runs over a year.
G.1.22
RULES FOR THE POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN
PHARMACOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES OF DRUG THERAPY
Qualification code: 847 100 (Distance Learning)
The Postgraduate Diploma in Pharmacological Principles of Drug Therapy is
only presented in a distance mode by the Potchefstroom Campus of the NorthWest University.
The programme/curriculum is only presented in English
G.1.22.1
G.1.22.2
Duration of study
a)
The minimum duration of the study is one (1) year and the maximum
duration is three (3) years.
b)
The programme is offered in such a manner that students can choose to
do it in one or two years. It is recommended, however, that part-time
students take the course over a period of two years.
c)
Students may also enrol for individual modules as certificate courses for
purposes of continued professional development. A maximum of 3
modules may retain credit towards completion of the Postgraduate
Diploma within a maximum period of three years
Admission requirements
a)
Admission is allowed only if the degree BSc (Pharm) or BPharm or
MBChB or BChD was obtained or a qualification regarded by the Senate
as equivalent to the above-mentioned degrees; and
b)
students who completed individual modules as certificate courses may
apply for recognition of prior learning. A maximum of one third (e.g. 45
credits) of the total number of credits may retain credit towards completion
of the Postgraduate Diploma within a maximum period of three years.
c)
Students may, according to the judgement of the Faculty Board, be
exempted from certain modules, or it may be expected from candidates to
take additional course material
d)
Registration can take place throughout the year.
130
G.1.22.3
Programme and qualification code
Qualification and programme code: 847100, Curriculum code: G501P
Continued professional development is an important and integral part of the
South African strategy to improve public services. The programme in
Pharmacological Principles of Drug Therapy is accredited by the Health
Professions council of South Africa (HPCSA) for the purpose of continued
professional development (CPD) for medical practitioners. This programme
aims at assisting the health care professionals in South Africa (medical
practitioners, pharmacists, etc.) in practicing more effective pharmacotherapy
in the community medicine
G.1.22.4
Curriculum: Pharmacological Principles of Drug Therapy (G501P)
a)
The curriculum consists of 11 modules.
b)
Module 1-8 and 12 are compulsory.
c)
Any two elective modules from modules 9-11 must also be included.
d)
Modules 1-8 and any two electives from 9-11 are prerequisites for module
12.
e)
Modules 1-8 and the two elective modules may be completed in random
order, although the suggested order is as indicated in the table.
f)
Basic computer and internet skills are pre-requisites for this programme.
G.1.22.4.1
Curriculum outcomes
After completion of the Postgraduate Diploma in Pharmacological Principles of
Drug Therapy, the student will demonstrate:
G.1.22.4.2
•
selection of drugs based on pharmacological and ethical principles in the
best interest of the patient.
•
a sound knowledge of the basic pharmacological principles underlying
drug therapy,
•
insight into the dynamics and kinetics of interactions between drugs,
including a comprehensive range of drug groups,
•
the ability to evaluate existing drug prescriptions, and advise the patient
with regard to drug treatment,
•
the ability to synthesise individualised pharmacological treatment
approaches for a wide range of disease states,
•
information gathering skills of the latest information on drug treatment
from the Internet,
•
ability to evaluate published clinical trials on drug treatment,
•
effective communication, individually and co-operatively, in an Internetbased environment,
•
a sensitivity for a patient-orientated approach to drug therapy, and
•
reason within the frame(work) of reference addressing relevant ethical
questions regarding drug uses.
Faculty specific rules for the curriculum
a)
As a general rule a ratio of 3:2 (participation mark : examination mark) is
used to determine the module mark for modules 1 to 8, while a ratio of 1:1
is used for modules 9 to 11 and a ratio of 2:3 is used for module 12.
131
b)
G.1.22.4.3
A subminimum mark of 40% applies to each assessment for each
module, including assignments, moderated group discussion forums,
examination papers and oral evaluations.
Compilation of the Curriculum: Pharmacological Principles of Drug
Therapy
Qualification and programme code: 847 100; Curriculum code: G501P
Module code
Module 1: FKLT531
Module 2: FKLT532
Descriptive name
Principles of Pharmacokinetics
Principles of
Pharmacodynamics
Module 3: FKLT541
Drugs and the Peripheral
Nervous System
Module 4: FKLT551
Drugs and the Central
Nervous System
Module 5: FKLT561
Drugs and the Cardiovascular
System
Module 6: FKLT533
Drugs for Pain, Inflammation,
Fever and Airway Diseases
Module 7: FKLT542
Chemotherapy of Infections
and Infestations
Module 8: FKLT552
Hormones, Hominoids and
Hormone Antagonists
Module 9: FKLT562**
Drugs for GIT and Skin
Disorders
Module 10: FKLT563** Vitamins, Haematopoietic and
Immunopharmacology
Module 11: FKLT564** Advanced Pharmacological
Principles
Module 12: FKLT571
Integrated Pharmacology
Credit total for the curriculum
Credits
8
16
8
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
136
Note: ** Electives: Any two modules can be selected from 9-11.
132
G.2
MODULE OUTCOMES (ALPHABETICAL)
G.2.1
HONOURS DEGREES
Module code: FMIA613
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Biopharmaceutics
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be able to:

acquire the basic principles of bio pharmaceutics and pharmacokinetics;

describe the various factors (dissolutions, absorption, gastine emphying rate presence of food etc.) on
the bio-availability of various drugs;

advise patients with regard to the correct use of drug dosage regimens in order to optimise drug
therapy;

describe the various parameters used to determine the bio-availability of drugs; and

describe the various characteristics of drugs that may cause pharmacokinetic variability.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA611
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Introduction to Pharmaco-economics
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be able to demonstrate:

appropriate pharmaco economic analytical methods in specific situations;

planning and implementation of pharmaco-economic research studies;

compilation of pharmaco economic reports and critically evaluating published pharmaco economic
studies;

identification of international trends and applications of pharmaco economic principles;

Illustration of cost concepts and application and uses of pharmaco economics.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA612
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Managed Pharmaceutical Care
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be:

Familiar with the theoretical and practical aspects of managed pharmaceutical care with regard to the
application of the patient care process and the establishment and management of the professional
pharmaceutical care practice in the South African context.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA613
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Disease Management and Drug Utilisation Review
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be able:

to implement certain medicine information systems pertaining to Disease Management as an aid in
decision making to improve quality and economical aspects in medicine usage;

have insight in the following information systems: Drug utilization review, pharmaco economics,
evidence-based medicine, pharmacoepide-miology and the principles of Disease Management.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
133
Module code: FPHA621
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Pharmacotherapy I
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be able:

to supply knowledge and skills in primary screening and monitoring services, as well as background in
the management of acute minor ailments of the neurological system, the eyes, the oral cavity, the ear,
nose and throat in pharmacy;

reflect knowledge on primary screening and monitoring services in the pharmacy, secondly an on
basic pharmacotherapy and the necessary skills to communicate a comprehensive patient history;

know theoretical guidelines for the basic physical examination of a patient on primary health care
level.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA622
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Pharmacotherapy II
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should:

reflect knowledge and skills in the management of acute minor ailments as well as insight into the
care of patients with chronic diseases;

reflect knowledge and skills on the rational treatment and referral of patients to secondary care level;

know the implementation of the principles of pharmacotherapy in a holistic pharmaceutical plan; and

know etiology, symptoms and signs, and treatment of a range of disorders including: Neurological
disorders, ophthalmologic disorders, the oral cavity, ear nose and throat disorders, upper and lower
respiratory tract disorders, cardiovascular disorders, diabetes, musculo-skeletal disorders, skin
infections, urine tract infections and sexually transmitted diseases.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA623
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Pharmaco-epidemiology
Module Outcomes:

To implement and use certain principles, concepts and epidemiologic fundamentals in day-to-day
pharmacy practice.
The student should have insight in:
o
fundamental pharmaco epidemiology;
o
epidemiological concepts;
o
observational study designs in epidemiology;
o
experimental study designs;
o
data identification and analysis;
o
concepts of risk and risk assessment;
o
screening and diagnostic testing;
o
post-marketing surveillance drug utilisation studies and pharmaco economics; and
o
Pharmacoepidemiology in pharmacy practice.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA625
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Medicines Supply Systems
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the course the student should be:

Familiar with the management of medicine distribution in the public health care system in South Africa
with special emphasis to the pharmacist‟s responsibilities in the medicine distribution cycle, policy
guidelines, medicine selection procurement and distribution.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
134
Module code: FKLT631
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Principles of Pharmacokinetics
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student should be able to:

demonstrate an understanding of the basic pharmacokinetic principles and the ability do some
calculations;

know the factors influencing the absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion of drugs;

participate in all discussions; and

Demonstrate an ability to apply sound ethical principles in all endeavours.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT632
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Principles of Pharmacodynamics
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student should be able to:

apply pharmacodynamics principles to assess the impact of drugs on a patient;

assess drug actions from pharmacodynamics parameters;

assess beforehand whether or not a certain combination of drugs is desirable;

interpret and evaluate in vitro and in vivo experimental findings;

apply the principles of linear drug-receptor interactions to the complicated non-linear drug-receptor
interactions;

show a thorough knowledge of the various drug-receptor interactions of agonists and antagonists; and

Participate in partner and group discussion.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT633
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs for Pain, Inflammation, Fever and Air Passage Diseases
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module and in the treatment of disorders (e.g. pain and inflammation,
obstructive pulmonary and other respiratory disorders) in which autacoids are predominantly involved, the
student should be able to:

portray a full classification of the drugs in this regard;

demonstrate awareness of all effects in the application of these drugs;

reflect a thorough knowledge and understanding of the pharmacological mechanisms of action and
pharmacokinetics of these drugs;

explain drug interactions together with indications and contra-indications of specific drug treatment;

analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational alternatives;

show a patient-oriented approach in advising patients on effective drug use;

demonstrate the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating these disorders;

participate in peer and group discussions; and

Apply social and ethical codes in drug selection and administration.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
135
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT641
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs and the Peripheral Nervous System
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student should be able to:

portray a full classification of drugs acting in the peripheral nervous system;

demonstrate awareness of the therapeutic applications of these drugs;

reflect a thorough knowledge of the pharmacological mechanisms of action and pharmacokinetics of
these drugs;

explain drug interactions together with selected indications and contra-indications of drug treatment;

reveal the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating the appropriate disease states;

participate in group discussions; and

Demonstrate the application of a social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT642
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Chemotherapy of Infections and Infestations
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module and in the treatment of various infectious disease states with
anti-microbial drugs, the student should be able to:

portray a full classification of drug prototypes used in the treatment of infectious diseases;

select an appropriate treatment;

demonstrate satisfactory knowledge of the clinically important pharmacological mechanisms and
pharmacokinetics of antimicrobial drugs;

explain clinically important indications, contra-indications and drug interactions;

analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios, and to propose responsible alternatives to obvious cases
of misuse of drugs;

illustrate an ability to solve case studies;

demonstrate a patient-directed approach and an ability to advise patients regarding effective antiinfective drug use in view of the global increase in microbial drug resistance;

reveal an understanding of the need to remain informed about infection control and treatment in an
ever changing microbiological environment;

participate in group discussions; and

apply a social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT651
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs and the Central Nervous System
Module Outcomes:
In the treatment of disorders of the central nervous system with drugs affecting central neurotransmission
and receptor function you should:

be able to portray a full classification of the drugs in this regard;

be aware of all effects in the application of these drugs;

reflect a thorough knowledge of the pharmacological mechanisms of action and pharmacokinetics of
136
these drugs;
be able to explain drug interactions together with indications and contra-indications of specific drug
treatment;

be able to analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational alternatives;

show a patient-directed (oriented) approach in advising patients of the effective drug use;

demonstrate the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating various central nervous
system disorders;

be able to participate in discussions; and

be able to apply social and ethical codes in drug selection and administration.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT652
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Hormones, Hominoids and Hormone Antagonists
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, you should be able to:

portray a full classification of releasing factors, tropic hormones and peripheral hormones, and
indicate their sites of release and action, respectively;

name appropriate examples of drugs that act through modulation of hormonal action, be it as an
agonist or antagonist;

name and explain the physiological actions of the various hormones, and be able to discuss the
therapeutic effects and clinically important side-effects/toxicity of hormone-active drugs (distinguish
between direct and indirect effects);

Discuss the mechanisms whereby the various classes of hormones exert their physiological effects,
and to discuss the pharmacological effects (see bullet 2) of the hormone-active drugs that act on
these particular endocrine systems (distinguish receptor mechanism, cellular mechanism, neural
mechanism, hemodynamic mechanism, systematic mechanism, etc.);

name and also motivate the indications and contra-indications of the hormone-active drugs from the
pharmacodynamics and -kinetic parameters of these drugs or drug groups under discussion;

name and motivate the clinically important drug-drug interaction(s) from the pharmacodynamics and kinetics of the specific hormone-active drug(s) or drug group(s) under discussion;

scientifically analyse and evaluate given treatment scenarios for a specific patient (case studies) and
propose possible alternatives;

discuss and motivate the relevant points of patient advice with regard to using hormone-active drugs;

demonstrate a patient-directed approach with regard to the appropriate pharmacotherapy;

retrieve and evaluate the latest information on this subject independently and when directed to, by
means of information technology, including CD-ROM and the Internet;

communicate with colleagues individually, and in groups regarding the topics under discussion;

discuss the social-ethical implications of the specific hormone-active drug treatment regimes.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 13) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT661
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs and the Cardiovascular System
Module Outcomes:
In the treatment of various cardiovascular disease states with drugs that affect renal and cardiovascular
functioning you should:

be able to portray a full classification of the drugs in this regard;

be aware of all effects in the application of these drugs;

137

reflect a thorough knowledge of the pharmacological mechanisms of action and pharmacokinetics of
these drugs;

be able to explain drug interactions together with indications and contra-indications of drug treatment;

be able to analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational (responsible) alternatives;

reveal a patient-directed approach in advising patients of the effective use of drugs;

reveal the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating various cardiovascular disease
states;

be able to participate in group discussions; and

be able to apply the social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

An electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT662
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs for GIT and Skin Disorders
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, you should:

be able to portray a full classification of the drugs in this regard;

be aware of all effects in the application of these drugs;

reflect a thorough knowledge of the pharmacological mechanisms of action and pharmacokinetics of
these drugs;

be able to explain drug interactions together with indications and contra-indications of drug treatment;

be able to analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational (responsible) alternatives;

reveal a patient-directed approach in advising patients of the effective use of drugs;

reveal the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating various cardiovascular disease
states;

be able to participate in group discussions; and

be able to apply the social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 13) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT663
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Vitamins, Haematopoietic and Immunopharmacology
Module Outcomes:
In the drug treatment of cancer, the various indicated disease states that result from vitamin and mineral
deficiencies, disorders pertaining to the blood forming organs, and disorders of the neuroimmune system,
you should:

be able to portray a classification of the full range of drugs featuring in the module;

reflect a thorough knowledge of the relevant underlying pharmacological concepts including
pharmacological action mechanisms, effects, and pharmacokinetics;

be able to explain clinically important drug interactions together with indications and contra-indications
of drug treatment;

be able to analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational (responsible) alternatives;

reveal a patient-directed approach in advising patients on the effective use of the drugs;

reveal the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating various disease states;

be able to participate in group discussions; and

be able to apply the social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,
138

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 13) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT664
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Advanced Pharmacological Principles
Module Outcomes:
The topics discussed in this module are relevant for all the different fields of pharmacology. At the end of
this module you should be able to::

explain the different drug interactions and the clinical significance;

use clinical pharmacokinetic principles to predict an appropriate dosing schedule;

use the principles of chronopharmacology to enhance therapy in patients;

discuss gene therapy with other health workers;

participate in group discussions; and

Apply the social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 13) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT665
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Evidence-based Medicine
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, you should be able to:

describe the basic principles of evidence-based medicine and apply these principles to a selection of
drugs for treatment, in order to optimise patient care;

explain clinical trial design and the meaning thereof for the interpretation of published data;

apply your knowledge of elementary biostatistics for the interpretation of published data;

utilise systematic review databases and reveal the ability to retrieve the latest information on
evidence-based medicine; and

Apply the social and ethical code in drug selection.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FKLT671
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Integrated Pharmacology
Module Outcomes:
The programme outcomes states that successful completion of the Honours B.Sc. Programme in
Pharmacology will enable the prescribing medical practitioner and persons from related disciplines to
exercise accountable selections of drugs, founded on pharmacological and ethical principles, in the best
interest of the patient. These primary programme outcomes imply that for the oral examination (Module 13)
you should be able to demonstrate:

knowledge and insight into the dynamics and kinetics and interactions between drugs; and

an ability to compile individualised pharmacotherapeutic approaches, based on your pharmacological
knowledge, insights and an appropriate ethical value system.
These knowledge, skills and values will be evaluated with regard to all topics of the preceding modules
including your ability to:

portray a full classification of all drugs;

demonstrate awareness of all effects in the application of all drugs;

reflect a thorough knowledge and understanding of the pharmacological mechanisms of action and
139
pharmacokinetics of all drugs;

explain drug interactions together with indications and contra-indications of specific drug treatments;

analyse and evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational alternatives;

show a patient-oriented approach in advising patients on effective drug use;

demonstrate the ability to retrieve the latest information on drugs for treating various disorders;

participate in a discussion (oral examination); and

apply social and ethical codes in drug selection and administration.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning.
Assessment methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the degree.
Module code: FLGX612
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Cardiovascular Physiology A
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge and insight into the mechanisms and integrated control of
the heart and vascular system, specifically the coronary circulation, heart muscle contraction and
vascular tone;

be able to understand and apply the principles of the cardiovascular physiology, and also understand
how the cardiovascular system functions during normal conditions and certain states of disease;

be able to analyse the cellular and sub-cellular elements involved in cardiovascular physiology and
their role during physiological and pathophysiological responses;

have the ability to fully utilise the literature, to identify problems scientifically and discuss them in an
integrated manner (for assessment of this outcome);

be prepared to practise the scientific method and be able to do research regarding cardiovascular
problems (for assessment of this outcome); and

be able to better understand circumstances in society that lead to the development of cardiovascular
diseases, and help solve such problems (for assessment of this outcome).
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX613
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Neurophysiology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge of neurophysiology;

understand the role of the nervous system in the control of body activities;

understand the special sensory functions such as vision, hearing, taste and smell, and be able to
assess the application of this knowledge, as well as pathology of a loss of function, and apply the
knowledge in industry as research worker or employee;

know the sensory, motor and integration functions of the nervous system. (This knowledge you should
be able to integrate in order to understand causative mechanisms such as the inception of obesity and
hypertension through hyper reactivity of the sympathetic nervous system);

understand the important role of the neurotransmitters or neurohormones and the way that these
affect emotional behaviour, nutritional behaviour and the inception of obesity (You should be able
explain, analyse and synthesise related information and also explain possible end-organ damage
such as in the vascular endothelium);

understand the identification of problems and independent solutions to problems;

understand the accurate processing and calculation of data/problems; and

Understand the responsibility that you as a prospective research worker have and pursue the
characteristics that go along with it, such as accuracy, thoroughness, punctuality and integrity.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
140
Module code: FLGX615
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Research Methodology (Physiology)
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of the basic research concepts, methods
and processes through collecting, analysing and integrating applicable information, formulation of a
research proposal and the style in which the dissertation / article / report has to be written, and the
compilation of a source list;

demonstrate the skill to identify a problem in the physiology and health industry, collect appropriate
information from various sources, and apply knowledge in order to plan and write a fundamental, not
too complicated research proposal in the prescribed format; and

Demonstrate the skill to communicate information based upon good argumentation and problemsolving strategies as prescribed for the mini-dissertation / article / report.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX617
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Cellular Physiology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge of and appropriate skills in relevant subjects within Cellular
Physiology;

be able to collect knowledge from the available literature and interpret it in an integrated manner;

be able to analyse Cellular Physiology problems and solve them in view of the knowledge available;
and

be able to communicate in writing and orally in a scientific manner
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX618
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Occupational Hygiene Monitoring A
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge and applicable skills within Occupational Hygiene;

be able to collect knowledge from the available literature and interpret it in an integrated manner;

be able to analyse Occupational Hygiene problems and solve them in view of the knowledge
available; and

be able to communicate in writing and orally in a scientific manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per mo ule.
Module code: FLGX621
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Cardiovascular Physiology C
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have an extensive and systematic knowledge of the cardiovascular system and pathology;

be able to understand the neurohumoral consequences of heart failure;

be able to analyse the biophysical, clinical and therapeutic aspects of arterial stiffness;

be able to understand the acute vascular events during certain cardiovascular incidents;

be able to propose interventions for the improvement of cardiovascular function; and

be able to analyse the health problems related to the vascular endothelium damage.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX622
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Toxicology A
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge and applicable skills within toxicology;

be able to collect knowledge from the available literature and interpret it in an integrated manner;

be able to analyse toxicological problems and solve them in view of the knowledge available

be able to communicate in writing and orally in a scientific manner.
141
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX624
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Toxicology B
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge and applicable skills within toxicology;

be able to collect knowledge from the available literature and interpret and analyse it in an integrated
manner;

be able to analyse toxicological problems and solve them in view of the knowledge available;

be able to communicate in writing and orally in a scientific manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX625
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Endocrinology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge of the nervous system and the endocrine system (neuroendocrinology);

be able to take part in discussions about the nervous system and the endocrine system and to do
appropriate analyses, and have extensive and systematic knowledge of the nervous system and the
endocrine system (neuro-endocrinology);

be able to take part in discussions about the nervous system and the endocrine system, and to
execute appropriate analyses, syntheses and evaluations with regard to the knowledge;

be able to solve complex problems within the context of endocrinology and to communicate
scientifically the solution individually or in group context in acceptable formats (verbally and/or nonverbally with IT), and to do a synthesis and evaluation with regard to the knowledge; and

be able to solve complex problems within the context of endocrinology and to communicate
scientifically the solution, individually or in group context, in acceptable formats (verbally and/or nonverbally with IT).
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX627
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Cardiovascular Physiology B
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge of the different views of the role of sex hormones on the
blood pressure, as well as be able to evaluate the different empirical (experimental) substructures;

be able to analyse the role of the endothelium function and dysfunction in the control of blood
pressure;

be able to make out the different therapeutic treatments of endothelium dysfunction and debate the
value of such treatments;

be able to evaluate the biology of the arterial wall and the relationship with arterial stiffness;

have knowledge of the pulse wave velocity and the arterial wall in order to evaluate its clinical
significance;

be able to evaluate the effect of aging on the cardiovascular system;

be able to evaluate the effect of physiological, environmental and disease factors on arterial rigidity;
and

be able to evaluate the working mechanism of leptin and the role of leptin in the development of
cardiovascular diseases.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX671
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Practical Project (Physiology)
Module outcomes:
After completion of the research project and composition of the treatise the student shall be able to:

use the research method;

compose a dissertation in article format in accordance with the instructions with regard to
documentation, argumentation, language and style; and
142

Integrate and understand the literature on the research topic.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One presentation (oral communication) and evaluation of the mini-dissertation.
Module code: MBWB681
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Biokinetics: Orthopaedics
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of anatomic, kinesiological and biomechanical
constructs as well as risk stratification, the etiology and identification of injuries and the clinical
management of final-phase rehabilitation;

within the multidisciplinary health team, effectively apply and implement the science-based methods of
investigation, diagnosis and optimising of functional abilities in the return to sport activities in the finalphase rehabilitation; and

Have the ability to effectively present academically professional work and communicate it to a variety
of patients and audiences by using appropriate academically professional reasoning.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWB682
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Biokinetics: Clinical
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base in exercise physiology,
pathophysiology and aetiology of chronic diseases and/or defects, as well as an intimate knowledge of
the final-phase rehabilitation and optimising of functional achievement within the current development
in the study field;

demonstrate an informed and critical understanding of basic pharmacological medication and
nutritional principles with regard to the specialisation field of Biokinetics, and acceptance of the
provisional nature of knowledge and the limits and limitations of the field;

demonstrate the ability to identify, analyse and implement activity, lifestyle and exercise constructs as
intervention modality by using evidence-based solutions and theory-driven arguments;

conduct effective application and implementation of the final-phase rehabilitation in the
multidisciplinary health team on the basis of the scientific methods of investigation, diagnosis and
optimising of functional abilities; and

demonstrate the ability to effectively present academic-professional work effectively and communicate
it to a variety of audiences by using appropriate academic-professional reasoning as well as suitable
IT media.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact.. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWB683
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Biokinetics Theory / Health
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of growth and
development throughout the total life cycle, health promotion, exercise psychology and wellness
constructs, appropriate improvement and intervention strategies in order to optimise performance, as
well as the operation of bio-ergonomic work physiology and physical selection within Biokinetics;

demonstrate skills in order to identify and analyse problems regarding the growth, health and wellness
143
of sports people and to propose solutions through activity and exercise constructs as intervention
modality;

apply appropriate optimising strategies within the multidisciplinary context based on science-based
methods of investigation, diagnosis and optimising of functional abilities;

identify the lack of information and therefore obtain information; perform a critical analysis, synthesis
and evaluation of quantitative and qualitative information; and utilise related sources in order to find a
solution for the demand; and

Present academically professional work effectively and communicate it to a variety of audiences using
appropriate academic professional reasoning and IT.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWB684
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Biokinetics: Professional Internship
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of practice, appropriate
improvement and intervention strategies with regard to optimising performance, rehabilitation and
care, risk analysis, return to sport, wellness, health promotion and illness prevention within the current
development in this field of study ;

implement all the facets of the profession with the practice of Biokinetics;

work together within a multidisciplinary health team;

establish, administer and manage an independent biokinetics practice based on specific management
and legal ethical principles as required by the Health Professions Council of South Africa; and

offer proof of completing an internship as determined by the Health Professions Council of South
Africa.
Mode of delivery Ffulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWK681
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Research methodology
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate extensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of the terminology used in
Human Movement Sciences through the development and execution of a mini research project;

develop a research proposal and collect information in the tracing, analysing and synthesis of the
relevant and recent research literature ;

identify, analyse and solve a research problem in the field of Human Movement Sciences through the
collection, processing, analysing of data and to interpret and communicate it by means of
professional academic journal-aimed research articles;

function ethically correct within the required parameters during the execution of the mini research
project.
Mode of delivery:
Modes of delivery for modules are fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from
one campus to students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
144
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWK682
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Kinderkinetics Theory
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of the neurological, as
well as motor control systems, motor development phases of 0 to 12-year-old children, motor
abnormalities and motor-related learning problems, appropriate evaluation and intervention methods,
the theoretical basis and composition (test elements) of evaluation batteries to evaluate normal as
well as abnormal development; causes, characteristics and evaluation methods of special populations
and of specific disabilities in children, kinanthropometric terminology, the importance, correct
collecting and reporting of kinanthropometric data with regard to the development of children with and
without special needs;

demonstrate skills in measuring and listing length, mass, skin folds, circumferences, height and length
and diameter measurements according to ISAK standards, as well as determining the body
composition of children adults and specific populations;

demonstrate skills to identify and analyse critical problems around the child‟s motor and physical
development to propose possible theory-driven solutions while the human dignity of the child is
protected throughout;

demonstrate the ability to collect, analyse and interpret scientific research data from literature and
case studies under supervision and use the results to evaluate and improve the child‟s motor and
physical development and body composition; and

in an ethically responsible manner generate, defend and communicate in writing and orally solutions
that concern the child‟s physical, motor and body composition.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWK683
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Kinderkinetics Practical
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of the neurological as well as motor control
systems, motor development phases of 0 to 12-year-old children, motor abnormalities and motorrelated learning problems, suitable evaluation and intervention methods (for home programmes as
well), progression in lesson compilation, selection of suitable programme material, the theoretical
basis and composition (test elements) of evaluation batteries to evaluate normal as well as abnormal
development, causes, characteristics and evaluation methods of special populations and of specific
disabilities in children;

demonstrate the skills to identify and analyse critical problems regarding the child„s motor and
physical development and generate solutions in the form of suitable Kinderkinetics intervention and
development programmes in an ethically responsible manner;

demonstrate the ability to collect, analyse and interpret scientific research data under supervision from
literature and case studies and then use the results to improve the child‟s motor and physical
development;

apply evaluation methods with regard to the neuro-motor development of children 0-12 years old and
develop kinderkinetics programmes for a variety of child populations and communicate them in writing
and orally in a prescribed report format to an audience and other professional people and peers and
evaluate and improve the programme and feedback where and if necessary; and

generate solutions that involve the child‟s physical, motor and body composition in an ethically
responsible manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
145
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWK684
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Professional Internship
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:
demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of Kinderkinetics theory and Kinderkinetics
practice and apply it in practice in a number of prescribed case studies with regard to baby massage
and baby stimulation, brain development programmes for toddlers, remedial programmes for children
with special needs, development movements, sport development programmes for children with
special needs, sport development and wellness programmes for children with and without special
needs;

apply the standards with which a practice and Kinderkineticist has to comply in order to be accredited
and registered, can equip and maintain own practice by selecting appliances, maintaining equipment,
drawing up a budget, adhering to administrative and safety requirements for a practice, demonstrate
knowledge and understanding of current programmes for Kinderkinetics, the marketing of
Kinderkinetics services in various ways to other professional people to obtain multidisciplinary
collaboration, and communicating knowledge to parents;

demonstrate skills to use different prescribed assessment techniques in Kinderkinetics by applying
them to a prescribed number of case studies with different physical and motor needs;

evaluate the assessment results of a prescribed number of physical and motor needs and report on
them. This assessment and reporting must be done with and without supervision;

demonstrate the ability to collect, analyse and interpret scientific research data under supervision from
literature and case studies and use the results to manage a Kinderkinetics business; and

generate solutions that involve the presentation, assessment and reporting of Kinderkinetics
programmes and the management of a practice in an ethically responsible and value-driven manner
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWK685
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Exercise Physiology
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of aspects of exercise physiology and
anatomy that relate to child-specific programming, as well as to special exercise guidelines and
biological maturation aspects when compiling, substantiating, analysing, evaluating and adapting as
well as executing these types of programmes;

demonstrate information and research skills in problem-solving, and use literature to provide evidence
of the periodising and execution of programmes for special needs; correctly use concepts,
terminologies, convention, formats, etc. in compiling/formulating solutions/programmes; and

demonstrate that all forms of communication are based on an established value system and that
action is ethically correct and within the desired parameters in planning programmes, executing them
and taking other related aspects into consideration.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the prescriptions in the study guide for
each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be written according to the guidelines
in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic calendar. Students write one final
examination at the end of a semester according to the academic timetable. A second examination
opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first opportunity and/or have failed the first
examination.
146
Module code: MBWK686
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Child Welfare and Health Promotion
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate extensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of the terminology used in child
welfare, the therapeutic process, behaviour adaptations to enhance quality of life, and of the effect of
music on the development of a child, and improve the self-concept of the child by improving motor
skills, the theoretical base and the practical application of the principles of total welfare;

demonstrate skills to identify and analyse critical problems around the child's total welfare and
generate solutions in an ethically responsible manner;

demonstrate the ability to collect, analyse and interpret scientific research data under supervision from
literature and case studies and use the results to make suggestions to improve the total welfare and
health of the child; and

develop therapeutic recreation programmes for a variety of child populations and communicate this in
writing and orally to an audience of peers and evaluate and improve the programme and feedback
where and if necessary, and generate solutions in an ethically responsible manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWS682
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Sport Physiology
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of sport physiology with specific
specialisation in physiological exercise adjustments; the influence of gender, altitude, ergogenic aids
and travelling on different adjustments regarding exercise; thermoregulation that takes place while
exercising, as well as scientific and recent guidelines for nutrition that influence exercise adjustments;

demonstrate skills to identify, evaluate and solve complex practice-related sport-specific problems by
taking programming and specific exercise guidelines, as well as performance goals, into consideration
in the compilation, substantiation, analysis, evaluation and adaptation of different types of
programmes;

be qualified, individually or as part of a group, to research and analyse information in appropriate
literature and use it in the planning of programmes aimed at particular sport-specific needs. Be able to
substantiate the choice and composition of the plans and activities and communicate the
recommendations in writing and orally by means of appropriate IT to an audience of peers and
professionals; and

demonstrate in all forms of communication that an established value system is in place and that the
planning and execution of programmes are within the desired parameters, and that other associated
aspects have been taken into consideration.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWS683
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Biomechanics
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of neurophysiology, methods and
techniques for identifying talent, growth and biomechanical principles, as well as the Dartfish video
analysis programme;

demonstrate skills for combining and applying motor learning and biomechanics and the Dartfish
147
video analysis programme in analysing, evaluating and correcting sport technique/movement
execution as found in complex and practice-related problems;

obtain relevant information as an individual or a member of a team by using a variety of research
literature to find evidence-based and ethically accountable solutions for practice-related case studies,
and communicate the information and recommendations in writing and orally to an audience of peers
and professionals using appropriate IT.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWS684
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Sport Psychology
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of coaching philosophies, sport psychology
and appropriate evaluation instruments for evaluating sports people;

be competent to electronically capture, analyse and interpret sport psychology data and information
after an evaluation in order to compile an electronic report and/or individual/team consultation session
in which evidence-based and theory-driven recommendations are made and applied; and

analyse, interpret and synthesise different coaching philosophies in order to develop a personal life,
sport and sport science philosophy that can be applied to individuals and teams in a sport science
practice when a sport psychology consultant/sport scientist operates in an ethically professional
manner from an established value system.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWS685
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Sport Science Internship
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

integrate, synthesise and apply a comprehensive and systematic knowledge, understanding and skills
regarding a variety of sport science directed subject disciplines in order to offer sports people/students
sport scientific services/programmes in real exercise environments; and

act in an ethically correct manner within the desired parameters when functioning as a sport scientist
in training.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: MBWS686
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Sport Science Practice
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge of the qualities, skills and processes
involved in the planning and functioning of an undertaking in the sport business as well as of sport
physiology, anatomy and anthropometry
148

demonstrate skills to identify and analyse problems among sports people by means of video analysis
and communicate the findings in writing and orally to the sports people, coaches and sport scientists;

demonstrate the ability to plan, set up and manage a sport science business;

correctly use specific exercise guidelines, performance goals, concepts, terminologies, convention,
format, etc. in the composition, substantiation, analysis, evaluation and adaptation, as well as
execution of sport-specific tests and programmes; and

operate in an ethically correct manner within the desired parameters when functioning in the sport
science practice.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: PSYC671
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Psychometrics
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base and critical understanding of factors
that helped shape psychological assessment internationally and in South Africa, and which continue
to steer it today, as well as the nature and process of psychological evaluation;

demonstrate the skill to rate the utility of tests according to their psychometric properties, and evaluate
and interpret the performance of individuals in various tests or test batteries (Students should also be
able to use the basic properties and technical requirements of tests, including the way in which tests
and their testing norms are developed, as individuals and in group context, to develop a new
psychological measuring instrument to be used in a complex and real-life problem situation.);

demonstrate the ability to combine test scores, do cross-cultural test adjustments and interpret these;
manage tests and ethical standards; take care of administrative arrangements involved in assessment
procedures; and communicate test results to an audience of peers in the form of written research
reports, or orally while using appropriate IT;

demonstrate the ability, individually or in group context, to undertake appropriate literature searches to
serve as frame of reference when reasoning about the above aspects; and

reflect on the impact of the study material on the self as a person and as a future care giver.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYC672
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Psychological Evaluation
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base and critical understanding of the
processes of psychological evaluation aimed at providing an holistic picture of the child, adolescent
and/or adult;

demonstrate a coherent and critical understanding of various methods of evaluating psychological
functioning and apply them ethically;

apply a comprehensive knowledge of the core methods of psychological evaluation to clearly defined
unfamiliar case studies;

critically evaluate qualitative and quantitative outcomes of psychological evaluation and syn- thesise
them into a conclusion contained in a well-structured report meant for probable reader;

demonstrate the ability independently to garner information from appropriate research articles and
other reliable sources, critically to analyse the information and synthesise it, and to present findings in
relevant academic and professional discourse.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
149
Module code: PSYC673
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Positive Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:
 demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge base of Positive Psychology/Psychofortology as a movement
in the field of Psychology, as well as the important paradigms, theories, concepts and ethical aspects
that have a bearing on psychological health, and to apply them in order to identify and facilitate the
functioning of the self and others in a multicultural context;

apply relevant theories/research in cultural context while being sensitive to biopsychological coherence
in order to contextualise behavioural problems and facilitate psychosocial wellness from a positive
psychological/psychofortological perspective;
 demonstrate the ability to resolve complex and poorly defined modern-day problems that relate to
psychological and psychosocial health, by using appropriate procedures and reliable evidence from a
critical analysis of various theories in Positive Psychology/Psycofortology, as well as communicate the
information in a reliable and coherent manner, both orally and in writing, thereby providing evidence of
effective and critical reasoning; and
 apply a variety of specifically selected research-based strategies in a moral-ethical and culture-sensitive
way in order to promote positive psychological wellness in individuals, groups and communities while
recognising important biopsychosocial associations and being sensitive to, among other things,
collectivistic and individualistic value systems.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYC674
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Research Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:
 demonstrate understanding of research being planned and carried out from a specific paradigmatic
perspective which represents the researcher‟s philosophic and conceptual framework and which is
reflected in his/her assumptions about the world and the research process;
 demonstrate a well-funded knowledge base of all aspects relating to research, as well as the phases of
the research process;
 apply research skills in a practical and ethical way, thereby demonstrating the ability to effectively select
appropriate research methods for collecting and dealing with data in real-life situations;
 present the research findings orally in an innovative way, as well as produce a coherent written report
which demonstrates a critical understanding of using research-based solutions and theory;
 identify when institution variance or two-way ANOVA (analysis of variance) is used; and

identify the purpose of multiple regression methods and differentiate between the various types and
assumptions.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYC675
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Intervention Techniques
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to –

have an advanced knowledge and understanding of the theory of relevant short-term intervention
techniques (six-phase crisis intervention model);

demonstrate the ability to rate intervention theories and effectively apply core procedures, actions and
techniques in various socio-cultural contexts;

demonstrate the ability independently to garner information from relevant research articles and other
reliable sources, critically analyse and synthesise the information, and present the findings in
appropriate academic and professional discourse; and

demonstrate a clear value system and ethical code of conduct in all modes of communication and
behaviour.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods: Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
150
Module code: PSYC676
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Theoretical Perspectives on the Helping Relationship
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive knowledge of and insight into various models and processes of
psychological aid rendering;

apply this knowledge of various therapeutic theories and techniques to unfamiliar case studies,
develop suitable interventions on the basis of theory-driven arguments and communicate them in
reports according to the prescribed conventions of the subject; and

demonstrate information garnering and processing skills for finalising written assignments.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYC677
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Community Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of what community psychology comprises
and what may be regarded as geographic and social communities;

demonstrate competence to suggest appropriate interventions based on the conceptual models for
community psychology;

demonstrate skills to facilitate, plan and evaluate community competence by using suitable research
methods; and

be sensitive to the contextual embedment of communities in the macro environment characterised by
poverty, violence, HIV and homelessness.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYC678
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Psychopathology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive knowledge and understanding of Western and African perspectives on
the various forms of psychopathology in children, adolescents and adults;

demonstrate skills to recognise, analyse and correctly diagnose possible etiologies relating to
psychopathology in case studies;

make meaningful and relevant referrals for continued and advanced intervention after studying case
studies; and

demonstrate ethical behaviour in all actions and base actions on an established value system.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYC679
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Ethics and Professional Conduct
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base and critical understanding of the
various pieces of legislation, ethical principles and professional codes of conduct that give direction to
psychology as a profession, both internationally and in South Africa;

demonstrate skills to identify ethical, legal and professional dilemmas in a complex and real-life
problem situation and arrive at an acceptable outcome;

demonstrate information garnering and processing skills in terms of finalising oral and written
assignments; and

demonstrate a clear value system and ethical code of conduct in all modes of communication and
behaviour.
Mode of delivery:
Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
151
Module code: PSYC681
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Facilitation of Community Wellness
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate knowledge and skills to identify needs, shortcomings, strengths and/or sources of
individuals, groups or communities, garner information and interpret and analyse the data obtained in
this way; and

plan suitable interventions in a way that is ethically responsible on the basis of the data gathered,
suggest implementation plans, evaluate interventions and make adjustments according to the
available feedback.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH611
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Psychological evaluation
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module, the student will demonstrate the following:
•
integrated knowledge of and engagement in psychological evaluation and a critical understanding and
application of processes relevant to psychological evaluation that aim at achieving a holistic view of
the person;
•
the ability to evaluate the use of tests on the grounds of their psychometric characteristics/properties
and to evaluate and interpret the results of individuals in different tests or different test batteries;
•
the ability to develop a psychological test, individually and in a group context, for the use of a
complex, realistic problem;
•
the ability to communicate verbally and/or in writing to an audience of equals by using relevant IT,
about the following: the combination of tests results, cross cultural translation and adaptation of tests,
the management of tests and ethical standards, administrative procedures involved in assessment,
the communication of tests results and the future of psychological assessment;
•
the ability of critical thinking and understanding of ethical consideration in psychological evaluation
(intellectual and scholastic capabilities, aptitudes and interests, personality and interpersonal
functioning) within different cultural and social environments;
•
the ability to apply your advanced knowledge of the central methods of psychological evaluation to
well-defined but unknown case studies by using the most applicable procedures and techniques of
psychological evaluation;
•
the ability to critically analyse qualitative and quantitative outcomes of psychological evaluation and
synthesise a conclusion into a well-structured report and referral letter to an applicable professional,
while demonstrating an awareness of the audience of the report and letter;
•
self-regulated skills (including independently obtain, critically analyse and synthesise information from
appropriate research articles and other credible sources and to use appropriate academic or
professional discourse to present findings; reflect on the impact of the learning material on you as a
person and future helper.)
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH612
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Community psychology: Theory
Module outcomes:
On completion of the module you should be able to:
•
a critical understanding that communities, which are construed as geographically located areas, as
well as social or interest groups having similar values, beliefs, practices and cultures, are embedded
in various diverse contexts;
•
an integrated knowledge of the theories underlying community psychology as well as relational wellbeing; the core values underpinning Community Psychology as well as relational well-being;, as well
as the ethical considerations applicable in Community Psychology;
•
presentation and communication skills; and
•
the ability to illustrate that learning on community level is a reflective and transformative activity.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a formal examination.
152
Module code: PSYH613
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied positive psychology
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module, the student will demonstrate the following:
•
knowledge and informed understanding of Positive Psychology/Psychofortology as a movement within
the field of Psychology, as well as the important paradigms, theories, concepts and ethical facets
related to psychological health in order to apply it to the identification and facilitation of personal and
others‟ functioning within a multicultural context;
•
the ability to apply relevant theories/research in cultural context with sensitivity to bio-psycho-social
relationships in order to contextualize behavioural problems and facilitate psycho-social thriving from a
positive psychological/psychofortological perspective;
•
the ability to solve complex and ill-defined real-world problems related to psychological and psychosocial health, using appropriate procedures and sound evidence drawn from a critical analysis of
different theories within Positive Psychology/Psychofortology, and communicate the information
reliably and coherently, both orally and in writing, giving proof of effective and critical reasoning;
•
the ability to apply a variety of specifically selected evidence-based strategies in a moral-ethical and
culture-sensitive way in order to advance positive psychological flourishing in individuals, groups and
communities while recognizing important bio-psycho-social associations, and with sensitivity to,
among others, collectivist and individualist value systems.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH621
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Intervention techniques
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module students should be able to:
•
an advanced knowledge and understanding of the theoretical and practical application of the hybrid
crisis intervention model in a socio-cultural context;
•
the ability to critically engage with intervention theories and effectively select and apply essential
procedures, operations and techniques to a variety of specific situations, e.g. posttraumatic stress
disorder, lethality, sexual assault, partner violence, chemical dependency and bereavement;
•
the ability to apply advanced knowledge of brief-term intervention and ethical conduct to case studies
and if needed identify applicable support structures for referral;
•
the ability to independently obtain, critically analyse and synthesise information from appropriate
research articles and other credible sources using appropriate academic or professional discourse to
present findings; and
•
a clear value system and code of ethical conduct in all forms of communication and interaction.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH622
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Theoretical perspectives on rendering help
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module students should be able to:
•
comprehensive knowledge of and insight into various models and processes of psychological
helping/counselling.
•
the ability to apply this knowledge of various therapeutic theories and techniques to unfamiliar case
studies, develop suitable interventions on the basis of theory-driven ethically sound arguments and
communicate them in reports according to the prescribed conventions of the subject; and
•
information gathering and processing skills for finalising assignments.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH623
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Child and adolescent psychology
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module students should be able to:
•
a thorough understanding of concepts, theories and key terminologies used in Developmental
Psychology in order to communicate information reliably, coherently and ethically, in both oral and
written assessment tasks and have an integrated knowledge base of the physical, cognitive and
153
psychosocial development of human beings in every stage of the life cycle in assessment tasks and
class presentations
•
integrated knowledge of parental pathology and a critical understanding and application of the effect
thereof on child and adolescent development
•
the ability to understand, describe and explain the effect of modern technologies, such as cell phones
and internet on the child and adolescent's development on physical, cognitive, social and emotional
level
•
the ability of critical thinking and understanding of all ethical considerations in dealing with children
and adolescents in general and children and adolescents culturally diverse families.
•
the ability to explain, discuss and describe the challenges culturally diverse families, gay/lesbianstepfamilies and non-marriage families experience from different social contexts – politically, socially,
religious and economic ,
•
an integrated knowledge of the role of biological / neuropsychology in developmental psychology;
•
the ability to critically evaluate, analyse and synthesise information on families in adverse situations to
be able to solve simulated problems individually or in groups.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Research and ethics: Theory and practice
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module students should be able to:
•
an advanced knowledge and understanding of the theoretical underpinnings informing qualitative and
quantitative research methods;
•
the ability to define, analyse, evaluate, select and apply relevant research methodologies and
concepts related to research in psychology including qualitative and quantitative techniques of data
gathering and analysis,
•
logical reasoning skills and ethical sensitivity in the conception, design and carrying out of an
empirical research project focusing on community wellness under the supervision of an academic staff
member,
•
the ability to develop a research report on the conducted research according to academic and
practice-related standards.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a
formal examination.
Module code: PSYH672
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Psychopathology
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module students should be able to:
•
comprehensive, integrated knowledge and understanding of Western and African perspectives on the
various forms of psychopathology in children, adolescents and adults;
•
an ability to critically interrogate multiple sources of knowledge within the field of child, adolescent and
adult psychopathology, and critically evaluate and review that knowledge and the manner in which the
knowledge was produced;
•
skills to recognise, analyse and correctly diagnose possible aetiologies relating to child, adolescent
and adult psychopathology in case studies;
•
the ability to make meaningful and relevant referrals for continued and advanced intervention after
studying case studies; and
•
ethical behaviour in all actions and base these actions on an established value system.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Module code: RKKX673
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Recreation Management
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of practical skills with regard to the
presentation of recreation services;

use effective and appropriate practical skills in order to successfully present and manage recreation
services in a professional manner;

demonstrate a coherent and critical understanding of the science, research and technology and the
154
ability to combine that with the necessary theoretical expertise in order to identify and solve known
problems in the recreation practice; and

master sensitive issues in the facilitation practice in a professional and ethically accountable manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: RKKX677
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Therapeutic Recreation
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base of therapeutic recreation within a
multidisciplinary relationship, together with the philosophical basis for effective service delivery, and
combine this knowledge with the necessary theoretical expertise to identify, analyse, evaluate and
solve practice-oriented problems;

successfully master effective and appropriate planning skills within the systems approach of service
delivery in order to implement a variety of interventions;

handle sensitive issues in the Therapeutic Recreation practice in an ethical and responsible manner;

collect, analyse and interpret scientific research data under supervision from literature and case
studies and use the results for positive leisure time functioning.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: RKKX678
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Advanced Facilitation
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of experiential learning, as well as the
characteristics and skills that a facilitator must have;

demonstrate effective and functional processing skills to successfully facilitate a variety of leisure time
programmes for target groups;

demonstrate a coherent and critical understanding of science, research and technology and the ability
to combine that with the necessary theoretical expertise in order to identify and solve problems; and

master sensitive issues in the facilitation practice in an ethically accountable manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: RKKX679
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Leisure Programming
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base and understanding of the handling of
leisure time programming, operating a practice and applicable strategies to optimise leisure time
service delivery;

demonstrate effective and functional planning skills in order to effectively apply leisure time service
delivery and programmes within a variety of communities and populations;
155

demonstrate the ability to identify and analyse problems with regard to the planning and implementing
of leisure time service delivery and offer theory-driven solutions on the basis of research and
technology;

solve problems regarding leisure time programming in an ethically accountable manner in order to
contribute to the promotion of recreation service delivery in South Africa; and

collect, analyse and interpret scientific research data under supervision from literature and case
studies and use the results for positive leisure time functioning
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: RKKX681
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Applied Recreation Management
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge of service delivery and management in the
recreation environment;

apply effective and appropriate management skills during the planning, organising and presentation of
recreation services;

demonstrate a coherent and critical understanding of the science, research and technology and the
ability to combine that with the necessary theoretical expertise in order to identify and solve problems;

solve problems regarding recreation management in an ethically accountable manner in order to
contribute to the promotion of recreation service delivery in South Africa.
Mode of delivery Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods:
Assessment for obtaining a participation mark is done according to the
prescriptions in the study guide for each module. Formal assessment (class tests and assignments) will be
written according to the guidelines in the study guides and at the times scheduled for them in the academic
calendar. Students write one final examination at the end of a semester according to the academic
timetable. A second examination opportunity will be available to students who have missed the first
opportunity and/or have failed the first examination.
Module code: VGHB671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Housing and Community Development
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

show a coherent and critical comprehension of housing and community development so that (i)
possible solutions/recommendations for specific consumer problems regarding housing and
community development may be offered, and (ii) the implications for consumer behaviour based on
this may be critically evaluated;

be able to identify complex and/or actual problems and questions in relevant approaches regarding
housing and community development upon which the planning and arranging of living space is based;

show knowledge and insight regarding the housing needs of communities so that the connection
between housing satisfaction and quality of life will enable you to handle similar questions in practice
through the analysis, evaluation, synthesis and integration of information;

be able to identify, analyse and critically to evaluate and justify with evidence-driven arguments
research literature and statutory regulations relevant to housing and community development;

demonstrate an ethically correct attitude with regard to the manner in which you approach the
consumer by making recommendations acceptable to both parties; and

demonstrate the principles and values underlying decision-making and housing law, as well as
economic aspects in an academic-professional study. Communication takes place in the form of a
written report and an oral presentation to suitable audiences within the context of consumer
counselling regarding types of housing at the micro level.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
156
Module code: VGHB672
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Consumer Resource Management
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

demonstrate effective skills at retrieving, processing, interpreting and integrating academic literature
relevant to consumer resource management;

show a coherent and critical comprehension of the principles that apply to resource management in
order to (i) understand the consumer better and to critically evaluate their behaviour and decisionmaking process, and thereby (ii) to make meaningful recommendations based upon this evaluation;

identify, analyse and investigate complex problems and questions in resource management behaviour
and offer evidence-driven solutions from theory-driven arguments;

demonstrate and orally communicate the principles and values underlying family welfare and family
resource management;

in order to facilitate the homeowner's life, evaluate and analyse computerisation of the domestic
environment and all the most recent developments in the area of domestic apparatus;

evaluate environmental conservation as well as responsible management of scarce resources in order
to address sound resource management as well as consumer counselling;

present lectures suitable for a variety of audiences in a clear and meaningful fashion.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VGHB673
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Interior Design
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

show a coherent and critical comprehension of the principles of environmental psychology so that (i) a
particular built environment problem may be investigated and (ii) on-going research based on this may
be critically evaluated;

be able to identify, analyse and investigate complex and/or actual problems and questions in
environmental psychology within the field of consumer studies, and also to offer evidence-driven
solutions from theory-driven arguments;

identify, analyse, integrate and independently evaluate research in environmental psychology by
executing a particular research survey;

demonstrate effective skills at retrieving, processing, interpreting and integrating information with
regard to academic literature relevant to consumer sciences in the field of environmental psychology;
and

demonstrate the principles and values underlying scientific research in an academically professional
research project, as well as a follow-up report, and communicate it orally to a variety of audiences by
using different genres appropriate to the context.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VKLE671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Specialised Textile Studies
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should be able to:

have extensive and systematic knowledge of the physical textile environment to be found in the
consumer sciences discipline through the analysis, evaluation, synthesis and integration of
information, which will enable the student to write reports on various given topics scientifically and
using correct terminology;

identify, analyse and critically evaluate with evidence-driven arguments research literature relevant to
new developments in the textile field, and report on these;

determine usefulness criteria for specifically chosen textile products;

identify and apply suitable textile tests for the chosen textile and account for it in a report; and

demonstrate an ethically correct attitude with regard to the manner in which the experimental work
was done.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
157
Module code: VKLE672
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Advanced Fashion Industry
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

show a coherent and critical comprehension of the principles, as well as a variety of methods,
techniques of fashion purchasing terminology in the retail environment, so that the consumer's needs /
problems in this environment may be examined and satisfied / solved through the application of critical
research techniques and well considered purchasing processes;

identify, analyse and investigate complex problems and questions in the fashion retail purchasing
environment, and offer evidence-driven solutions from theory-driven arguments;

identify, analyse, integrate and independently evaluate fashion trend sources and information in order
to apply it to a specific retail environment; and

demonstrate in oral communication and personal decision-making the principles underlying marketing,
as well as the support of international markets and various purchasing techniques.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VNAM671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Consumer Research Methods and Scientific Writing
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

show a coherent and critical comprehension of the principles of research in consumer sciences, as
well as a variety of methods, techniques and technology, so that (i) a choice may be made from these
that will be suitable for a research problem in the field under investigation, and (ii) based on this,
current research may be critically evaluated;

be able to identify, analyse and investigate complex and/or actual problems and questions in
consumer sciences, and also to offer evidence-driven solutions from theory-driven arguments;

identify, analyse, integrate and independently evaluate quantitative and qualitative data by executing a
particular research survey;

demonstrate effective skills at retrieving, processing, interpreting and integrating information with
regard to academic literature relevant to consumer sciences;

have extensive and systematic knowledge of the art, style and structure of scientific writing, facilitating
its practical application to the writing of documents through the analysis, evaluation, synthesis and
integration of information, which will enable you scientifically to complete the honours project report
and other written assignments;

be able to identify, analyse and critically to evaluate and justify with evidence-driven arguments
research literature relevant to consumer sciences; and

demonstrate an ethically correct attitude with regard to the manner in which they exploit, interpret and
integrate literature, as well as the way in which they undertake consumer-directed study.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
VNAV671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Research Project – Research Report - Presentation
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

demonstrate a coherent and critical comprehension with regard to the execution of research in
consumer behaviour;

select the most appropriate qualitative and quantitative research methods to scientifically investigate a
research problem for the honours research project;

be able to identify, analyse and investigate complex and/or actual problems and questions in
consumer studies, and also to offer evidence-driven solutions from theory-driven and research-driven
arguments;

do a critical evaluation of research problems, investigate it practically through field-work research
during the honours research project, and offer recommendations based thereupon by means of
written and oral scientific communication;

in the practical execution or research identify, analyse, interpret and apply research literature relevant
to the field of consumer behaviour as well as the consumer science disciplines (food, clothing and
interior); and

demonstrate an ethically correct attitude with regard to the manner in which they undertake and
present consumer-directed study.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
158
Module code: VOED676
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Nutrigenetics
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

display an extensive and systematic knowledge in the field of Critically evaluate and analyse the
interaction of different known genetic and epigenetic deviations within the diet and their effect on
nutrition-related illnesses;

apply the specific knowledge of human molecular genetics (DNA, chromosome function and structure,
as well as the central dogma of molecular biology) in the development of “personal" diets for the
improvement of individual as opposed to public health;

apply a cohesive and critical knowledge of the most important terms, Rules, concepts, principles and
theories of population genetics in a nutrition genetics context with respect to public health;

understand the ethical, legal and social implications of "nutrigenetics” research and individual nutrition
when an experimental strategy is selected and implemented by using the most important techniques
in human molecular genetics; and

develop communication and presentation skills through scientific debate on current and relevant
nutrogenetics topics by means of a seminar in order to develop his or her opinion and defend it
scientifically.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Integrated assessment to ensure that the aim of the qualification is achieved will
take place through various strategies:

individual as well as group assignments involving creativity, knowledge retrieval and application using
appropriate methods and implementation of a computer, group communication and reporting that will
contribute to a participation mark;

individual and group discussions in class that, with reference to the previous point, will assess the
development of the student‟s scientific communication skills that contribute to a participation mark;

written and/or oral mid-year and final exams on theoretical subject knowledge, practical problemsolving skills and experimental abilities – questions that test critical outcomes like the identification
and solving of problems, responsible decision-making and critical and creative reasoning, which
contribute to the participation mark, are emphasised in particular;

a research report proving that the student is familiar with the scientific research method and the
documentation thereof, contributes to the module mark;

exams are written at the end of each semester during official exam times, as applicable;

all exams (papers), as well as the research report, are moderated externally after each examination;

only one exam will be written by all students on the same day at the same time, with the second
opportunity paper as the only alternative option; and

students may apply to the exam division (or appropriate division) to write exams at examination
centres other than the Potchefstroom Campus.
Module code: VOED677
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Nutrition Epidemiology
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate extensive and systematic knowledge of nutrition epidemiology by explaining the main
theoretical and conceptual frameworks within nutrition epidemiology;

conduct epidemiological studies in the field of nutrition while the strengths and limitations of the
method are taken into consideration;

define the exposure and outcomes of the nutritional status of a population, the epidemiological
approach to the cause of diseases, and the methodological considerations in the planning of the
study; and

in an independent, ethical and responsible manner, carry out an epidemiological analysis of the
nutritional disparity in the world of health and communicate the results to the community and leaders
with the aid of electronic media.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Integrated assessment to ensure that the aim of the qualification is achieved will
take place through various strategies:

individual as well as group assignments involving creativity, knowledge retrieval and application using
appropriate methods and implementation of a computer, group communication and reporting that will
contribute to a participation mark;

individual and group discussions in class that, with reference to the previous point, will assess the
development of the student‟s scientific communication skills that contribute to a participation mark;
159

written and/or oral mid-year and final exams on theoretical subject knowledge, practical problemsolving skills and experimental abilities – questions that test critical outcomes like the identification
and solving of problems, responsible decision-making and critical and creative reasoning, which
contribute to the participation mark, are emphasised in particular;

a research report proving that the student is familiar with the scientific research method and the
documentation thereof, contributes to the module mark;

exams are written at the end of each semester during official exam times, as applicable;

all exams (papers), as well as the research report, are moderated externally after each examination;

only one exam will be written by all students on the same day at the same time, with the second
opportunity paper as the only alternative option; and

students may apply to the exam division (or appropriate division) to write exams at examination
centres other than the Potchefstroom Campus.
Module code: VOED678
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Research report
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate extensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of a variety of research
methods, techniques and technologies in order to make the correct choice for the specific nutritionrelated research question that has to be answered;

apply the above knowledge to develop and process current research and peer-reviewed publications
in an effective and efficient way in order to use it in own research;

demonstrate capabilities to identify problems with regard to nutrition, analyse and evaluate them
critically, collect and process the necessary quantitative and/or qualitative data and introduce ethically
responsible solutions; and

demonstrate skills to present and communicate professional nutrition-related work in an effective way
by using a variety of aids for a variety of audiences.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Integrated assessment to ensure that the aim of the qualification is achieved will
take place through various strategies:

individual as well as group assignments involving creativity, knowledge retrieval and application using
appropriate methods and implementation of a computer, group communication and reporting that will
contribute to a participation mark;

individual and group discussions in class that, with reference to the previous point, will assess the
development of the student‟s scientific communication skills that contribute to a participation mark;

written and/or oral mid-year and final exams on theoretical subject knowledge, practical problemsolving skills and experimental abilities – questions that test critical outcomes like the identification
and solving of problems, responsible decision-making and critical and creative reasoning, which
contribute to the participation mark, are emphasised in particular;

a research report proving that the student is familiar with the scientific research method and the
documentation thereof, contributes to the module mark;

exams are written at the end of each semester during official exam times, as applicable;

all exams (papers), as well as the research report, are moderated externally after each examination;

only one exam will be written by all students on the same day at the same time, with the second
opportunity paper as the only alternative option; and

students may apply to the exam division (or appropriate division) to write exams at examination
centres other than the Potchefstroom Campus.
Module code: VOED679
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Nutrition at public health level
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate comprehensive and systematic knowledge and understanding of the complex
relationship between nutrition and health, and both super nutrition and malnutrition; This includes the
nutrition transition in developing countries, as well as the exceptional vulnerability for chronic lifestyle
diseases in developing populations, the extra burden of illness, and the global and South African
incidence figures of diseases; The student should also understand the factors contributing to
nutritional security and the influence of nutritional security on nutritional status;

demonstrate a coherent and critical understanding of nutritional epidemiology and the determination
of nutritional status within the public health framework;

evaluate and interpret dietary intake data in epidemiological studies;

demonstrate comprehensive knowledge on food and food policies and analyse the policy critically in
160
order to apply it to problem-solving in case studies; and
analyse the most pertinent public health nutritional problems in South Africa and apply a scientifically
based health nutrition cycle in order to interpret existing knowledge, formulate goals and
communicate responsible conclusions and recommendations.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Integrated assessment to ensure that the aim of the qualification is achieved will
take place through various strategies:

individual as well as group assignments involving creativity, knowledge retrieval and application using
appropriate methods and implementation of a computer, group communication and reporting that will
contribute to a participation mark;

individual and group discussions in class that, with reference to the previous point, will assess the
development of the student‟s scientific communication skills that contribute to a participation mark;

written and/or oral mid-year and final exams on theoretical subject knowledge, practical problemsolving skills and experimental abilities – questions that test critical outcomes like the identification
and solving of problems, responsible decision-making and critical and creative reasoning, which
contribute to the participation mark, are emphasised in particular;

a research report proving that the student is familiar with the scientific research method and the
documentation thereof, contributes to the module mark;

exams are written at the end of each semester during official exam times, as applicable;

all exams (papers), as well as the research report, are moderated externally after each examination;

only one exam will be written by all students on the same day at the same time, with the second
opportunity paper as the only alternative option; and
students may apply to the exam division (or appropriate division) to write exams at examination centres
other than the Potchefstroom Campus.
Module code: VOED680
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Advanced Nutrition
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate extensive and systematic knowledge of the evidence-based process that is used to
make health claims or public health recommendations; The student must also be able to give
reasons for the contribution of different study designs in this process;

write a systematic review about a specific topic by comprehensively and systematically collecting and
processing all the literature published on a specific topic; The quality of the research methodology
must also be critically evaluated;

interpret scientific evidence and make justifiable scientifically based conclusions and
recommendations through scientific communication of the process and the evidence (written);

implement knowledge and skills regarding the above in an ethically accountable manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Integrated assessment to ensure that the aim of the qualification is achieved will take place through various
strategies:

individual as well as group assignments involving creativity, knowledge retrieval and application using
appropriate methods and implementation of a computer, group communication and reporting that will
contribute to a participation mark;

individual and group discussions in class that, with reference to the previous point, will assess the
development of the student‟s scientific communication skills that contribute to a participation mark;

written and/or oral mid-year and final exams on theoretical subject knowledge, practical problemsolving skills and experimental abilities – questions that test critical outcomes like the identification
and solving of problems, responsible decision-making and critical and creative reasoning, which
contribute to the participation mark, are emphasised in particular;

a research report proving that the student is familiar with the scientific research method and the
documentation thereof, contributes to the module mark;

exams are written at the end of each semester during official exam times, as applicable;

all exams (papers), as well as the research report, are moderated externally after each examination;

only one exam will be written by all students on the same day at the same time, with the second
opportunity paper as the only alternative option; and

students may apply to the exam division (or appropriate division) to write exams at examination
centres other than the Potchefstroom Campus.

161
Module code: VOED681
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Sport Nutrition
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base of muscle physiology and energy
metabolism during physical activity;

analyse an athlete‟s food and supplement intake as well as nutritional needs during all seasons;

demonstrate the ability to develop and implement an effective nutrition care plan for adult athletes
according to specific needs and based on guidelines for successful nutrition for sport performance;

communicate with athletes as well as their parents and coaches in an ethically accountable manner.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Integrated assessment to ensure that the aim of the qualification is achieved will
take place through various strategies:

individual as well as group assignments involving creativity, knowledge retrieval and application using
appropriate methods and implementation of a computer, group communication and reporting that will
contribute to a participation mark;

individual and group discussions in class that, with reference to the previous point, will assess the
development of the student‟s scientific communication skills that contribute to a participation mark;

written and/or oral mid-year and final exams on theoretical subject knowledge, practical problemsolving skills and experimental abilities – questions that test critical outcomes like the identification
and solving of problems, responsible decision-making and critical and creative reasoning, which
contribute to the participation mark, are emphasised in particular;

a research report proving that the student is familiar with the scientific research method and the
documentation thereof, contributes to the module mark;

exams are written at the end of each semester during official exam times, as applicable;

all exams (papers), as well as the research report, are moderated externally after each examination;

only one exam will be written by all students on the same day at the same time, with the second
opportunity paper as the only alternative option; and

students may apply to the exam division (or appropriate division) to write exams at examination
centres other than the Potchefstroom Campus.
Module code: VVBG671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Consumer Behaviour
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

show a coherent and critical comprehension of the principles that apply to consumer behaviour in
order to (i) understand the consumer better and critically evaluate this purchasing behaviour and
decision-making process, and (ii) make meaningful recommendations based upon this evaluation;

identify, analyse and investigate complex and/or actual problems and questions in consumer
behaviour, and also to offer evidence-driven solutions from theory-driven arguments;

have a systematic and extensive knowledge of those aspects pertaining to consumer behaviour that
may be applied from within the subject discipline of Consumer Sciences by doing an analysis,
synthesis and evaluation of the relevant research literature;

analyse and apply practically the approaches of various authors to the effects of external influences
upon consumer behaviour; and

critically analyse and evaluate different models of, and approaches to consumer decision-making,
consumer socialising and market segmentation.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VVDL672
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Food Product Development
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

do extensive and systematic theoretical research in the form of literature studies on relevant fields in
the NFPD process by analysing and evaluating various sources of information;

identify a potentially new product;

synthesise and integrate relevant information so that the potential product may be fully motivated;

perform all aspects of the development process theoretically;

suggest screening process and use SE as an instrument for this purpose;

set up a complete NPVO flow-chart for the product where all aspects of the complete
162
process may be evaluated thoroughly with evidence-driven arguments;
develop a product in terms of the above-mentioned diagram and test its acceptability among
consumers;

suggest various launching methods; and

present the complete project in a scientific fashion as a mini research project with a business plan in
the form of a written report.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VVDL673
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Consumer Behaviour in Food
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

show a coherent and critical comprehension of the principles, as well as various types of consumer
behaviour regarding food, so that (i) possible solutions / recommendations for specific consumer
problems in the food industry / retail trade may be offered, and (ii) the implications for consumer
behaviour of food-related phenomena, factors and events based on these may be critically evaluated;

identify and analyse complex and/or actual problems and questions in the food industry and consumer
sciences, and also to offer evidence-driven solutions from theory-driven arguments;

have extensive and systematic knowledge of consumer behaviour so that you may apply it practically
to specific components of the food industry through the analysis, evaluation, synthesis and integration
of information, which will enable you to handle similar questions in practice;

identify, analyse and critically evaluate and justify with evidence-driven arguments research literature
relevant to the field of food; and

demonstrate an ethically correct attitude with regard to the manner in which you approach the
consumer by making recommendations that are ethically acceptable to both parties.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VVOO671
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Adult Education and Training
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate effective skills at retrieving, processing, interpreting and integrating information with
regard to academic literature relevant to adult education and training;

have comprehensive and systematic knowledge and skills that will enable you to function within an
adult education and training environment by integrating, analysing and evaluating the relation between
community education programmes, capacity building and empowerment;

have knowledge of certain aspects of the South African Qualifications Organisation, as well as related
structures, and be able to apply this in the work environment;

demonstrate an ethically correct attitude towards the application of adult education and training;

demonstrate the principles and values underlying consumer behaviour as well as adult education and
training in an academically professional context, as well as a follow-up report, and communicate it
orally to a variety of audiences by using different genres appropriate to the context;

have a systematic and extensive knowledge of adult education and training; and consequently be able
to compile criteria to which adult education and training programmes must comply;

study and evaluate different ways in which adult education and training programmes are compiled and
presented, as well as make recommendations concerning the most successful methods;

analyse within the context the relation between community development, community education and
training, capacity building and empowerment, and give your own opinion regarding its success or
otherwise;

study and analyse intervention research, compile your own intervention programme for a community,
and present it with the required and appropriate resources;

recommend and apply the latest methods for evaluation and assessment;

give an overview of adult basic education and training (ABET) and learnerships as applied in South
Africa;

give an overview of adult basic education and training (not an in-depth study); as well as

analyse and evaluate adult education and training as part of the consumer scientist's task, and also
make recommendations to execute it with the greatest possible success.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module

163
G.2.2
MASTERS DEGREES
Module code: CLNP811
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Clinical Pharmacy, Social Pharmacy, and Professional Practice
Module outcomes:
After completion of this unit the student should be able to:

Elicit a complete patient history.

Demonstrate a broad understanding of the components that form a laboratory result and the clinical
application of these tests, with special reference to certain highlighted areas (e.g., diabetes mellitus,
hyperlipidaemia, electrolyte imbalances, liver function tests, full blood count, and iron disorders).

Communicate effectively with a wide range of audiences using a variety of methods including written,
poster, oral and web-based presentations.

Culminate and integrate social and clinical skills, evidence-based studying and patient-centred
decision making in each individual case study.

Participate in and contribute to a multi-disciplinary team
Mode of delivery:
The programme is divided into four semesters (two study years). Each semester
begins with a 5 day compulsory introductory workshop. It is followed up with 4 contact days each 8 weeks
(compulsory).
Assessment methods:
Continuous assessment by means of:

Assignments,

group discussions,

case study presentations,

online tutorials (e-Fundi),

practical assessments,

written examination, and

portfolio
will be utilized as modes of outcome evaluation.
Module code: CLNP812
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Clinical Epidemiology, Research Methodology, Biostatistics, and Evidence-based Medicine
Module outcomes:
After completion of this unit the student should be able to:

Demonstrate an understanding for the classical “scientific method” and appropriate experimental
design.

Demonstrate an understanding of the statistical methods commonly employed in biomedical sciences,
population distributions, and sampling.

Understand and interpret experimental data in terms of their biological significance for the population
as well as the individual patient.

Create, design and explore a research question in a specialised area and evaluate this research with
appropriate justification or create, design and explore a work-based learning project to evaluate an
issue in practice.

Demonstrate an acquired knowledge, understanding, and professional attitude in interpretation of
clinical and epidemiological studies for use in patient health assessment.
Mode of delivery:
The programme is divided into four semesters (two study years). Each semester begins with a 5 day
compulsory introductory workshop. It is followed up with 4 contact days each 8 weeks (compulsory).
Assessment methods:
Continuous assessment by means of:

assignments,

feedback reports,

group discussions,

journal presentations,

online tutorials (e-Fundi),

practical assessments, and

written examination
164
Module code: CLNP821
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Clinical Pharmacotherapeutics and Therapeutic Outcomes Management II
Module outcomes:
After completion of this unit the student should be able to:

Demonstrate a basic understanding of the relationship between pathophysiologic principles and the
clinical manifestations, diagnosis, prognosis and management of common diseases.

Demonstrate an in-depth knowledge of specialised areas of pharmacotherapy and have an
appreciation of the current range of theoretical and research understanding in those areas.

Demonstrate knowledge of the anatomical and physiological factors which influence drug delivery and
elimination of drugs.

Culminate and integrate social and clinical skills, evidence-based studying and patient-centred
decision making in each individual case study.
Mode of delivery:
The programme is divided into four semesters (two study years). Each semester begins with a 5 day
compulsory introductory workshop. It is followed up with 4 contact days each 8 weeks (compulsory).
Assessment methods: Continuous assessment by means of:

assignments,

feedback reports,

group discussions,

case study presentations,

journal presentations,

online tutorials (e-Fundi),

practical assessments,

written and oral examination, and

portfolio
will be utilized as modes of outcome evaluation
Module code: CLNP813
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Clinical Pharmacotherapeutics and Therapeutic Outcomes Management I
Module outcomes:
After completion of this unit the student should be able to:

Demonstrate a basic understanding of the relationship between pathophysiologic principles and the
clinical manifestations, diagnosis, prognosis and management of common diseases.

Demonstrate an in-depth knowledge of specialised areas of pharmacotherapy and have an
appreciation of the current range of theoretical and research understanding in those areas.

Demonstrate knowledge of the anatomical and physiological factors which influence drug delivery and
elimination of drugs.

Culminate and integrate social and clinical skills, evidence-based studying and patient-centred
decision making in each individual case study.
Mode of delivery:
The programme is divided into four semesters (two study years). Each semester begins with a 5 day
compulsory introductory workshop. It is followed up with 4 contact days each 8 weeks (compulsory).
Assessment methods: Continuous assessment by means of:

assignments,

feedback reports,

group discussions,

case study presentations,

journal presentations,

online tutorials (e-Fundi),

practical assessments,

written and oral examination, and

portfolio
will be utilized as modes of outcome evaluation.
Module code: CLNP814
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Clinical Drug Toxicology, Drug Therapy in Oncology and the Management of Drug Abuse
Module outcomes:
After completion of this unit the student should be able to:

Demonstrate an understanding of the absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion processes of
toxicants (toxicokinetics)

Demonstrate an understanding of target organ toxicity, typical mechanisms, and consequences
165
involving specific organ systems
Describe methods involved in evaluation of toxic effects on selected organ systems
Demonstrate the ability to critically evaluate primary literature in pharmacology and toxicology
Culminate and integrate social and clinical skills, evidence-based studying and patient-centred
decision making in each individual case study regarding toxicology, oncology and drug abuse.
Mode of delivery:
The programme is divided into four semesters (two study years). Each semester begins with a 5 day
compulsory introductory workshop. It is followed up with 4 contact days each 8 weeks (compulsory).
Assessment methods: Continuous assessment by means of:

assignments,

feedback reports,

group discussions,

case study presentations,

journal presentations,

online tutorials (e-Fundi),

practical assessments,

written and oral examination, and

portfolio
will be utilized as modes of outcome evaluation.
Module code: CLNP873
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini-dissertation
Module outcomes:
After completion of this unit the student should be able to:

Demonstrate specialist knowledge and critical understanding of clinical pharmacy to enable
engagement with research in this practice.

Demonstrate understanding of principles, theories and techniques relevant to clinical pharmacy so
that s/he can individually and under supervision, identify a complex and real-world clinical problem,
undertake relevant literature survey, including the analyses, evaluation and integration of information
and apply this to structured research and solve the problem.

Communicate effectively and ethically the research results in a scientifically acceptable article format
and verbally presents this to specialist and non-specialist audiences, using supportive Information
Technology.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/part-time - contact
Assessment methods:
Final Master‟s Degree evaluation as set out in the “Manual for postgraduate
studies”, the Academic Rules and the Faculty Rules of the NWU
Module code: FCHG871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

identify a research problem/need, and to plan and execute a suitable research design in a scientific
and ethical manner by making use of appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research results in a scientifically accountable manner and compile a research
report out of it; and

communicate research results in a scientific and ethical way - orally and in writing.
Mode of delivery:
An introductory course in research methodology, laboratory safety, ethics, statistics
and good laboratory practice is offered at the start of the program and proof of participation must be
obtained. The programme consists only of a dissertation and the research project is executed by the
student in cooperation with the supervisors, sub programme leaders and research director.
Assessment methods: Examined internally and externally in accordance with the NWU regulations.
Module code: FKLG871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Pharmacology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

identify a research problem/need, and to plan and execute a suitable research design in a scientific
and ethical manner by making use of appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research results in a scientifically accountable manner and to compile a
research report out of it; and

communicate research results in a scientific and ethical way, both orally and in writing.
Mode of delivery:
An introductory course in research methodology, laboratory safety, ethics, statistics



166
and good laboratory practice is offered at the start of the program and proof of participation must be
obtained. The programme consists only of a dissertation and the research project is executed by the
student in cooperation with the supervisors, sub programme leaders and research director.
Assessment methods: Examined internally and externally in accordance with the NWU regulations.
Module code: FMSG871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Pharmaceutics
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

identify a research problem/need, and to plan and execute a suitable research design in a scientific
and ethical manner by making use of appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research results in a scientifically accountable manner and compile a research
report out of it; and

communicate research results in a scientific and ethical way - orally and in writing.
Mode of delivery:
An introductory course in research methodology, laboratory safety, ethics, statistics
and good laboratory practice is offered at the start of the program and proof of participation must be
obtained. The programme consists only of a dissertation and the research project is executed by the
student in cooperation with the supervisors, sub programme leaders and research director.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy
Module code: FLGX871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Physiology)
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate advanced knowledge and skills to identify a relevant research question within the field of
Cardiovascular Physiology;

plan and carry out a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research design in a scientific and ethical
manner by using suitable research methods, techniques and procedures; and

interpret the research findings in a scientifically accountable manner and use them to compile a
research report.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: FLGX873
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini-Dissertation (Occupational Hygiene)
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate advanced knowledge and skills to identify a relevant research question within the field of
Occupational hygiene and safety;

plan and carry out a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research design in a scientific and ethical
manner by using suitable research methods, techniques and procedures; and

interpret the research findings in a scientifically accountable manner and use them to compile a
research report.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: FLGX884
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Occupational Hygiene Monitoring B
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

estimate the health risk posed by certain environmental factors in the workplace; and

identify, quantify and control such risk.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX885
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Vibration, Heat and Ergonomic Factors
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

identify poor ergonomic work practices as well as vibration and exposure to heat/cold;

make relevant recommendations with regard to workplace design and the ergonomically correct
handling of tools; and

demonstrate the necessary knowledge to protect workers against exposure to heat and cold by
167
means of different physical methods as well as acclimatisation.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX886
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Labour Legislation
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate knowledge applicable to occupational hygiene, including the Occupational Health and
Safety Act, Mine Health and Safety Act, appropriate regulations and the NIOSH‟s Occupational
Exposure Sampling Strategy Manual (OESSM).
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FLGX887
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Personal Protection Equipment and Radiation
Module outcomes:
At the end of the module the student should be able to:

identify and quantify the different types of radiation; and

demonstrate the required knowledge to protect the worker in general against harmful environmental
factors.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: FPHA811
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level:9
Title: Applied Pharmaco-economics
Module outcomes:
After completion of the programme the student should

demonstrate advanced and comprehensive specialist knowledge of pharmaco-economic analytical
principles and methods;

have the ability to apply appropriate pharmaco-economic analytical techniques scientifically in order to
identify and solve a specific problem; and

demonstrate skills for undertaking literature searches, critically reviewing already published reports
and compiling and communicating an own pharmaco-economic report in an ethically responsible
manner, while making use of suitable IT.
Mode of delivery:
The module is presented by contact as it is expected of students to attend courses
during the course of the year on various topics that support the contents of the module.
Assessment methods: Students will write one examination. There will also be a second opportunity if the
student did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA812
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Applied Pharmaco-epidemiology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should

have advanced and comprehensive specialist knowledge of certain epidemiological and pharmacoepidemiological principles, concepts and techniques, as well as of evidence-based medicine;

demonstrate the ability to plan and apply/propose appropriate epidemiological research designs in the
field of medicine consumption;

demonstrate skills to identify, collect and analyse appropriate data needed for pharmacoepidemiological studies by making use of correct data analysis techniques, while at the same time
applying the principles of risk and risk-determining techniques to pharmaco-epidemiological data; and

demonstrate skills for reviewing published reports critically with the aid of meta-analyses and then
compiling own results in a pharmaco-epidemiological report of a prescribed format.
Mode of delivery:
The module is presented by contact as it is expected of students to attend courses
during the course of the year on various topics that support the contents of the module.
Assessment methods Students will write one examination. There will also be a second opportunity if the
student did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: FPHA872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Pharmacy Practice)
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

plan and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research design in a scientific and ethical
168
manner by making use of appropriate research methods, techniques and procedures;
interpret and integrate research results in a scientifically accountable manner and compile a research
report out of it; and

communicate research results in a scientific and ethical way - orally and in writing.
Mode of delivery: Complete a research project under the guidance of a supervisor/s.
Assessment methods: : Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy
Module code: MBWB871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Biokinetics (Dissertation)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base of research methodologies and
techniques in Human Movement Science with specialist knowledge in Biokinetics;

synthesise and apply the knowledge of research methodologies and techniques applicable to one of
the above specialist areas in planning, composing and executing a research project;

identify and solve a complex research problem or question in one of the abovementioned specialist
areas by using skills for developing and processing information and the collecting, capturing,
processing, analysing and interpreting of research data;

present a mini-dissertation effectively and professionally and in compliance with the standards of
scientific professional writing under supervision using advanced IT and communicating the results to a
national specialist examination panel, using academic-professional reasoning; and

act in an ethically correct manner and within the required parameters during the execution of the miniresearch project and composition and completion of the mini-thesis.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Evaluation of dissertation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MBWK871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Kinderkinetics (Dissertation)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base of research methodologies and
techniques in Human Movement Science with specialist knowledge in Kinderkinetics;

synthesise and apply the knowledge of research methodologies and techniques applicable to one of
the above specialist areas in planning, composing and executing a research project;

identify and solve a complex research problem or question in one of the abovementioned specialist
areas by using skills for developing and processing information and the collecting, capturing,
processing, analysing and interpreting of research data;

present a mini-dissertation effectively and professionally and in compliance with the standards of
scientific professional writing under supervision using advanced IT and communicating the results to a
national specialist examination panel, using academic-professional reasoning; and

act in an ethically correct manner and within the required parameters during the execution of the miniresearch project and composition and completion of the mini-thesis.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Evaluation of dissertation by internal and external examiners
Module code: MBWS871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Sport Science practise
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base of research methodologies and
techniques in Human Movement Science with specialist knowledge in Sport Science;

synthesise and apply the knowledge of research methodologies and techniques applicable to one of
the above specialist areas in planning, composing and executing a research project;

identify and solve a complex research problem or question in one of the abovementioned specialist
areas by using skills for developing and processing information and the collecting, capturing,
processing, analysing and interpreting of research data;

present a mini-dissertation effectively and professionally and in compliance with the standards of
scientific professional writing under supervision using advanced IT and communicating the results to a
national specialist examination panel, using academic-professional reasoning; and

act in an ethically correct manner and within the required parameters during the execution of the mini
169
research project and composition and completion of the mini-thesis.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Evaluation of dissertation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MWKC874
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Alternative care
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student must be able to:

execute alternative care within the framework of South African child care legislation and policy;

plan and implement intervention strategies for the different forms of alternative care;

provide supervision to social workers in the field of alternative care;

critically judge the ethical and professional conduct of self and others within the intervention
environment of social work, and to effect change in conduct where necessary; and

an accurate, coherent and appropriate presentation and communication of innovative professional
ideas or findings with understanding of and respect for intellectual property conventions, copyright and
rules on plagiarism.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Student will prove that he/she has attained the outcomes of MWKC871 module
when he/she can:
Develop a presentation on how to execute the different forms of alternative care within the framework of
South African child care legislation and policy.
Write reports on the planning and implementation of intervention strategies for the different forms of
alternative care.
Write reports on the implementation of supervision to social workers in the field of alternative care.
Module code: MWKC875
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Adoption
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student must be able to:

execute adoption services within the appropriate legislative mandate relevant to adoption;

plan and implement adoption services;

use a range of specialised skills in identifying, conceptualising and implementing appropriate methods
of inquiry to address complex problems within the field of adoption services; and

make autonomous ethical decisions within the academic and the professional environment and
critically contribute to the development of ethical standards in the context of the protection of children.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Student will prove that he/she has attained the outcomes of MWKC872 module when he/she can:
•
Develop a presentation on the execution of adoption services within the appropriate legislative
mandate relevant to adoption
•
Write reports on the planning and implementation of adoption services
Module code: MWKF873
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research Dissertation (Social Work – Forensic Practice)
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student must be able to:

interpret research results and write a research submission and a research report.
Mode of delivery: lltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by two external and one internal examiner.
Module code: MWKF876
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: General Child Assessment
Module outcomes:
The student must be able to:

understand and apply the role of child assessment during the process of investigating alleged sexual
abuse and physical battering;

determine whether a child‟s physical development and cognitive development present within normal
limits for his/her age group in order to recommend purposeful and effective interventions, understand
the child as a client, form a hypothesis whether the child experiences any problems in his psychosocial development and, by means of the theoretical knowledge and the use of the assessment
model, form a hypothesis on the development and/or the possible presence of problems with regard to
his psycho-social development;
170

recognise emotional and behavioural problems that may occur in children, and be aware of possible
causes of these problems, identify the occurrence of emotional neglect and understand its impact;

understand the effect of trauma on the child‟s development and identify dissociation, and understand
and interpret its impact on the intervention process.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: MWKF877
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Sexual Abuse and Physical Battering
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

identify possible aspects in the family dynamics that may contribute to possible sexual abuse of the
child;

observe and explain the bonding between parent and child, and also between the transgressor and
the child;

recognise the dynamics of the sexual transgressor and conduct an interview with the alleged
transgressor as part of the investigation process;

explain and understand medical findings in the context of each case that is investigated;

understand the process of disclosing facts by the child and also to explain it to the court; and

recognise the difference between true and false statements.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: MWKF878
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Trauma Assessment and Investigation Process
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

understand the functioning of the brain and the effect of trauma on the brain and to apply techniques
in order to help the child to recall information regarding the trauma;

identify dissociation in the child and explain its impact on the child‟s statement;

apply techniques in order to help the child recall information regarding the trauma; apply unstructured
play as part of the assessment and executing a full trauma assessment successfully;

execute an interactional analysis within the dynamics of sexual abuse successfully; and

conduct a full forensic interview.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: MWKF879
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Report Writing and Social Worker as Expert in Court
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

compile a court report and act as an expert witness in court in cases of sexual abuse;

enter the court well prepared and testify with conviction;

know the various options with regard to courts and ascertain which option would be best within each
unique case, and be conversant with the applicable legislation and its application; and

explain to the court, with the aid of literature, the function of the assessment techniques; and to
prepare the child for court.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
One examination per module.
Module code: MWKF880
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research Theory: Social Work
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

describe the nature, purpose and necessity of social work research;

explain the ethical aspects of social work research and to differentiate between the different roles of
the social work researcher;

manage the research process in social work;

discuss the nature and purpose of the preliminary investigation;

apply the principles of sampling and the types of samples in practice;

differentiate between the various research designs and procedures and to apply them in practice; and

demonstrate an understanding of the nature and value of and measurement in social work research
171
and apply the procedures of measurement.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: MWKK873
Semester1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini-dissertation (Social Work – Child Protection)
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

interpret research results and write a research proposal and a research report.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact / Distance.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: MWKK874
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Child Protection as Field of Service
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

describe the nature and character of the field of child protection in South Africa;

identify the role players in the field of child protection in South Africa;

demonstrate familiarity with the policy documents and legislation that give shape to the field of child
protection in South Africa; and

apply the norm of the best interests of the child, taking the rights of the child into consideration, in
each unique situation.
Mode of delivery:
Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MWKK875
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Children as a Vulnerable Group
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

discuss the development of the child within the perspective of the ecosystem;

identify and investigate the problem of child abuse and neglect;

explain, compare and apply different child assessment models and frameworks; and

identify the different vulnerable child groups and develop service and intervention plans.
Mode of delivery:
Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MWKK876
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Social Work Intervention in the Field of Child Protection
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

identify the need for intervention at macro, meso and micro-level within the field of child protection;

implement relevant intervention strategies at every level; and

develop appropriate prevention services with respect to every level and every group.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MWKK877
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Substitute Care in South Africa
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

distinguish, explain and discuss critically the different forms of substitute care;

implement the intervention process with respect to every form of substitute care on the basis of
relevant legislation and policy procedures, taking the principle of permanence planning into account;

evaluate the current practice of every form of substitute care against the background of prevailing
circumstances and needs.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MSWR871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module the student should be able to:

identify a research problem in social work which is in accordance with the research niche areas for the
172
Social Work subject group;
formulate and apply a research design and procedures;
reproduce the research results in the form of a dissertation of high quality; and
collaborate effectively with fellow-researchers and research teams, respondents, organisations and
communities in the research process.
Mode of delivery:
Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module Code: MWKS873
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini-dissertation (Play therapy)
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

to interpret research results and to submit research report and a research submission.
Mode of delivery:
Full / Part-time – Contact / Distance.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation by the NWU policy.
Module code: MWKS811
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Basic principles, -theories and philosophy of Gestalt Play Therapy.
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

Explain a personal understanding of the basic principles, theories and philosophy of Gestalt play
therapy, as well as other theoretical approaches within the context of play therapy principles;

Integrate and evaluate principles, objects and concepts of the above theories within the South African
context;

Scientifically collect, analyse, organize, communicate and critically evaluate information related to
identity theory within the South African context;

Explain and interpret the concept of awareness of self in identity theory within the framework of
Gestalt play therapy.
Mode of delivery: Part-time - Contact
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by internal and external examiners
Assignments: 15%
Interactive participation and experiential learning: 15%
Examination: 70%
Module Code: MWKS875
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: The therapeutic relationship and process in Gestalt Play Therapy
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

Critically evaluate information related to existential dialogue as therapeutic relationship in Gestalt
theory within the scientific context of play therapy

Identify the various concepts associated with existential dialogue as a concept in Gestalt play therapy
from the relevant literature;

Explain and describe concepts of existential dialogue and its application in Gestalt play therapy;

Collect, analyse, organize, communicate and critically evaluate information about the therapeutic
process in play therapy in a scientific way;

Identify able to the various concepts relevant to the therapeutic process in play therapy from relevant
literature and theoretical content of previous modules;

Describe and explain the process of Play therapy.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by internal and external examiners
Assignments: 15%
Interactive participation and experiential learning: 15%
Examination: 70%
Module Code: MWKS821
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Gestalt Play Therapy: Advanced Intervention
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

Facilitate the Play therapeutic relationship through advanced mediums and techniques of play therapy
successfully;

Use his/her own assessment guidelines and combinations of forms of play to create and develop
various mediums to use within the framework of different theoretical approaches;

Develop resources to support the Play Therapist with the problems in the therapy.



173
Mode of delivery: Part-time - Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by internal and external examiners
Assignments: 15%
Interactive participation and experiential learning: 15%
Examination: 70%
Module Code: MWKS877
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Practice-based utilisation of Gestalt Play Therapy
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

Adapt Gestalt play therapy within the framework of an ethical code of conduct on an individual, group
and community level through integration of theoretical content;

Integrate and evaluate the basic research and SL principles and theories;

Establish the value of community engagement and community-based research as scholarship through
theory-based research;

Implement reflective practices in learning, based on an advanced insight into the value of reflection as
a developmental learning practice;

Demonstrate the understanding for Mode 1 and Mode 2 research, and a thorough understanding of
the principles underlying systematic, community-based research into and through SL and CE;

Outline a research topic, formulate a research problem, research question, goals and objectives;
choose appropriate design and research methodology, engage in data collection, data analysis,
understand ethical aspects of research;

Based on the above to compile a research protocol to guide the research process.
Mode of delivery:
Part-time - Contact.
Assessment methods Evaluation by internal and external examiners
Submission of practical portfolio: 100%
Module code MWKP873
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini -dissertation
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module, the student should be able to demonstrate:

the ability to conduct research under supervision in the field of play therapy within a social work
context, using a range of skills to identify, analyse and address complex real-world problems ethically;

the ability to communicate research results in an oral presentation and in writing in a dissertation
according to the A-rules of the University
Mode of delivery: Contact - fulltime / part-time
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by internal and external examiners according to NWU policy.
Module code MWKP880
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research Theory and community engagement
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module, the student should be able to:

Describe the nature, purpose and necessity of social work research;

understand and integrate the basic principles, ethics, philosophies and theories of community
engagement, social work research, community based research and service learning;

implement reflective practices in learning, based on an advanced insight into the value of structured
reflection as a developmental learning practice;

understand the role of study supervision;

understand and be able to apply research ethics and ethics related to scope of practice;

demonstrate understanding of Mode 1 and Mode 2 research, and a thorough understanding of the
principles underlying systematic, community-based research into and through SL and CE, including
the development of partnerships with communities and tapping into indigenous knowledge systems;

develop a research topic based on community engagement, formulate a research problem, research
question, goals and objectives; choose appropriate design and research methodology, engage in data
collection, data analysis, and understand the fundamentals of scientific report writing;

understand and be able to apply relevant aspects regarding trustworthiness including triangulation/
crystallisation
Mode of delivery: Contact - fulltime / part-time
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work and formal
examination. Assessment for a participation mark is done according to the prescriptions in the study guide.
174
Module code MWKP811
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Basic principles, theories and philosophy of play therapy
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module, the student should be able to demonstrate:

Knowledge and understanding of the purpose of play;

knowledge and engagement which reflects an understanding of the origins of Play therapy;

knowledge and critical understanding of the different theories, approaches and philosophies in Play
therapy;

Critical understanding of the social work approaches when working with children and families;

Knowledge and application of ethics in play therapy and social work
Mode of delivery: Contact - fulltime / part-time
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work and formal
examination. Assessment for a participation mark is done according to prescriptions in the study guide.
Module code MWKP812
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: The child as client
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module, the student should be able to demonstrate:

a comprehensive understanding of social issues such as social inequality, gender, poverty and
diversity in South Africa, that affect the lives of children in the global and South African society;

Knowledge and critical understanding of the holistic development context of children in relation to
social, economic and political systems, issues and assets/strengths;

Examines the interplay between home, family, schooling, public spaces, work, power relationships
between adults and children and other influences in the daily lives of children;

Apply the principles of social inquiry and its applications in relation to selected social issues in the life
world of children;

Critique a one-sided view on the vulnerabilities and protection of children, utilising a perspective on
the evolving capacities, strengths, resilience and participation of children in the global and South
African society;

Critically evaluate the relevance of play therapy as an intervention in accordance with the
developmental welfare paradigm, broader social context and everyday social work practice
Mode of delivery:
Contact - fulltime / part-time
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work and a formal
examination. Assessment for a participation mark is done according to the prescriptions in the study guide.
Module code MWKP813
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Play Therapy intervention with children
Module outcomes:
At the end of this module the student should be able to demonstrate:

The nature, scope and origin of knowledge pertaining to the therapeutic relationship, the therapeutic
process in play therapy, medium and techniques used in play therapy and counselling skills with
children;

implied knowledge pertaining to the therapeutic assessment of children in different contexts;

understand and demonstrate group work in the context of play therapy with children;

implement reflective practices in learning;

demonstrate the ability to contribute to systematic and critical analytic thinking about matters relating
to the therapeutic process, mediums and techniques in play therapy and applying it by developing a
therapeutic model for children in different contexts;

the ability to produce and communicate information using visual or language skills in modes of oral
and/ or written presentation pertaining to the specific module during class discussions and class
presentations ;

the ability to work responsibly within a group and a team during class discussions and community
engagement assignments;

actions in accordance with the ethical and professional standards of the South African Council for
Social Service Professions‟ (SACSSP) policy guidelines for course of conduct, code of ethics and the
rule for social workers
Mode of delivery:
Contact - fulltime / part-time
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work as well as a
formal examination. Assessment for a participation mark is done to the prescriptions in the study guide.
175
Module code MWKP821
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Community based play therapy intervention
Module outcomes:
At the end of this module the student should be able to demonstrate:

The integration and critical application of the knowledge and skills of play therapy within a service
learning project;

personal growth in the context of the profession;

social responsibility.
Mode of delivery: Contact - fulltime / part-time
Assessment methods:
Class activities, group- and individual work and a formal examination.
Assessment for a participation mark is done according to the prescriptions in the study guide.
Module code: NUTE871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Nutritional Epidemiology
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module, the student will demonstrate:

Specialist knowledge to enable engagement with, review and critique of current nutritional
epidemiology research and practice;

A command of and ability to synthesise epidemiological research strategies by evaluating appropriate
epidemiological research methods to address challenging and complex nutrition-related issues in the
South African context;

A command of and ability to critically evaluate nutritional epidemiology data using appropriate
statistical methodology to assess nutrition-related disease risk;

Effectively integrate academic research into a personal value system to be able to enter into scientific
discourse, both in written and oral format, about topical and current nutrition-related epidemiological
research;

An ability to make autonomous ethical decisions, operate independently and take full responsibility for
her/his own work.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Written assignments, class activities, group- and/or individual work and a formal
examination. Assessment for a participation mark is done according to the prescriptions in the study guide.
Module Code: PSYC871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Psychology)
Module-outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate advanced knowledge and skills in the identification of a research question, which may be
researched individually or inter-disciplinary;

develop and apply applicable quantitative and/or qualitative formats and procedures, and apply them
on a scientifically, ethical manner;

interpret and report research results scientifically;

complete the research process by ensuring effective co-operation with other.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact / Distance.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by two external and one internal examiner.
Module code: PSYC872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Research Psychology)
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to:

plan and do research of a limited scope by using appropriate research methods that are aligned with
the ontological and epistemological assumptions applicable to the research phenomenon; and

write a logically argued and integrated scientific report in which applicable psychological explanations
are integrated with the research findings.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact / Distance.
Assessment methods:
Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
176
Module code: PSYK872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research theory and Dissertation in Clinical Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to

Reflect on the paradigmatic basis of researchable problems;

Understand the relationship between data and specific analysis techniques;

Identify a researchable topic;

Identify appropriate hypotheses and develop a research proposal in line with substantive theoretical or
empirical foundations and ethical considerations;

Conduct basic research, using applicable qualitative, quantitative or a combination of both research
methods ;

Submit a research report in either dissertation/book or article format.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods: Evaluation by two external and one internal examiner.
Module code: PSYC874
Semester 1and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Critical Research Skills
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to:

formulate an understanding of the ontological assumptions about the nature of science and a people
view;

plan and perform ethical research;

differentiate between quantitative and qualitative approaches which are appropriate for answering
specific research questions.
Mode of delivery: Workshops throughout the year.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments throughout the year and an examination paper set by an
internal examiner and moderated by an external examiner.
Module code: PSYC875
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Quantitative Research Methods
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

apply different research methods that are associated with quantitative research; and

apply quantitative research processes such as sampling, validity and reliability, questionnaire design,
experimental designs (SPSS); data analysis techniques (multiple regression and structural
comparison models).
Mode of delivery:
Workshops throughout the year.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments throughout the year and an examination paper set by an
internal examiner and moderated by an external examiner.
Module code: PSYC876
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Qualitative Research Methods
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

apply different research designs associated with qualitative research; and

apply qualitative research processes such as purposeful sampling, data collection and data analysis
methods such as thematic content analysis as well as trustworthiness.
Mode of delivery:
Workshops throughout the year.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments throughout the year and an examination paper set by an
internal examiner and moderated by an external examiner.
Module code: PSYC877
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Project Management
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

master all facets concerning research project management, so that independent research functioning
may be possible.
Mode of delivery:
Workshops throughout the year.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments throughout the year and an examination paper set by an internal examiner and
moderated by an external examiner.
177
Module code: PSYC878
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Psychopharmacology, Adult Pathology and Neuropsychology
Module outcomes:
After the completion of this module the student should be able to:

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in the field of psychopharmacology, adult
psychopathology and neuropsychology to conduct in-depth, culturally sensitive psycho diagnostic
procedures and neuro-psychological evaluations with adults;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in making and formulating both primary and
differential diagnoses in terms of the various forms of adult psychopathology and neuropathology;
according to the DSM-V and ICD-10 classification systems;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in determining different causes of psychological
and neuropsychological disorders in adults;

Demonstrate theoretical, practical and ethical competence in communicating professional impressions
and conclusions to multi-disciplinary teams.

Demonstrate knowledge and insight in psychopharmacology, including: classification and functioning
of the nervous system, brain anatomy and physiology, neurotransmission; and the use of psychotropic
medication for various clinical conditions and the management thereof.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work and formal
examination.
Module code: PSYC879
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Child- and adolescent pathology and therapy
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate in-depth theoretical and practical competence in the field of child and adolescent
development, psychology, psychopathology and psycho-diagnostics;

Demonstrate in-depth theoretical and practical competence in conducting clinical, emotional or
neuropsychological evaluations with children and adolescents

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in making and formulating both primary and
differential diagnoses in terms of the various forms of child and adolescent psychopathology and
neuropathology, according to the DSM-V and ICD-10 classification systems;

Identify normal and abnormal child and adolescent development, and discuss different causes of
psychological and neuropsychological disorders in children and adolescents from various metatheoretical models

Orally or in writing accurately report and communicate professional impressions, diagnoses and
conclusions to either multi-disciplinary teams and lay and professional persons, and make appropriate
recommendations for interventions, rehabilitation or referrals;

Plan and implement appropriate psychological interventions and psychoeducational / parental
guidance programmes.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work and formal
examination.
Module code: PSYC880
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Theory of Psychological Interventions
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate in-depth theoretical insight and knowledge in a wide variety of psychological and
therapeutic theories, short and long-term approaches and techniques applicable to individuals,
groups, families and marital couples with life challenges, particularly those with relatively serious
forms of psychological distress and/or psychopathology/psychiatric disorders in diverse settings and
contexts.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
178
Module code: PSYC881
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Applied Psychological Interventions
Module outcomes:

Apply psychological interventions to people with psychiatric conditions and serous life challenges and
design, manage and evaluate programmes dealing with psychiatric problems in diverse settings;

Promote primary and secondary psychological well-being in an integrated, effective and ethical
responsible manner;

Demonstrate their ability to do basic and advanced supportive, preventative and promotive
psychological interventions, as well as the ability to plan and execute in-depth, specialized long-term
interventions with patients with serious life challenges and psychopathology;

Advise on the development of policy applicable to a variety of sectors, based on various aspects of
psychological theory and research;

Reflect on the personal impact of the learning material, practical experiences and the skills acquired
as a person and as a future therapist.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
Module code: PSYC882
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Professional aspects, Psychodiagnostics and practical work
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in the field of ethical psychological practice in a
private practice or clinical setting, professional conduct and legislative issues;

Demonstrate their ability to do basic and advanced in-depth psychological assessments, and to
formulate report and communicate those findings and recommendations to various sources of
referral or a multi-disciplinary teams and/ or other people;

Arrange appropriate referrals and demonstrate competence in case management;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical knowledge and skills regarding forensic psychology and
document all processes followed;

Identify business opportunities and act as entrepreneur.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
Module code: PSYC883
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Ethics, Psychodiagnostics and Practical work
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in the field of ethical psychological practice in a
private practice or clinical setting, professional conduct and legislative issues;

Demonstrate their ability to do basic and advanced in-depth psychological assessments, and to
formulate report and communicate those findings and recommendations to various sources of referral
or a multi-disciplinary teams and/ or other people;

Arrange appropriate referrals and demonstrate competence in case management;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical knowledge and skills regarding forensic psychology and
document all processes followed;

Identify business opportunities and act as entrepreneur.

The teaching of behaviours, which reflect values, attitudes and character traits required of a
healthcare professional.

A focus on the relationship between the three disciplines (professional ethics, human rights and
medical law) and how they impact on the provision of healthcare services to the patients and the
community at large.

Knowledge, attitudes and skills relating to the three disciplines.

A multi-disciplinary approach with the training and assessment in a longitudinal fashion over the study
years.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
a)
Demonstrate during supervision, case and field work advanced knowledge and insight into the ethical
and legislative issues involved when working with children, adolescent adults and geriatric patients in
diverse contexts and settings;
179
b)
Plan and perform advanced in-depth psychological assessments, and formulate reports and
communicate those findings and recommendations to various sources of referral or a multidisciplinary teams and/ or other people either orally and/or in writing;
c)
Arrange appropriate referrals and demonstrate competence in case management during practical
work;
d)
Demonstrate theoretical and practical knowledge and skills regarding forensic psychology and
document all processes followed during practical work;
e)
Identify business opportunities and act as entrepreneur.
Module code: PSYC884
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Applied Psychology and Community Interventions
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Understand and apply the principles of Community Psychology in different settings. They should also
be able to evaluate diverse settings, apply psychological interventions and implement programmes in
different communities

Apply psychological interventions to people with psychiatric conditions and serous life challenges and
design, manage and evaluate programmes dealing with psychiatric problems in diverse community
setting;

Promote primary and secondary psychological well-being in an integrated, effective and ethical
responsible manner;

Demonstrate their ability to do basic and advanced supportive, preventative and promotive
psychological interventions, as well as the ability to plan and execute in-depth, specialized long-term
interventions with patients with serious life challenges and psychopathology;

Advise on the development of policy applicable to a variety of sectors, based on various aspects of
psychological theory and research;

Reflect on the personal impact of the learning material, practical experiences and the skills acquired
as a person and as a future therapist.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Proof of outcomes reached will be provided when the student can:
a)
Apply culturally sensitive psychological interventions to people with psychiatric conditions and serous
life challenges, and design, manage and evaluate programmes dealing with psychiatric problems in
diverse settings during their practical work, write it up in a case study or present it as a power point
presentation;
b)
Demonstrate during oral or practical exams and case study presentations how they have promoted
primary and secondary psychological well-being in an integrated, effective and ethical responsible
manner ;
c)
Demonstrate their ability to do basic supportive, preventative and promotive psychological
interventions in an integrated, effective and ethical responsible manner, as well as the ability to plan
and execute in-depth, specialized long-term interventions with patients with serious life challenges
and psychopathology by means of their portfolios, case study presentations, in supervision and
practical exams;
d)
Orally or in writing or in practice advise on the development of policy applicable to a variety of sectors,
based on various aspects of psychological theory and research;
e)
Orally or in writing reflect on the personal impact of the learning material, practical experiences and
the skills acquired as a person and as a future therapist.
Module code: PSYC885
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and advanced Psychopathology in Clinical Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in the field of psychopharmacology, adult
psychopathology and neuropsychology to conduct in-depth, culturally sensitive psycho diagnostic
procedures and neuro-psychological evaluations with adults;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in making and formulating both primary and
differential diagnoses in terms of the various forms of adult psychopathology and neuropathology;
according to the DSM-V and ICD-10 classification systems;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in determining different causes of psychological
and neuropsychological disorders in adults;

Demonstrate theoretical, practical and ethical competence in communicating professional impressions
and conclusions to multi-disciplinary teams.

Demonstrate knowledge and insight in psychopharmacology, including: classification and functioning
180
of the nervous system, brain anatomy and physiology, neurotransmission; and the use of psychotropic
medication for various clinical conditions and the management thereof.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
Module code: PSYK872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research theory and Dissertation in Clinical Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to

Reflect on the paradigmatic basis of researchable problems;

Understand the relationship between data and specific analysis techniques;

Identify a researchable topic;

Identify appropriate hypotheses and develop a research proposal in line with substantive theoretical or
empirical foundations and ethical considerations;

Conduct basic research, using applicable qualitative, quantitative or a combination of both research
methods ;

Submit a research report in either dissertation/book or article format.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by two external and one internal examiner.
Module code: PSYV872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research theory and Dissertation
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, learners should be able to

Reflect on the paradigmatic basis of researchable problems;

Understand the relationship between data and specific analysis techniques;

Identify a researchable topic;

Identify appropriate hypotheses and develop a research proposal in line with substantive
theoretical or empirical foundations and ethical considerations;

Conduct basic research, using applicable qualitative, quantitative or a combination of both
research methods ;

Submit a research report in either dissertation/book or article format.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by two external and one internal examiner.
Module code: PSYV879
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Child- and adolescent development, pathiology and therapy
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, learners should be able to:

Demonstrate in-depth theoretical and practical competence in the field of child and adolescent
development, psychology, psychopathology and psycho diagnostics;

Demonstrate theoretical and practical competence in conducting clinical, emotional or
neuropsychological evaluations with children and adolescents;

Demonstrate in-depth theoretical and practical competence in identifying individual strengths
and protective factors, and in making and formulating both primary and differential diagnoses in
terms of the various forms of child and adolescent psychopathology and neuropathology;
according to the DSM-V and ICD-10 classification systems;

Identify normal and abnormal child and adolescent development and individual strengths, and
critically discuss different causes of psychological and neuropsychological disorders and
psychological well-being in children and adolescents from various meta-theoretical models;

Orally or in writing accurately report and communicate professional impressions, diagnoses and
conclusions to either multi-disciplinary teams and lay and professional persons, and make
appropriate recommendations for interventions, rehabilitation or referrals;

Plan and implement advanced and appropriate basic and in-depth developmental, counselling
and psychological interventions and parental guidance/psycho-education programmes in
dealing with normal problems of life concerning all stages and aspects of a child‟s and
adolescents‟ existence in order to prevent psychopathology, promote optimal bio-psycho-social
well-being and facilitate desirable adjustment, growth and maturity.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
181
Module code: PSYV880
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Theory of Psychological Interventions in Counselling Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

demonstrate in-depth and advanced theoretical insight and knowledge of a wide variety of
psychological and therapeutic theories, short and long-term approaches and techniques applicable to
individuals, groups, families and marital couples with life challenges and psychological distress in
diverse settings and contexts.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
Module code: PSYV885
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and advanced Psychopathology in Counselling Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Advanced theoretical and practical competence in the field of psychopharmacology, adult
psychopapathology and neuropsychology to conduct in-depth, culturally sensitive psycho diagnostic
procedures and neuro-psychological evaluations with adults;

Advanced and integrated theoretical and practical competence in making and formulating both
primary and differential diagnoses in terms of the various forms of adult psychopathology and
neuropathology; according to the DSM-V and ICD-10 classification systems;

critical theoretical knowledge and understanding and practical competence in determining different
causes of psychological and neuropsychological disorders in adults;

practical and ethical competence in communicating professional impressions and conclusions to
multi-disciplinary teams.

edge and insight in psychopharmacology, including: classification and functioning of the nervous
system, brain anatomy and physiology, neurotransmission; and the use of psychotropic medication for
various clinical conditions and the management thereof;

advanced knowledge to diagnose a client and to refer to a clinical psychologist if outside the scope of
practice of the Councelling Psychologist.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group and individual work, as well as formal examination.
Module code: PSYP874
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Introduction to Positive Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Develop a specialised knowledge of concepts, theories and research in the fields of positive
psychology, well-being, positive organizational scholarship, psycho-social health, positive lifespan
development and aging and enabling communities;

Be able to critically evaluate current research and literature within the positive psychology discipline;

Reflect critically on own learning and experience; demonstrate the ability to develop own learning
strategies which can sustain independent learning and academic development, and can interact
effectively in a professional or academic context to enhance learning;

Demonstrate the ability to take full responsibility for own work, decisions and use of resources, and
where appropriate to lead and initiate new processes or systems, ensuring good resource
management and governance practices.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods:
Essays
Report of self-development project in a reflective portfolio
Participation in discussions and online-entries
Module code: PSYP875
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research methods in Positive Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate embedded theoretical knowledge, understanding and experience needed to carry out
research into positive psychology areas.

Apply appropriate research design, research methods and data analysis techniques.

Design and implement strategies to access, process and manage information, and to defend
182
substantial ideas in the field of PP;
to communicate ideas from PP to a wide range of audiences with different levels of knowledge or
expertise
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods: Formal examination in which learning outcomes are assessed.
Module code: PSYP876
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Assessment and Basics of Interventions
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate the ability to creatively select, design and apply appropriate evaluation /assessment and
interventions methods and techniques, appropriate to a specific context.

Use creativity and originality in the interpretation, application and development of knowledge and
practice, regarding assessment and interventions;

Be able to critically and reflectively apply specialist knowledge and theory to address complex
practical and theoretical problems - implementing a wide range of specialized skills in identifying,
conceptualizing, designing and implementing methods of enquiry to address challenging problems in
the field of positive psychology as a discipline and practice, with an understanding of the
consequences of solutions generated in a specific context;

Show an awareness of and understanding of ethical constraints associated with application of positive
psychology interventions;

Demonstrate the ability to make autonomous ethical decisions which affect knowledge production and
research, as well as individual, group, community or organizational issues.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods:
Personal and professional development portfolio (5, 000 words equivalent), including:
1. Component 1
1.
A short introduction
2.
A description and reflection on the personal use of questionnaires and assessment tools, such
as VIA strengths inventory, well-being scales, etc.
3.
A critical analysis and evaluation of selected positive psychology assessment tools
4.
A summary and reflection on the personal use of a range of interventions, such as „a gratitude
letter‟ or „gratitude diary‟, „creating a beautiful day‟, etc
5.
A critical analysis and evaluation of the range of interventions developed within positive
psychology, drawing on both personal experiential learning and review of research.
2 Component 2
How did you change? A Self-development project (cf. Todd Kashdan; Jonathan Haidt; and Barbara
Fredrickson). You must write a paper on a self-enhancement project in which you report on the process and
outcome of a process in which you chose to enhance something positive in yourself (build something
positive), and on which you constantly worked through the year.
i) Introduction: motivate why you chose the change you chose the specific positive facet to enhance, and
what the issues and difficulties were about making this change. Include background literature from the
workshop and other readings. Make a convincing case.
ii) Methods: explain the process you went about changing yourself. What strategies and techniques did you
use? What is the psychology behind these techniques? How did you set up a measurement procedure?
Motivate the applicability of your assessment methods. The tools you select should be sensitive to change.
iii) Results: What happened? You must present more evidence than only your own impressions. For
example, a log counting up successes and failures, or reports from 3 friends, or some objective health or
behavioural measure might be appropriate. Be creative. Read research studies and see how scientists
measure the constructs you are interested in.
iv) Discussion: reflect on what you have learned about self- and life-changes, life satisfaction, meaning in
life, different strengths, etc.? Refer to strengths and weaknesses, difficulties of changing the habits and
automatic processes, or you might explain why some techniques seemed to be more effective than others.
Interpret and integrate, don‟t just reiterate the results.
Module code: PSYP877
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Applications in Positive Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate advanced competence in using various positive psychology measuring instruments ;

apply a wide range of positive interventions across personal and professional domains ;

make interventions at the appropriate level within a system, based on the understanding of the

183
hierarchical relations within the system, and the ability to address the intended and unintended
consequences of interventions ;

contribute to the development of ethical standards in specific contexts; identify, and manage emerging
ethical issues; advance processes of ethical decision-making, and monitor consequences where
applicable
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods: Evaluation of assignments with the following instructions:
Individual assignment: Apply principles, theories and strategies from positive psychology / psychofortology
in a simulated clinical/work related context. Select a theory and develop a practical application from it.
Describe the intervention, evaluation of its outcome and write a report on it (3-5 pages – examination
purposes). Indicate how you implemented and evaluated the effectiveness of the intervention. Do a
presentation of approximately 10 minutes to the group and must have a hand-out of 1-3 pages for each
group member. It is important that you should reflect on and explicitly also note in your report what you have
learned in this process.
Sub-group assignment: Form small groups (name members), select a community context or target group,
develop an application / intervention to enhance their quality of life and well-being. Describe the conceptual
background, the intervention / strategies, outcome of evaluation, and your experience of this process. Also
indicate what you have done in this project, and what you have learned in this process. Reports are done
individually, and must be approximately 5 pages – for examination purposes. Structure your task reports
properly (e.g. demographic information, info on „client‟ and context, your aim, background theories used,
your programme /plan, method of implementation – indicate your part, results, evaluation of the effect of the
intervention, what you have learned, reference list - APA)
Module code: PSYP878
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Advanced Positive Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Develop awareness of meta-theoretical and philosophical perspectives in PP, the pertinent social,
economic, political, historical issues and the wider context of positive psychology and positive social
sciences

Develop critical awareness of current issues, debates, new insights and cutting edge issues within
positive psychology

Demonstrate the ability to contribute to scholarly debates around theories of knowledge and methods
of knowledge production in PP

Develop the capacity for analysis and synthesis: evaluation of concepts at a meta-level, capability to
identify assumptions, evaluation of statements with regard to evidence, detecting false logic or
reasoning, identification of implicit values, appropriate generalization, meaningful integration of facts
and inferences
Mode of delivery:
Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods: Component 1: Literature review with critical evaluation of an area of interest (3
000 words) Component 2: Conceptual representation of another facet of PP in a 15-minute mini-lecture
Module code: PSYP872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research Dissertation in Positive Psychology
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

Demonstrate embedded theoretical knowledge, understanding and experience needed to carry out
research into positive psychology areas (level descriptor 9a).

Apply appropriate research design; research methods and data analysis techniques (level descriptor
9a).

Design and implement strategies to access, process and manage information, and to defend
substantial ideas in the field of PP (level descriptor 9f);

Able to communicate ideas from PP to a wide range of audiences with different levels of knowledge or
expertise (level descriptor 9g)
Mode of delivery:
Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods: Dissertation will be examined by one internal and two external examiners.
Module code: RKKV871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Recreation Science (Dissertation)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic knowledge base of research methodologies and
techniques in Human Movement Science with specialist knowledge in Recreation Science;
184

synthesise and apply the knowledge of research methodologies and techniques applicable to one of
the above specialist areas in planning, composing and executing a research project;

identify and solve a complex research problem or question in one of the abovementioned specialist
areas by using skills for developing and processing information and the collecting, capturing,
processing, analysing and interpreting of research data;

present a mini-dissertation effectively and professionally and in compliance with the standards of
scientific professional writing under supervision using advanced IT and communicating the results to a
national specialist examination panel, using academic-professional reasoning; and

act in an ethically correct manner and within the required parameters during the execution of the miniresearch project and composition and completion of the mini-thesis.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Evaluation of dissertation by internal and external examiners.
Module code: TDHP811
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research Methodology
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to have:

the ability to analyse a range of research methodologies, methods and approaches with regard to their
appropriateness for investigating particular research problems to promote health;

the ability to interrogate multiple sources of knowledge to evaluate the knowledge and processes of
knowledge production critically in a variety of contexts that are particular to the field of health
promotion;

the competence to apply the dialectical relationship between the theory and praxis of health sciences;

the ability to contribute to systematic and disciplined critical, analytical thinking about and problem
solving of matters that are related to the field of health promotion; and

the knowledge and engagement in the transdisciplinary health approach to the promotion of health.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time
This degree is presented via contact learning with a blended learning environment approach, including two
theoretical modules as well as a research dissertation via contact and on-line delivery.
The compulsory theoretical core modules are completed in the first six months of study.
Assessment methods:
The following forms of continuous formative and summative assessment are used to ensure integrated
assessment of all exit level outcomes:

Reports and written assignments

Transdisciplinary group debates.

Written examination.
Above will be used as methods of outcome evaluation and written Examination.
Module code: TDHP812
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Transdisciplinary Health Promotion
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to have:

the ability to engage in dialogue with a transdisciplinary team that is at once between disciplines,
across different disciplines, and beyond all disciplines to promote health in an integrated manner;

the ability to identify and address ethical issues in health and health promotion, based on critical
reflection on the suitability of different ethical value systems to the context of health; and knowledge
the engagement in the field of health promotion that reflect an understanding of the theories and research
methodologies in this field, as well as an understanding of the application of such knowledge in a particular
health context.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time
This degree is presented via contact learning with a blended learning environment approach, including two
theoretical modules as well as a research dissertation via contact and on-line delivery.
The compulsory theoretical core modules are completed in the first six months of study.
Assessment methods:
The following forms of continuous formative and summative assessment are used to ensure integrated
assessment of all exit level outcomes:

Reports and written assignments

Transdisciplinary group debates.

Written examination.

Above will be used as methods of outcome evaluation and written Examination.
185
Module code: TDHP813
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to have:

the ability to conduct research under supervision in the field of health promotion within a
transdisciplinary context, using a range of skills to identify, analyse and address complex real-world
problems ethically; and

the ability to communicate research results in an oral presentation and in writing in a dissertation
according to the A-rules of the University.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time
This degree is presented via contact learning with a blended learning environment approach, including two
theoretical modules as well as a research dissertation via contact and on-line delivery.
The module is completed in the same year for fulltime and in two years for part-time students.
Assessment methods: : Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy
Module code: VERB871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Consumer Sciences)
Module outcomes:
After completing this module, students should be able to:

extended and systematic knowledge of the field of consumer sciences with specialist knowledge of
research methodology and consumer behaviour, as well as the professional practice of research
methodology;

coherent and critical insight into the theory, research methodology and techniques of consumer
behaviour research; the ability to offer principled criticism, evaluate research, and participate in
scientific debate; the ability to link theory to practice and vice versa, and to think epistemologically;

mastering of the research methods, techniques and technologies applicable to consumer sciences;

the ability to identify, analyse and address complex consumer problems in real life by the creative and
systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;

advanced skills in the processing of information by the application of critical analysis, synthesis and
independent evaluation in a review paper, and the ability to undertake and complete, with supervision,
a literature survey; and

the ability to present and communicate either literature-based or empirical research results to
specialist or lay audiences, by using professional academic discourse
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: VERB873
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini-dissertation (Consumer Sciences)
Module outcomes:
After completing this module you should have the following skills at your disposal:

extended and systematic knowledge of the field of consumer sciences with specialist knowledge of
research methodology and consumer behaviour, as well as the professional practice of research
methodology;

coherent and critical insight into the theory, research methodology and techniques of consumer
behaviour research; the ability to offer principled criticism, evaluate research, and participate in
scientific debate; the ability to link theory to practice and vice versa, and to think epistemologically;

mastering of the research methods, techniques and technologies applicable to consumer sciences;

the ability to identify, analyse and address complex consumer problems in real life by the creative and
systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;

advanced skills in the processing of information by the application of critical analysis, synthesis and
independent evaluation in a review paper, and the ability to undertake and complete, with supervision,
a literature survey; and

the ability to present and communicate either literature-based or empirical research results to
specialist or lay audiences, by using professional academic discourse.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: VERB876
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Consumer Behaviour and Research Methodology
b)
Module outcomes:
c)
Upon completion of this module the student should have:

An extended and systematic knowledge of the field of consumer sciences with specialist knowledge
186
of research methodology and consumer behaviour, as well as the professional practise of research
methodology;

Coherent and critical insight into the theory, research methodologies and techniques of consumer
behaviour research; the ability to offer principled criticism, evaluate on-going research, and participate
in academic debate; the ability to link theory to practice and vice versa, and to think epistemologically;

Mastering of the research methods, techniques and technologies applicable to consumer sciences;

The ability to identify, analyse and address complex consumer problems in real life by the creative
and systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;

Advanced skills in the processing of information by the application of critical analysis, synthesis and
independent evaluation in a review paper, and the ability to undertake and complete, with supervision,
a literature survey;

The ability to present and communicate either literature-based or empirical research results to
specialist or lay audiences, by using professional academic discourse.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
One examination per module.
Title: VGHB874
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Advanced Consumer Resource Management
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should have:

extended and systematic knowledge of consumer resource management, with specialist knowledge of
the consumers‟ needs;

the ability to offer principled criticism, evaluate on-going research, and participate in academic debate;
and also the ability to link theory to practice and vice versa, and to think epistemologically;

the ability to identify, analyse and address complex consumer problems in real life by the creative and
systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;

advanced skills in the processing of information by the application of critical analysis, synthesis and
independent evaluation in a review paper, and the ability to undertake and complete, with supervision,
a literature survey; and

the ability to present literature to specialist and lay audiences, in the format of professional academic
discourse.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
One examination per module.
Module code: VKLE874
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Advanced textiles
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

have an extended and systematic knowledge of textiles, with specialist knowledge of the
development of textiles as well as certain focus areas;

have the ability to offer principled criticism, evaluate on-going research, and participate in academic
debate; the ability to link theory to practice and vice versa, and to think epistemologically;

have the ability to identify, analyse and address complex consumer problems in real life by the
creative and systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;

have advanced skills in the processing of information by the application of critical analysis, synthesis
and independent evaluation in a review paper, and the ability to undertake and complete, with
supervision, a literature survey; and

have the ability to present literature and communicate it to specialist and lay audiences, by utilising
professional academic discourse.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VKLE878
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Specialised Fashion Industry
d)
Module outcomes:
e)
Upon completion of this module the student should:

have an extended and systematic knowledge of the fashion industry, with specialist knowledge of the
consumers‟ needs;

have the ability to offer principled criticism, evaluate on-going research, and participate in academic
debate; the ability to link theory to practice and vice versa, and to think epistemologically;

have the ability to identify, analyse and address complex consumer problems in real life by the
creative and systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;
187

have advanced skills in the processing of information by the application of critical analysis, synthesis
and independent evaluation in a review paper, and the ability to undertake and complete, with
supervision, a literature survey; and

have the ability to present literature and communicate it to specialist and lay audiences, by utilising
professional academic discourse.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: One examination per module.
Module code: VVDL874
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Advanced Food
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

have an extended and systematic knowledge of food, with specialist knowledge of relevant
international food-related trends;

be able to show coherent and critical insight into the field of applied food through the ability to offer
principled criticism on the various areas in order to wage an academic debate on these;

have the ability to identify, analyse and address the complexity of the problem as presented in the
assignment, and the relevant problems and questions on South Africa (or Sub Saharan Africa) by the
creative and systematic utilising of theory, research methods and literature;

show the ability to present and communicate either literature-based of empirical research results to
specialist or lay audiences; and

integrate sources analytically and critically; be able to motivate and justify his/her point of view, and
evaluate that of others.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
One examination per module.
Module code: VOED871
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Dietetics)
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

have specialist knowledge concerning critical health problems in the field of nutrition;

during a discussion, criticize and evaluate theories, research methodologies and –techniques related
to recent nutrition research, and illustrate the ability to reconcile practise with theory, and visa versa;

master the implementation of research methods, -techniques and technician principles applicable to
nutrition, and demonstrate the ability to undertake a research project under supervision, and conclude
results in writing;

show competency concerning the exploitation and processing of information by means of the following
principles: identification, critical analysis, synthesis and independent evaluation of quantitative and/or
qualitative data; under supervision undertake a study of literature and recent research in a specialist
nutritional area;

interpret research findings in a scientifically accountable manner and write a dissertation on the basis
thereof whilst contributing to the knowledge of and insight in the subject field.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy.
Module code: VOED873
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Mini-dissertation (Dietetics)
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

have specialist knowledge of the field of dietetics/nutrition as theory and subject-field, understand and
apply research methodology and techniques to critically evaluate current research and on theoretical
grounds participate in professional academic discussions;

undertake literature driven and analytical research in an ethical and professional manner and under
the supervision of an academic leader,

communicate research results and outcomes to specialist- or lay audiences by utilising professional
academic discourse and write a dissertation on the basis of these findings which comply with the
standards of professional academic writing.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Internal and external examination according to the NWU policy.
188
Module code: VOED874
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Community Nutrition
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

demonstrate extensive and systematic knowledge on the complex relation between nutrition and
health with regard to malnutrition (over- and under feeding). Included is nutrition transition in
developmental countries, as well as the exceptional vulnerability in the lifestyle of developmental
populations concerning chronic illnesses, the double burden of illnesses, and global as well as South
African figures of appearing illnesses. The student should also understand the factors contributing to
food security and the influence of food security on nutrition status;

identify the most relevant public health problems in South Africa, analyse, evaluate and apply the
public health-nutrition cycle to develop ethical accountable programmes offering innovative solutions
for identified problems;

show a complete understanding concerning the complexity of and need for a comprising food- and
nutrition policy, and be able to critically evaluate and analyse factors influencing food- and nutrition
policy, and develop an accountable, scientifically founded food- and nutrition policy for South Africa.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:Written and practical assignments, PowerPoint presentations, written exams
Module code: VOED875
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Advanced Nutrition Science
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

reflect an advanced understanding of the evidence based process used to make health claims or
health recommendations, and be able to motivate the contributions of different study designs in the
process;

partially experience the evidence-based process through writing of a qualitative, systematic
review/report on a specific subject;

systematically collect and process all published literature concerning a specific subject;

critically evaluate the quality of research methodology concerning published articles;

interpret scientific results to define scientifically grounded conclusions and recommendations;

Scientifically communicate the process and results in writing.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Written and practical assignments, PowerPoint presentations, written exams
Module code: VOED876
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Sport Nutrition
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

have extensive and systematic knowledge on the different muscle tissue and their function, energy
systems contributing to energy production during the physical activity and regulatory factors involved
in energy metabolism, exercise inductive oxidative stress and anti-oxidants, macronutrients and
energy needs, micronutrients, nutritional ergogenic and sport supplements and the female athlete
tirade, and be able to analyse the nutritional needs of athletes and implement a nutrition care plan,
based on ethical principles during all seasons;

Demonstrate the ability to develop an effective nutrition care programme for an athlete and athletic
team according to their specific needs based on the guidelines of successful nutrition to enhance
sport performance, and professionally discuss his/her theory-based solution.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Written and practical assignments, PowerPoint presentations, written exams
Module code: VOED880
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Nutrition support of the paediatric patient
Module outcomes:

The outcomes of this module are available in the relevant study guide as well as on request at the
subject group Nutrition in Building G16.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy.
Module code: VOED882
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Nutrition support of the critically ill
Module outcomes:

The outcomes of this module are available in the relevant study guide as well as on request at the
189
subject group Nutrition
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy.
Module code: VPBV872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Health Science Management)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

manage health services in a community centred, culture sensitive manner with the purpose to
facilitate the health of a person, family and/or a community.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: VPGV872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Community Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

conduct research that contributes to promotion, maintenance and restoration of the quality of life of a
person, family and/or community by means of community centred-, culture sensitive approach.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods:
Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: VPKN874
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Research Methodology
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

explain the meaning of scientific research and nursing research;

provide reasons why nursing research is essential;

discuss the logical steps of the research process;

conceptualize a research project;

conduct a relevant and comprehensive literature search for a research project;

select an appropriate approach within a specific research paradigm;

write a research proposal; and

present a complete research proposal to a panel of experts and colleagues.
Mode of delivery: Contact education.
Assessment methods:
Continuous assessment by means of a variety of methods. Examination by at
least one internal and one external examiner.
Module code: VPKV872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Professional Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

conduct research that contributes to the promotion, maintenance and restoration of a patient‟s quality
of life within a community centred-, culture sensitive approach.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: VPOV872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Health Science Education)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

conduct research that contributes to the quality of life of a person, family and/or community by means
of health science education within a community centred-, culture sensitive approach.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Module code: VPVV872
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 9
Title: Dissertation (Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

facilitate the quality of life of a patient through the promotion, maintenance and restoration of health
within a community centred, culture sensitive approach.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods:
Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
190
G.2.3
DOCTORAL DEGREES
Module code: DIET971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Dietetics)
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should have:

practice on the highly skilled level as dietician;

act as a leader in the profession and also during functioning in the profession;

solve problems;

guide and lead research programmes;

act as study leader or co-leader for students up the PhD level;

recruit research funds; and

introduce research results through presentations and publications in subject related
periodicals/magazines.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy.
Module code: FCHG971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Pharmaceutical Chemistry)
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to:

identify a research question / need, and to plan and execute an applicable research design in a
scientific and ethical way by using suitable research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research findings in a scientifically responsible way and to compile a research
report from it; and

communicate research finding, orally or in writing, in a scientific and ethical way.
Mode of delivery Fulltime – Completion of a research project under the guidance of a supervisor.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy
Module code: FMSG971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Pharmaceutics)
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to:

identify a research question / need, and to plan and execute an applicable research design in a
scientific and ethical way by using suitable research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research findings in a scientifically responsible way and to compile a research
report from it; and

communicate research finding, orally or in writing, in a scientific and ethical way.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Completion of a research project under the guidance of a supervisor.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy.
Module code: FKLG971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Pharmacology)
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module the student should be able to:

identify a research question / need, and to plan and execute an applicable research design in a
scientific and ethical way by using suitable research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research findings in a scientifically responsible way and to compile a research
report from it; and

communicate research finding, orally or in writing, in a scientific and ethical way.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime – Completion of a research project under the guidance of a supervisor.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to the NWU policy
Module code: FPKG971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Pharmacy Practice)
Module outcomes:
Upon completion of this module the student should:

be endowed with advanced knowledge and skills to identify a new, relevant research question within
the specific research field of Pharmacy Practice;

be able to plan and perform a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research topic in a scientific and
ethical manner by using suitable research methods, techniques and procedures;

interpret and integrate research results in a scientifically justifiable way and compile a research report
191
from it; and

be able to communicate research results in writing and verbally in a scientific and ethical way.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime/part-time - contact  It is expected from students to complete a research
project under supervision of a supervisor(s).
Assessment methods External and internal examining according to the NWU policy
Module code: FLGB971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Occupational Hygiene)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should:

be equipped with advanced knowledge and skills in order to identify a relevant research question
within the field of Occupational Hygiene and Safety;

plan and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research design by using suitable research
methods, techniques and procedures in a scientific and ethical way; and

interpret the research findings in a scientifically accountable manner and write a thesis on the basis of
these findings.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by two external and one internal examiner.
Module code: FLGX971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Physiology)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should:

be equipped with advanced knowledge and skills in order to identify a relevant research question
within the field of Cardiovascular Physiology;

plan and execute a suitable quantitative and/or qualitative research design by using suitable research
methods, techniques and procedures in a scientific and ethical way; and

interpret the research findings in a scientifically accountable manner and write a thesis on the basis of
these findings.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods:
Evaluation by two external examiners and one internal examiner.
Module code: MBWK971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Human Movement Science)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic specialist knowledge base of research methodologies
and techniques that are at the forefront of Human Movement Science;

synthesise and apply the knowledge of the most advanced research methodologies and techniques
applicable to a specialist area in Human Movement Science in planning, composing and executing a
complex research project;

identify and solve a complex research problem or question at the forefront of a specialist area by
using skills for developing and processing information and collecting, capturing, processing, analysing
and interpreting research data;

independently, effectively and professionally present a dissertation that complies with the standards of
scientific professional writing using advanced IT and communicate the results to an international
specialist examination panel, using academic-professional reasoning; and

act in an ethically correct manner and within the required parameters during the execution of the
research project and composition and completion of the thesis.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Evaluation of thesis by internal and external examiners.
Module code: MWKN971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Social Work)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

The utilisation of the ecosystem approach in the extension and enhancement of social work
knowledge;

The identification of a research problem of a highly complex nature in the field of social work of which
the solution may contribute to the extension of the social work knowledge base;

The formulation and application of a suitable research design and procedure;
192

The analysing and application, interpretation and critical evaluation of research-related data;

The presentation and reporting on the research data in the form of a thesis of high quality; and

The dissemination of the newly acquired knowledge to social workers and other relevant role players.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime and Part-time.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: PSYC971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Psychology)
Module outcomes:
After the completion of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate advanced and specialised knowledge and skills to identify a social relevant research
question in the domain of psychology, which can be researched individually or interdisciplinary;

design an appropriate quantitative and/or qualitative research design which will make a significant
contribution to the encyclopaedia of psychological knowledge;

independently execute the research in an ethical- and scientific way by utilising appropriate research
methods, techniques and procedures; and

interpret the research findings in a scientific accountable way and report/communicate this in a thesis
that meets the academic en professional standards and regulations of the NWU.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact / Distance.
Assessment methods: Internal and external evaluation according to NWU policy.
Module code: RKKX971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Recreation Science)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should be able to:

demonstrate a comprehensive and systematic specialist knowledge base of research methodologies
and techniques that are at the forefront of Human Movement Science;

synthesise and apply the knowledge of the most advanced research methodologies and techniques
applicable to a specialist area in Human Movement Science in planning, composing and executing a
complex research project;

identify and solve a complex research problem or question at the forefront of a specialist area by
using skills for developing and processing information and collecting, capturing, processing, analysing
and interpreting research data;

independently, effectively and professionally present a dissertation that complies with the standards of
scientific professional writing using advanced IT and communicate the results to an international
specialist examination panel, using academic-professional reasoning; and

act in an ethically correct manner and within the required parameters during the execution of the
research project and composition and completion of the thesis.
Mode of delivery: Fulltime/contact. No modules are presented "online" or presented from one campus to
students on another campus.
Assessment methods: Evaluation of thesis by internal and external examiners.
Module code: VERB971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Consumer Science)
Module outcomes:
After completion of this module, you should have the following skills:

a comprehensive, extensive and systematic knowledge of the consumer sciences field, with specialist
knowledge of research methodology and consumer behaviour, as well as professional research
methodology practice;

coherent and critical insight into advanced theories and research methodologies, as well as
techniques of consumer behaviour research; the ability to debate about and evaluate leading
specialist research; the ability to link and integrate theory with practice, and to think epistemologically;

the ability to demonstrate substantial independent research and advanced learning by expanding the
personal knowledge basis and by exposing research to peer evaluation;

the ability to identify, conceptualise and design complex consumer problems (consumer research)
and issues; and

advanced information processing skills and the ability to apply critical and independent evaluation, as
well as to initiate and execute a literature study independently.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime – Contact.
Assessment methods: Evaluation by two external examiners and one internal examiner.
193
Module code: VOED971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis (Nutrition)
Module outcomes:
After the module has been completed, the student should:

demonstrate proof of a meaningful contribution to the development of:

new scientific knowledge and/or,

new skills in a specific research field;

utilise the qualification in the provision of scientific researchers for South Africa, who dispose of
extended theoretical knowledge and practical skills in the science of nutrition and also contribute to
extend leadership in innovative and core-based nutrition care in the country.
Mode of delivery:
Fulltime / Part-time – Contact.
Assessment methods:
External and internal examining according to NWU policy.
Module code: VPBP971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis: (Health Sciences Management)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate a high level of critical-analytical problem solving skills;

practice health science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in health science;

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of health science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to NWU policy..
Module code: VPEP971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis: (Psychiatric Community Nursing)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

practice nursing science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in nursing science;

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of nursing science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods External and internal examining according to NWU policy.
Module code: VPGP971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis: (Community Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

practice nursing science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in nursing science;

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of nursing science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by the research committee.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to NWU policy.
Module code: VPOP971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis: (Health Science Education)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

practice health science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in health science;
194

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of health science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to NWU policy..
Module code: VPPP971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Title: Thesis: (Professional Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

practice nursing science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in nursing science;

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of nursing science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to NWU policy..
Module code: VPVP971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis: (Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

practice nursing science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in nursing science;

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of nursing science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to NWU policy..
Module code: VPVV971
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 10
Title: Thesis: (Nursing Science)
Module outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

practice nursing science on a specialized level;

distinguish him/herself as leader in nursing science;

apply advanced research methodology, initiate research, predict outcomes and apply results;

make a meaningful contribution to the knowledge base of nursing science;

act independently as researcher;

maintain specialized professional excellence by means of life-long learning; and

initiate and maintain networks on a national- and international level.
Mode of delivery: Research under guidance of a study leader supported by research committee.
Assessment methods: External and internal examining according to NWU policy.
195
G.2.4
POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMAS
Module code: FKLT531
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Principles of Pharmacokinetics
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of pharmacokinetic principles and the factors
influencing pharmacokinetics;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources of knowledge and to retrieve the latest
information on pharmacokinetic principles with a view to apply pharmacokinetic principles in
pharmacological calculations within clinical scenarios and case studies;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT532
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Principles of Pharmacodynamics
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated knowledge and engagement in pharmacodynamics principles to assess the
impact of drugs on a patient, to assess drug actions from pharmacodynamics parameters and to
determine beforehand whether or not a certain combination of drugs is desirable;

demonstrate advanced knowledge of the various drug-receptor interactions of agonists and
antagonists;

demonstrate the ability to critically evaluate and interpret in vitro and in vivo experimental data and
findings and then apply the principles of linear drug
receptor interactions to the complicated non-linear drug-receptor interactions in order to address and
solve complex pharmacodynamics problems;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods:
Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT533
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs for Pain, Inflammation, Fever and Airway Diseases
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions and pharmacokinetics of drugs used in the management of pain, inflammation, fever and
airways diseases;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios and to demonstrate a patient-orientated approach in order to advise patient of
effective drug use;
196

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources of knowledge and to retrieve the latest
information on drugs for treating disorders related to pain, inflammation, fever and airways diseases;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT541
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs and the Peripheral Nervous System
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions and pharmacokinetics in the peripheral nervous system;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to the peripheral nervous system;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on drugs
for treating the appropriate disease states;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT542
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Chemotherapy of Infections and Infestations
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective
pharmacological mechanism of actions and pharmacokinetics of antimicrobial drugs and other drugs
used in the treatment of infectious diseases;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to infections and infestation and to demonstrate a patient-directed approach
and the ability to advise patients regarding effective anti-infective drug use in view of the global
increase in microbial drug resistance;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on drugs
for treating an ever changing microbiological environment;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,
197

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT551
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs and the Central Nervous System
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions and pharmacokinetics in the central nervous system;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to the central nervous system;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources of knowledge and to retrieve the latest
information on drugs for treating the appropriate disease states;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT552
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Hormones, Hominoids and Hormone Antagonists
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions, site of release and site of action as well as pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetic
parameters of hormone-active drugs;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to the endocrine systems and hormone-active drugs ;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on
hormone-active drugs in order to provide effective patient advice with regard to the use of hormoneactive drugs;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge the social-ethical implications of specific hormone-active drug treatment regimens and
defend or oppose the application of a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where
required to change conduct or guidelines.
Mode of delivery:
Distance learning
Assessment Methods:
Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
198
Module code: FKLT561
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs and the Cardiovascular System
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective
pharmacological mechanism of actions and pharmacokinetics of drugs used in the management of
cardiovascular diseases as well as drugs that affect renal and cardiovascular functioning;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to the cardiovascular and renal systems;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on drugs
for treating various cardiovascular disease states;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT562
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Drugs for GIT and Skin Disorders
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions and pharmacokinetics of drug used in the treatment of gastrointestinal tract and skin
disorders;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to the gastrointestinal tract and skin;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on drugs
for treating conditions associated with the gastrointestinal tract and skin disorders;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT563
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Vitamins, Haematopoietic and Immunopharmacology
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions and pharmacokinetics of drugs used in the treatment of cancer, various disease states that
result from vitamin and mineral deficiencies, disorders pertaining to the blood forming organs, and
disorders of the neuro-immune system;

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
199
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to vitamins, haematopoietic and immunopharmacology;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on drugs
for treating the appropriate disease states;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT564
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Advanced Pharmacological Principles
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of clinical pharmacokinetic principles, appropriate
drug dosing schedules and different drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate
different drug treatments in the pharmacological field;

reveal the ability to use the principles of chrono-pharmacology to enhance therapy in patients within
clinical scenarios;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate gene therapy;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest pharmacological
information on drugs for treating various disease states;

participate via academically sound communication principles in online group discussions with a view
to demonstrate the ability to use learnt knowledge to solve contextual problems;

critically judge ethical conduct of other healthcare workers and to defend or oppose the application of
a social and ethical code in appropriate drug selections and where required to change conduct or
guidelines.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: FKLT571
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Integrated Pharmacology
Module Outcomes:
After successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:
The programme outcomes states that successful completion of the Post Graduate Diploma in
Pharmacological Principles of Drug Therapy will enable the prescribing medical practitioner and persons
from related disciplines to exercise accountable selections of drugs, founded on pharmacological and
ethical principles, in the best interest of the patient. These primary programme outcomes imply that for the
oral
examination (Module 12) the student must be able to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge and insight into the dynamics and kinetics and
interactions between drugs;

reveal the ability to compile individualised pharmaco-therapeutic approaches, based on advanced
pharmacological knowledge, insights and an appropriate ethical value system.
These knowledge, skills and values will be evaluated with regard to all topics of the preceding modules
including your ability to:

demonstrate integrated and advanced knowledge of drug classifications, their respective mechanism
of actions and pharmacokinetics of all drugs;
200

demonstrate integrated knowledge of therapeutic applications, contra-indications, side effects and
relevant drug interactions with a view to analyse and critically evaluate different drug treatments within
clinical scenarios relevant to all drugs and to demonstrate a patient-orientated approach in order to
advise patient of effective drug use;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate treatment scenarios and propose rational alternatives;

reveal the ability to critically evaluate multiple sources and to retrieve the latest information on drugs
for treating the various disease states.
Mode of delivery:
Distance learning
Assessment Methods: Learning outcomes for each module is assessed via:

an assignment,

a moderated electronic group discussion (excluding ), and

an electronic examination.
After completion of all modules as prescribed, the student must successfully complete an oral examination
(via telephone conferencing), including an external examiner and two internal examiners, on all
pharmacological topics (see Module 12) to obtain the postgraduate diploma.
Module code: VPVK574
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 8
Title: The Advanced Midwife as Practitioner, Leader and Consultant
Module-outcomes:
After completion of this module the student will be able to:

practice as an advanced midwife, acting as a leader and consultant in a variety of scenarios including
a clinical specialist, manager of a reproductive health service as well as in a private practice;

act as a facilitator in mobilising the community to participate in promoting, maintaining and restoring
health; and

utilise auditing and quality control measures in attending to maternal and peri-natal morbidity and
mortality.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact on Potchefstroom Campus.
Assessment methods:
Assignments, tests and examination paper
Module code: VPVK575
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: The Advanced Midwife as Clinician in ante-, intra- and postpartum context
Module-outcomes:
After completion of this module the student will be able to:

promote, maintain and restore health by using the scientific approach in assessing, diagnosing,
planning; and

implement, evaluate and document holistic family-centred advanced midwifery care, during the ante-,
intra- and postpartum period.
Mode of delivery: Part-time – Contact on Potchefstroom Campus.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: VPVK576
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: The Advanced Midwife as Clinician in Neonatal Context
Module-outcome:
After completion of this module the student will be able to:

promote, maintain and restore health by using the scientific approach in assessing, diagnosing,
planning, implementing, evaluating and documenting holistic neonatal care; and

utilise knowledge regarding the pathology and clinical features of neonatal conditions as well as
relevant pharmacology in the advanced midwifery management of neonates with compromised health.
Mode of delivery Part-time – Contact on Potchefstroom Campus.
Assessment methods:
Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: VPVP584
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 8
Title: Advanced Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Practica
Module-outcomes:
After exposure to the clinical experience, the student will be able to:

manage complicated midwifery patients and neonates referred to them; and

utilise appropriate technology and techniques while caring in a scientific, individualised and holistic
manner within the legal-ethical framework of South Africa.
Mode of delivery:
Completion of a portfolio and clinical practica –hours (SANC) according to guidelines and instruction.
Assessment methods: Portfolio and examination paper.
201
Module code: NSCT211
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Grounding of Community Nursing Science
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

Implement the scientific community nursing process in caring for the individual, the family and the
community;

Consider the physical, psychological, social and cultural dimensions pertaining to the family and the
community; the influence of the environment with regard to disease patterns and tendencies; and

The development, organisation, functioning and control of community health services in international
and national health systems.
Mode of delivery:
Contact sessions at selected study centres. Completion of a portfolio and clinical
practica –hours (SANC) according to guidelines and instruction.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests, portfolio and examination paper.
Module code: NSCT221
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Principles of Primary Health Care
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

discuss the primary health care delivery in South Africa and the role, functions and responsibilities of
the community health nurse in rendering a comprehensive primary health care service;

exhibit knowledge and skill in implementing the primary health care principles; and

demonstrate knowledge in assessing, diagnosing and managing individuals of all age groups to
promote rational and safe drug use at primary health care level.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods:
Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSCT271
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Community Nursing Science Practice
Module-outcomes:
On completion of the practica for NSCT271 the student should be able to:

provide basic health care and manage the health problems of the individual, family, groups and the
community within the framework of a comprehensive primary health care system as a member of the
multidisciplinary team;

exhibit knowledge and skill in assessing and managing the mother and child, adult and geriatric
patient; and

manage and control communicable diseases within the community.
Mode of delivery: Completion of a portfolio and clinical practica –hours (SANC) according to guidelines
and instruction.
Assessment methods:
Portfolio.
Module code: NSDT111
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Health Science Dynamics
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate a sound knowledge of the health care of South Africa with reference to the developing
world and health care in South Africa; demonstrate an understanding of health care as a caring
concern;

demonstrate the ability to debate the concept “professionalism” as related to health care
professionals;

demonstrate the ability to act ethically in any given health care situation; develop the self through the
study of Health Science Dynamics regarding personal and professional growth; and

participate effectively as a health practitioner in the multi-disciplinary team.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests, portfolio and examination paper.
Module code: NSET111
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Health Science Education: Introduction
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate knowledge of the psychological framework regarding human behaviour in the
educational process;

be knowledgeable about growth dynamics;
202

have an understanding about information processing, learning strategies and motivation; and

motivate the imperativeness of effective education and achieving positive teaching outcomes.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods:
Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSET211
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Curriculum Studies
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate knowledge, skills and attitude regarding SAQA/NQF/OBE; the skills development act;
outcomes based education; outcomes based education and the curriculum; and

study guide development and lesson plans; outcomes based learning and the learning accompanist;
outcomes based learning and the adult student.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSET221
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Didactics
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate knowledge; skills and attitude regarding the teaching and learning context, construction
of knowledge; determinants of learning; dimensions of learning; creation of a context conducive to
learning (facilitation-, clinical skills and assessment).
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods:
Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSET271
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Health Science Education: Practica
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

demonstrate confidence in the planning of learning opportunities;

utilise various teaching strategies; and

create a context conducive to learning; evaluate learning; write a report on nursing school
administration.
Mode of delivery: Completion of a portfolio according to guidelines and instruction.
Assessment methods: Portfolio.
Module code: NSFT121
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Financial Health Management
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

discuss cost and financial management in health services;

understand the cost elements in health care services;

understand planning and budgeting in health services; and

understand cost control and decision making.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods:
Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSHT211
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment And Care: Introduction
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

discuss the consultation process and implement the history taking, physical examination, diagnosis
and management of a patient; and

exhibit knowledge and skill in the assessment, diagnosis and management of patients with ear-, nose
and throat, ophthalmological-, respiratory- and cardiovascular conditions in adult and children.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment methods: One examination paper.
Module code: NSHT221
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment And Care
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:
203

exhibit knowledge and skill in assessment , diagnosis and management of patients with gastrointestinal-, haematological, endocrine, emergency, uro-genital, dermatological, musculo-skeletal and
nervous system conditions; and

assess, manage and treat communicable diseases and treat patients with special problems.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSHT271
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment And Care: Practica
1.
Module-outcomes:
2.
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

provide a comprehensive primary health care service on both the adult and child; take a full history
and do a physical examination on a patient;

assemble and synthesize the information systematically for diagnosis and proper management of the
patient; and

act independently within the legal and ethical framework in a diverse health team of individuals and
families in the community.
Mode of delivery:
Completion of a portfolio and clinical practica –hours (SANC) according to guidelines and instruction.
Assessment methods: Portfolio and practical examination.
Module code: NSKT211
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Pharmacology
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this modules the student should be able to:

demonstrate knowledge on common terms used in pharmacology.

Success depends on knowledge of the pharmacological language; operationalization of the nursing
process. (i.e. assessment, potential nursing diagnosis, planning, nursing interventions and evaluation)
for patients receiving medication as part of a holistic patient care process; and the provision of
sufficient patient/client education regarding the use of medication.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSMT211
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Unit/Clinic Management
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

explain what management and unit management is;

apply the management process in the nursing unit;

debate the necessity of policy and procedure manuals in the nursing unit;

describe the unit managers‟ financial and budgetary responsibilities;

illustrate an effective staff scheduling plan;

outline the supervisory duties of the unit manager and; and

formulate a disaster and emergency plan for the nursing unit.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: NSMT221
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Human Resources Management
Module-outcomes:
After studying this module the student should be able to:

discuss the principles of quality improvement;

apply the process of quality improvement;

implement a quality improvement programme in the health service;

formulate and apply total quality management in the health service;

apply risk management and case management; and

implement information systems in the management of the health organisation.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
204
Module code: NSMT271
Semester 1 and 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Health Service Management Practica
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

apply the principles of management in the practice of Health Service Management by: evaluating
clinic/hospital/units philosophy, policy, procedure manuals, formulate new philosophy, policy and
procedures;

discuss the application of Human Resource implementation in the clinic/hospital/unit; discuss the
quality control used in the clinic/hospital/unit; provide a schematic outline of a personnel development
programme; and

discuss the role of the Health Service Manager in the clinic/hospital/unit with regard to the finances
and personnel/staff/manpower.
Mode of delivery: Completion of portfolio according to guidelines and instruction.
Assessment methods: Portfolio.
Module code: NSRT121
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Health Science Research
Module-outcomes:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

appreciate the meaning and usefulness of Health Science Research; and

demonstrate a proficiency in utilising the correct methodology for each type of research; complete the
research process with confidence and utilise research results in the health practice.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
G.2.5
ADDITIONAL MODULES FROM OTHER FACULTIES
Module code: IOPS311
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Organisation Psychology
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be able to:

know and understand the research, theories, and approaches as regards organisational behaviour,
stress, motivation, job satisfaction, leadership, group behaviour, organisational politics, conflict,
decision making, communication and organisational design;

develop a sensitivity for individual, group and organisational problems on national and international
level and be flexible regarding its management; apply skills to diagnose individual, group and
organisational problems and to intervene and/or refer individuals to professionals;

facilitate individuals and/or groups and/or advise the relevant parties on solutions; know and
understand the nature, reasons for and history of organisational culture, organisational climate and
organisational development;

know and understand the competencies of an organisational development consultant; apply skills to
diagnose problems and opportunities and refer/facilitate/consult individuals and groups;

identify changes impacting on the working environment and know and understand the management of
change;

know and understand organisational diagnosis and apply techniques to diagnose problems and
opportunities in organisations; and

know and understand elementary organisational development interventions; and apply skills to
develop, implement and evaluate these interventions in the workplace.
Mode of delivery: .Distance learning
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass the first opportunity.
Module code: BSKT221
Semester 2
NQF-Level: 7
Title: Personnel Psychology
Module Outcomes:
After the completion of the module, the student should be able to:

know and understand the nature, value and functions of human resource management and its
challenges;

demonstrate a knowledge of and insight into job analysis, human resource planning, recruitment,
205
selection, compensation, performance management, induction, training and development;
apply skills to develop these programmes within the working environment;
show knowledge and insight regarding the importance of a safe and healthy work environment that
enhances the employees‟ quality of working; and

apply knowledge and skills to compile human resource management programmes.
Mode of delivery: Distance learning
Assessment methods: Students must write an exam. A second exam opportunity is available if a student
did not pass.
Module code: OBAD112
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Introduction to Public Management
Module-outcome:
On completion of this module the student should be able to:

understand public management and administration as a discipline; public policy and legislative
framework for implementation; and

achieve sustainable development: the role of local government.
Mode of delivery: Contact sessions at selected study centres.
Assessment methods: Assignments, tests and examination paper.
Module code: STTN111
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Descriptive Statistics
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to:

demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the most important statistical techniques including: sampling,
graphic presentation of data, descriptive measures of locality and dispersion, least-squares line
fitting, prediction of least squares, correlation coefficient, multiple linear regression (and applying it to
predictions and time series data), and demonstrate knowledge of movement components to predict
outcomes and take practical considerations into account for sampling and sample size;

demonstrate problem-solving skills in terms of known and unknown problems by using samples,
graphic presentation of data, descriptive measures of locality and dispersion, least-squares line
fitting, prediction of least squares, correlation coefficients, multiple linear regression, and applying it
for purposes of predicting time series data; and

critically compare various methods and techniques including sampling and descriptive measures of
locality and dispersion in unfamiliar real-life situations.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a formal examination.
Module code: STTN124
Semester 1
NQF-Level: 6
Title: Practical Statistics
Module outcomes:
After completion of the module successful students should be able to demonstrate knowledge of, and apply
in practice, the following:

correlation and interpretation of least-squares line fitting, fitting of a regression function, prediction
by means of regression function, multiple linear regression and selection of predictors;

factor analysis and analysis of results of factor analysis, interpretation of factor matrices and construct
validity;

hypothesis testing, calculation of probability, central limit setting, significance and p-values;

one-way ANOVA testing and the interpretation of results obtained with it;

the practical significance of effect sizes of differences in the means of two populations;

categorical data analysis based on contingency tables, chi-square goodness of fit tests and
independence tests;

distribution methods, parametric and non- parametric inferential methods; and

identify statistical concepts in practice, and apply suitable statistical methods to summarise,
understand and analyse data by using computer software developed for statistical purposes.
Mode of delivery: Contact teaching – only fulltime.
Assessment methods:
Written assignments, class activities, group- and individual work, as well as a formal examination.


206
G.3
LIST OF MODULES
G.3.1
SCHOOL OF BIOKINETICS, RECREATION AND SPORT SCIENCE
Module code
Descriptive name
MBWB681
Biokinetics: Orthopaedics
32
MBWB682
Biokinetics: Clinical
32
MBWB683
Biokinetics: Theory / Health
32
MBWB684
Biokinetics: Professional Internship
32
MBWK681
Applied Research methodology and mini-dissertation
32
MBWK682
Kinderkinetics theory
32
MBWK683
Applied Kinderkinetics Practical
24
MBWK684
Professional Internship
24
MBWK685
Applied Exercise Physiology
16
MBWK686
Child Welfare and Health Promotion
16
MBWS682
Applied Sport Physiology
32
MBWS683
Applied Biomechanics
16
MBWS684
Applied Sport Psychology
16
MBWS685
Sport Science Internship
24
MBWS686
Sport Science Practice
24
RKKX673
Recreation Management
16
RKKX677
Therapeutic Recreation
24
RKKX678
Advanced Facilitation
16
RKKX679
Leisure Programming
16
RKKX681
Applied Recreation Management
24
G.3.2
Credits
FOCUS AREA: PHYSICAL ACTIVITY, SPORT AND RECREATION
(PhASRec)
MBWB871
Dissertation: Biokinetics
180
MBWK871
Dissertation: Kinderkinetics
180
MBWS871
Dissertation: Sport Science
180
RKKV871
Dissertation: Recreation Sciences
180
MBWK971
Thesis: Human Movement Sciences
360
RKKX971
Thesis: Recreation Sciences
360
207
G.3.3
SCHOOL OF PSYCHOSOCIAL BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES
Module code
Descriptive name
MWKC874
Alternative care
20
MWKC875
Adoption
28
MWKF876
General Child Assessment (Semester 1)
24
MWKF877
Sexual Abuse and Physical Battering (Semester 1)
24
MWKF878
MWKF879
Credits
Trauma Assessment and Investigation Process
(Semester 2)
Report Writing and Social Worker as Expert in Court
(Semester 2)
24
24
MWKF880
Research Theory: Social Work
32
MWKK874
Child Protection as Field of Service
20
MWKK875
Children as a Vulnerable Group
20
MWKK876
Social Work Intervention in the Field of Child Protection
24
MWKK877
Substitute Care in South Africa
24
MWKP811
Basic principles, theories and philosophy of play therapy
22
MWKP812
The child as client
22
MWKP813
Play Therapy intervention with children
22
MWKP821
Community based play therapy intervention
22
MWKP880
Research Theory and community engagement
32
MWKS811
Basic principles, theories and philosophy of Gestalt Play
Therapy
20
MWKS821
Gestalt Play Therapy: Advanced Intervention
16
MWKS875
The therapeutic relationship and process in Gestalt Play
Therapy
20
MWKS877
Practice-based utilisation of Gestalt Play Therapy
32
PSYC671
Psychometrics
8
PSYC672
Psychological Evaluation
16
PSYC673
Applied Positive Psychology
16
PSYC674
Research Psychology
16
PSYC675
Intervention Techniques
16
PSYC676
Theoretical Perspectives on the Helping Relationship
16
PSYC677
Community Psychology
16
PSYC678
Psychopathology
16
PSYC679
Ethics and Professional Conduct
8
PSYC681
Facilitation of Community Wellness
16
PSYH611
Psychological evaluation.
16
PSYH612
Community psychology: Theory
8
208
PSYH613
Applied positive psychology
16
PSYH671
Research and ethics: Theory and practice
20
PSYH672
Psychopathology
8
PSYH621
Intervention techniques
16
PSYH622
Theoretical perspectives on rendering help
16
PSYH623
Child and adolescent psychology
16
PSYH671
Research and ethics: Theory and practice
20
PSYH672
Psychopathology
8
PSYC874
Critical Research Skills
16
PSYC875
Quantitative Research Methods
16
PSYC876
Qualitative Research Methods
16
PSYC877
Project Management
16
PSYC878
Psychopharmacology, Adult Psychopathology and
Neuropsychology
20
PSYC879
Child- and adolescent pathology and Therapy
20
PSYC880
Theory of Psychological Intervention
20
PSYC881
Applied Psychological Interventions
20
PSYC882
Professional aspects, Psychodiagnostics and practical
work
20
PSYC883
Ethics, Psychodiagnostics and Practical work
20
PSYC884
Applied Psychology and Community Interventions
20
PSYC885
Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and advanced
Psychopathology in Clinical Psychology
20
PSYV879
Child- and adolescent pathology and Therapy
20
PSYV880
PSYV885
G.3.4
Theory of Psychological Intervention in Counselling
Psychology
Psychopharmacology, Neuropsychology and advanced
Psychopathology in Counselling Psychology
20
20
AFRICA UNIT FOR TRANSDISCIPLINARY HEALTH RESEARCH (AUTHeR)
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
FLGX873
Mini-Dissertation (Occupational Hygiene)
96
FLGB971
Thesis : Occupational Hygiene
384
MWKF873
Research Dissertation (Social Work – Forensic Practice)
60
MWKK873
Mini-dissertation (Social Work – Child Protection)
60
MWKN971
Thesis: Social Work
360
MWKP873
Mini-dissertation (Play therapy)
60
MWKS873
Mini-dissertation
60
MWSR 871
Dissertation Social Work
180
209
PSYC872
Dissertation (Research Psychology)
116
PSYK872
Research Theory and dissertation in Clinical Psychology
100
PSYV872
Research theory and Dissertation in Counselling
Psychology
100
PSYP872
Research Dissertation in Positive Psychology
60
PSYC871
Dissertation (Psychology)
180
PSYC971
Thesis: Psychology
360
PSYP874
Introduction to Positive Psychology
24
PSYP875
Research methods in Positive Psychology
24
PSYP876
Assessment and Basics of Interventions
24
PSYP877
Applications in Positive Psychology
24
PSYP878
Advanced Positive Psychology
24
TDHP811
Research methodology
16
TDHP812
Transdisciplinary health promotion
16
TDHP813
Dissertation
148
VERB873
Mini-dissertation (Consumer Sciences)
96
VERB871
Dissertation (Consumer Sciences)
184
VERB971
Thesis: Consumer Sciences
360
G.3.5
SCHOOL OF PHYSIOLOGY, NUTRITION AND CONSUMER SCIENCES
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
FLGX612
Cardiovascular Physiology A
16
FLGX613
Neurophysiology
16
FLGX615
Research Methodology (Physiology)
8
FLGX617
Cellular Physiology
8
FLGX618
Occupational Hygiene Monitoring A
16
FLGX621
Cardiovascular Physiology C
16
FLGX622
Toxicology A
16
FLGX624
Toxicology B
16
FLGX625
Endocrinology
16
FLGX627*
Cardiovascular Physiology B
16
FLGX671
Practical Project (Physiology)
32
FLGX884
Occupational Hygiene Monitoring B
24
FLGX885
Vibration, Heat and Ergonomic Factors
24
FLGX886
Labour Legislation
24
FLGX887
Personal Protection Equipment and Radiation
24
210
NUTE871
Nutritional Epidemiology
32
VERB876
Consumer Behaviour and Research Methodology
40
VGHB671
Housing and Community Development
24
VGHB672
Consumer Resource Management
24
VGHB673
Interior Design
24
VGHB874
Advanced Consumer Resource Management
48
VKLE671
Specialised Textile Studies
24
VKLE672
Advanced Fashion Industry
24
VKLE874
Advanced textiles
48
VKLE878
Specialised Fashion Industry
48
VNAM671
Consumer Research Methods and Scientific Writing
24
VNAV671
Research Project – Research Report - Presentation
32
VOED676
Nutrigenetics
16
VOED677
Nutrition Epidemiology
16
VOED678
Research report
32
VOED679
Nutrition at public health level
32
VOED680
Advanced Nutrition
32
VOED681
Sport Nutrition
32
VOED874
Community Nutrition
32
VOED875
Advanced Nutrition Science
32
VOED876
Sport Nutrition
32
VOED880
Nutrition support of the paediatric patient
32
VOED882
Nutrition support of the critically ill
32
VVBG671
Consumer Behaviour
16
VVDL672
Food Product Development
24
VVDL673
Consumer Behaviour in Food
24
VVDL874
Advanced Food
48
VVOO671
Adult Education and Training
16
G.3.6
CENTRE OF EXCELLENCE FOR NUTRITION (CEN)
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
VOED873
Mini-dissertation (Dietetics)
96
VOED871
Dissertation (Dietetics/Nutrition)
192
DIET971
Thesis (Dietetics)
360
VOED971
Thesis (Nutrition)
360
211
G.3.7
HYPERTENSION IN AFRICA RESEARCH TEAM (HART)
Module code
Descriptive name
FLGX871
Dissertation (Physiology)
192
FLGX971
Thesis (Physiology)
384
G.3.8
Module code
CLNP811
CLNP812
CLNP813
CLNP814
CLNP821
Credits
SCHOOL OF PHARMACY
Descriptive name
Credits
Clinical Pharmacy, Social Pharmacy, and Professional
Practice
Clinical Epidemiology, Research Methodology,
Biostatistics, and Evidence-based Medicine
Clinical Pharmacotherapeutics and Therapeutic
Outcomes Management I
Clinical Drug Toxicology, Drug Therapy in Oncology and
the Management of Drug Abuse
Clinical Pharmacotherapeutics and Therapeutic
Outcomes Management II
16
32
24
16
40
FKLT531
Principles of Pharmacokinetics
8
FKLT532
Principles of Pharmacodynamics
16
FKLT533
Drugs for Pain, Inflammation, Fever and Airway
Diseases
16
FKLT541
Drugs and the Peripheral Nervous System
8
FKLT542
Chemotherapy of Infections and Infestations
16
FKLT551
Drugs and the Central Nervous System
16
FKLT552
Hormones, Hominoids and Hormone Antagonists
16
FKLT561
Drugs and the Cardiovascular System
16
FKLT562
Drugs for GIT and Skin Disorders
8
FKLT563
Vitamins, Haematopoietic and Immunopharmacology
8
FKLT564
Advanced Pharmacological Principles
8
FKLT571
Integrated Pharmacology
8
FKLT631
Principles of Pharmacokinetics
8
FKLT632
Principles of Pharmacodynamics
16
FKLT633
Drugs for Pain, Inflammation, Fever and Airway
Diseases
16
FKLT641
Drugs and the Peripheral Nervous System
8
FKLT642
Chemotherapy of Infections and Infestations
16
FKLT651
Drugs and the Central Nervous System
16
FKLT652
Hormones, Hominoids and Hormone Antagonists
16
FKLT661
Drugs and the Cardiovascular System
16
FKLT662
Drugs for GIT and Skin Disorders
8
FKLT663
Vitamins, Haematopoietic and Immunopharmacology
8
212
FKLT664
Advanced Pharmacological Principles
8
FKLT665
Evidence-based Medicine
8
FKLT671
Integrated Pharmacology
8
FMIA613
Biopharmaceutics
16
FPHA611
Introduction to Pharmaco-Economics
16
FPHA612
Managed Pharmaceutical Care
16
FPHA613
Disease Management and Drug utilisation review
16
FPHA621
Pharmacotherapy I
16
FPHA622
Pharmacotherapy II
16
FPHA623
Pharmaco-epidemiology
16
FPHA624
Legislation and Quality Control
16
FPHA625
Medicines Supply Systems
16
FPHA811
Applied Pharmaco-economics
16
FPHA812
Applied Pharmaco-epidemiology
16
G.3.9
NICHE AREA: MEDICINE USAGE IN SOUTH AFRICA (MUSA)
Module code
Descriptive name
CLNP873
Mini-dissertation
64
FPHA872
Dissertation (Pharmacy Practice)
148
FPKG971
Thesis: Pharmacy Practice
360
G.3.10
Credits
CENTRE OF EXCELLENCE FOR PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES
(Pharmacen)
Module code
Descriptive name
FCHG871
Dissertation: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
180
FKLG871
Dissertation: Pharmacology
180
FMSG871
Dissertation: Pharmaceutics
180
FCHG971
Thesis: Pharmaceutical Chemistry
360
FKLG971
Thesis: Pharmacology
360
FMSG971
Thesis: Pharmaceutics
360
G.3.11
Credits
SCHOOL OF NURSING SCIENCES
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
NSCT211
Grounding of Community Nursing
16
NSCT221
Principles of Primary Health Care
16
NSCT271
Community Nursing: Practica
24
NSDT111
Health Science Dynamics
16
213
NSET111
Health Science Education: Introduction
16
NSET211
Health Science Education: Curriculum Studies
16
NSET221
Health Science Education: Didactics
16
NSET271
Health Science Education: Practica
16
NSFT121
Financial Health Management
16
NSHT211
NSHT221
NSHT271
Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment
and Care: Child
Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment
and Care: Adult
Clinical Nursing Science, Health Assessment, Treatment
and Care: Practica (Child and Adult)
16
16
48
NSKT211
Pharmacology
16
NSMT211
Unit/Clinic Management
16
NSMT221
Human Resources Management
16
NSMT271
Health Service Management: Practica
16
NSRT121
Health Science Research
16
VPEK874
Clinical Psychiatric Nursing sciences
32
VPEK875
Psychiatric Nursing skills and methods
32
VPEK876
Psychiatric Nursing practice, leadership and consultation
32
VPEP884
Psychiatric Nursing practical
48
VPKN874
Research Methodology
32
VPVK574
VPVK575
VPVK576
VPVK874
VPVK875
The advanced midwife as practitioner, leader and
consultant
The advanced midwife as clinician in ante-, intra- and
postpartum context
16
32
The advanced midwife as clinician in neonatal context
16
The specialist midwife as practitioner, leader and
consultant
The specialist midwife as clinician in ante-, intra- and
postpartum context
16
32
VPVK876
The specialist midwife as clinician in the neonatal context
16
VPVP584
Advanced midwifery and neonatal nursing science:
Practica
32
VPVP884
Midwifery and neonatal Nursing Science practical
48
G.3.12
FOCUS AREA: QUALITY IN NURSING AND MIDWIFERY (INSINQ)
Module code
Descriptive name
VPES873
Mini-dissertation: Psychiatric Nursing Science
Credits
112
VPVS873
Dissertation: Midwifery and neonatal Nursing Science
112
VPBV872
Dissertation (Health Science Management)
152
VPGV872
Dissertation (Community Nursing Science)
152
214
VPKV872
Dissertation (Professional Nursing Science)
152
VPOV872
Dissertation (Health Science Education)
152
VPVV872
Dissertation (Nursing Science)
152
VPBP971
Thesis: (Health Sciences Management)
360
VPEP971
Thesis: (Psychiatric Community Nursing)
360
VPGP971
Thesis: (Community Nursing Science)
360
VPOP971
Thesis: (Health Science Education)
360
VPPP971
Thesis: (Professional Nursing Science)
360
VPVP971
Thesis: (Midwifery and Neonatal Nursing Science)
360
VPVV971
Thesis: (Nursing Science)
360
G.3.13
ADDITIONAL MODULES (OTHER FACULTIES)
Module code
Descriptive name
Credits
BSKT111
Introduction to Psychology in Work Context
16
BSKT221
Personnel Psychology
16
IOPS311
Organisation Psychology
16
NSGT111
Sociology: Introduction A
16
NSGT121
Sociology: Introduction B
16
OBAD112
Introduction to Public Management
16
STTN111
Descriptive statistics
12
STTN124
Practical statistics
12
Original details: 12331368
2014-11-11
File reference: 7P/7.2.5/P-FHS
215
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement